John Kreiter
The Complete Inner Alchemy Atlas

The chapter challenges our most fundamental assumptions about reality, introducing the idea that our perception of the world is far from accurate and largely shaped by beliefs.

The Illusory Nature of Reality

Opening statement: "The world does not exist the way we think it does." This isn't just a philosophical musing; it's presented as a verified fact, both scientifically and psychologically.

• Modern science has confirmed that everything, including ourselves,

is made of atoms, which are essentially vibrating energy. This leads to the conclusion that we are not the solid, material creatures we imagine, but "as insubstantial as a wisp of smoke."

Ancient Wisdom Meets Modern Science

A key insight:

• "The funny thing is that while science can say that it has

verified to its own conclusion, that indeed we are far less substantial than we imagine, these same truths have been advocated by mystics and ancient schools of thought for thousands of years. If these old dogmas are now considered our reality by modern science, what other ancient ideas might be true as well?" This suggests that what is now "proven" by science has been known by mystics for millennia, opening the door for other ancient concepts to be considered valid.

Human Resistance to Revelation

The author notes resistance to these profound truths:

• We "love to stick to our old routines" and are "comfortable"

with our current understanding.

• The idea of being "insubstantial" seems unhelpful and even

potentially leading to "insanity and chaos." The core tension: the comfort of ignorance versus the challenging truth.

Philosophy and Science on Sensory Limitations

• Philosophers have long questioned our senses, arguing that our

"sensual data and the way that we choose to define our existence is wrong." They believe our senses are flawed and have tried to redefine existence through internal questioning.

• Science, in its evolution, also arrived at the conclusion that

"our senses are not telling us the truth, at least they're not giving us the full picture." This led to the creation of empirical tools and "dogmas" to understand reality.

The Role of Logic

A pivotal concept: logic, which science found particularly interesting.

• Dictionary Definitions of Logic: The book provides five

definitions, emphasizing logic as:

1 The science of correct/reliable inference.

2 A particular method of reasoning.

3 A system of reasoning principles for knowledge/study.

4 Reason or sound judgment.

5 Convincing forcefulness; inexorable truth.

• Author's Operational Definition: For the purpose of this book,

the author offers a more practical, simplified definition: "I know that this is so because of that, where that has been proven empirically."

• Logic, in this sense, acts as a "mental scaffolding," allowing

us to build understanding of complex ideas through empirical evidence.

• All sciences (chemistry, biology, physics) are built on this

"logical mental scaffolding." Modern computational technology itself is based on "yes or no, the 0 or 1," which is logic.

• Why Logic is Introduced: The author clarifies that this isn't a

book on complex logical theory, but logic is brought up because "through some personal introspection, backed up by good logical methodology, we can begin to understand the true fallacy of our external perceptions." This understanding is the first step to expanding perceptions and capabilities.

Logic vs. Reasoning: The Crucial Distinction

Before delving into questioning perceptions, the author introduces a personal, vital distinction:

• Logic: As defined above (empirical proof, reliable inference).
• Reasoning: "the act of making assumptions."

This distinction challenges the traditional view of logic. While logical progression does involve assumptions, the author argues that many things are "assumed to be true without the proof that is necessary to justify them."

• Proof often relies on distant "scientists working somewhere," but

unless you can replicate their conclusions, or they can be proven "beyond a shadow of doubt," you are making an assumption.

• A strong caution: "Scientists, believe it or not, make

mistakes; they also lie, cheat, and cook data if the grant is big enough. Just because a guy with a scientist badge said so doesn't mean it's real; science after all is not supposed to be a religion and 'scientists' are not clergy. I am not saying that scientific data is questionable, what I am saying is that all data should be questioned. Assumption, ANY assumption, is the mother of all screw-ups."

The Flexibility of Logic and the Role of Perception

The author's definition of logic is "far more flexible" in its ability to understand things from "different perspectives." Logical progression can take "different paths" and reach "different conclusions depending on how this data is perceived."

• "The 'perception' here is reasoning and as I have defined above;

reasoning is essentially, an act of assumption."

• Therefore, "Current 'normal' human perception can only occur

through assumption."

The God Example (Assumption and Empirical Evidence)

To illustrate this, the author uses the concept of God:

• Monotheistic Religion (e.g., Christianity): Believes in one God,

creator, to be worshipped.

• Atheistic Thought: Believes in no God, world as mechanistic

creation explainable by measurable laws.

• The Punchline: "The interesting thing is that you can use

logic to prove either one and the only difference between either is where you make an assumption."

• Empirical Definition: The book defines "empirically" as

"relying on or derived from observation or experiment; verifiable or provable by means of observation or experiment."

• Atheist's Flaw: The atheist often relies on empirical

studies to prove their point, dismissing religion as non-empirical. However, the author argues that the atheist's assumption that God is not real is also based on logical methodology.

• Ancient Empirical Evidence: "But what the atheist does

not consider is the fact that there is a great deal of empirical evidence to prove the existence of God as well."

• Ancient Hebrew culture's founders, for instance, were

"highly adept individuals" who "experienced monumental perceptions" and "discovered a methodology that allowed them to have a far more direct communication with something they called God." The success of Christianity itself was "proof of the power of their logical conclusions."

• The "Snobbery": Both atheists and religionists are "snobs"

because they validate their own "empirical evidence" (experimental, observable, practical data) but deny the validity of the other's. "Essentially they are both fighting over an assumption."

Assumption = Belief

The author states this directly: "Assumption = Belief."

• Scientists might claim to work only on "probable theory," but

these theories are often presented as "facts."

• Scientific Theories are Not Absolute: The author reminds us that

scientific theories are always "up for revision." Examples are given:

• In 1794, telling a scientist that meteorites ("rocks from

space") could fall from the sky would be met with disbelief.

• 20 years ago, telling an astrophysicist about "many planets

outside the solar system that can support life" would have been met with skepticism.

• Implication: Challenging established scientific beliefs,

even with empirical evidence, can lead to severe consequences (e.g., Wilhelm Reich).

• Atheist's Blind Spot: The atheist "does not question the fact

that those that believe what he believes... Have never actually performed any real 'empirical' experimentation into the possibility of the existence of God." They also ignore Heisenberg's uncertainty principle (observation affects outcome). The analogy:

"an atheist trying to find God is sort of like a fish trying to find water."

• Christian's Blind Spot: The Christian "does not question the

empirical data that was gathered by individuals that died thousands of years ago." To suggest misinterpretation or tampering is "blasphemy."

• Ego's Role: Both sides are fundamentally driven by ego, which

"is a master at hiding lies and half-truths."

Living Without Beliefs and the "Mad Logician"

The chapter poses a profound question: What if we think logically without coming to any reasonable conclusion? What are we left with?

• Our entire perceptive capability is based on our five senses.
• Anything beyond current perception in the present moment (using

the author's logic) is an assumption and cannot be logically trusted.

• The Past and Future as Fallacies: Logical reasoning based on

past data is an assumption.

• Example: Walking past a mailbox, you remember it's behind

you. Logically, you cannot assume it's still there unless you are currently perceiving it. Many times, our memory of what was seen is wrong.

• Conclusion: "Logic without any reasonable assumptions then

tells us that the only thing that exists is what we can perceive in the present moment. The past and the future are a fallacy and as such the mind is a fallacy as well. Beyond this, things outside of our perceptive abilities are also a type of fallacy because trying to rationalize what they are is a fallacy for this type of logic. We cannot see what is behind a wall or hear what is beyond the range of our hearing; anything beyond our senses does not exist."

• The "Mad Logician": A logician without reasoning (i.e., making

assumptions) cannot be a Christian (heaven is in the future) or an atheist (cannot conclude based on past data they weren't involved in). Such a logician can only perceive the present moment, and in the present moment, "assumptions are an impossibility."

POINTS TO REMEMBER (Chapter 1)

• Logic's Flexibility: Logic is far more flexible than often

realized; it can explain many conclusions.

• Empirical Reliance: Logic is flexible because it relies on

empirical evidence.

• Empirical Evidence is Perception: Empirical evidence is not

absolute truth but perception shared by many individuals.

• Perception and Assumption: Perception is directly related to

reasoning, and reasoning is defined as the act of making assumptions.

• Everything is an Assumption: Nothing can be known with 100%

certainty; therefore, everything is an assumption.

• Assumption = Belief: This is a core equation.
• Belief Determines Identity: Your beliefs define your worldview

(Christian, Atheist, Hindu, Satanist, or "insane logician").

• Beliefs are VERY important.
• Key to Expansion: To expand senses and capabilities, "you

must begin to focus your attention on the present moment because it's the only place free of assumption!"

Chapter 2 continues to dismantle our conventional understanding of reality, focusing specifically on how our senses, particularly vision, deceive us and limit our perception of the "paranormal."

The Lying Senses

The chapter asserts: "Our senses lie." This isn't malicious, but a long-ago decision (or evolution) that seeing things a certain way was preferable for survival.

• Our senses provide a "really limited perspective" of the world.

Understanding this limitation is "very important... Because by realizing that our current perceptions are mistaken, we can become aware of the fact that even within our limited perception, there is the possibility of seeing the world in a completely different way than the one that we are used to."

• their "very limited range" means "there is a lot

going on around us that we are completely unaware of."

Vision: Our Most Important Sense and Its Illusions

The author uses visual illusions to demonstrate how our eyes deceive us:

• Figure 1. Ponzo Illusion:
• Description: Two horizontal lines of equal length appear unequal

due to converging vertical lines (like railroad tracks).

• Teaching: This "false sense of perspective" helps us instantly

judge distance (e.g., predator/prey), showing an evolutionary advantage, but also a built-in "lie" in our perception.

• Figure 2. Kanizsa Triangles:
• Description: Shapes arranged to create the illusion of a white

triangle in the center, which isn't actually drawn.

• Teaching: This "subjective contour" demonstrates how our eyes

(and brain) "easily see this triangle as if it were real," showing how the mind constructs perception. For some, it's "impossible to 'not' see the triangles."

• Figure 3. Depth Spheres:
• Description: Shaded circles appear as spheres or indentations

depending on the perceived light source.

• Teaching: Shading creates an illusion of depth, tricking our

eyes. This is a "simple example of how the eye goes about deceiving us, fooling us into believing an interpretation of what is out there instead of the actual data that we know to exist in reality."

Are Perceptual Irregularities Hardwired? The Pygmy Example

Evolutionary anthropologists suggest these illusions are hardwired for survival. But are they? Can we override them?

• Colin Turnbull's Study (Pygmies in the Congo):
• Pygmies, living entirely in dense forest, lacked the ability to

judge the size of distant objects due to never having seen anything far away.

• Kenge's Experience: Turnbull took his Pygmy guide, Kenge,

out of the forest. Kenge saw a herd of buffalo miles away and thought they were insects. When told they were buffalo, he laughed, disbelieved, and called it "stupid stories." As they drove closer, he watched them "getting larger and larger," eventually concluding it was "witchcraft." Once he realized they were real, his puzzle was "why they had been so small, and whether they had really been small and suddenly grown larger or whether it had been some kind of trickery."

• Teaching: Kenge's experience demonstrates that distance

perception and object sizing are not inherently hardwired but are learned responses heavily influenced by environment and experience.

The Piraha People: Culture and Perception

• Cultural Peculiarity: This Amazonian tribe cannot count beyond

five. Their language lacks words for precise numbers, using only concepts for "smaller" and "larger" amounts.

• Teaching: This shows that human perception is far more

flexible than commonly believed. "Much of our cognitive functioning is a learnt response," as evidenced by studies on "feral children" raised outside civilized indoctrination.

Ancient Mystics vs. Modern Scientists: A Continual Catch-Up

The author states science is only now "catching up" to what "ancient mystics and mystery schools have been saying for a long time: that the world that we see through our senses is not the world that really exists 'out there'." The cognitive studies confirm our perception is "far more skewed."

The "Systematic Indoctrination" of Reality

• Old schools teach that the world we see "is only there because of a

systematic indoctrination."

• This indoctrination is carried out by "every single human being

that we come across," collectively creating "a stable perceptual reality that we can all share."

• Advantages: Allows functioning as a community and species,

dominates environment, enables shared interaction.

• Example: Two people agreeing they see a "house plant"

despite seeing it from different points in space and time. This "cognitive cooperation" is vital for civilization.

• Limitations ("Perceptual Failures"):
• This learned "cognitive slant" prevents us from seeing the

"great marvel of the universe."

• It makes us believe life is "simple and mechanical" (made of

objects), when in reality it's "infinitely mysterious events."

• The author suggests that if the average person saw a more

accurate reality, they would "most likely go temporarily mad."

• Definition of Insanity: "Actually a good definition of

insanity is the inability of an individual to operate on the same cognitive structure as the cognitive structure used by all of the individuals around him."

The King and the Poisoned Well (A Fable)

This fable powerfully illustrates the societal enforcement of perceptual reality:

• The Story: A wise king rules. A witch poisons the city's well,

making everyone who drinks it "mad." The king doesn't drink. The next day, the people, now mad by the witch's definition, perceive the king as "mad" because his behavior is "strange." They decide he must be dethroned. Fearing this, the king drinks from the well, and the people rejoice, believing he "regained his reason."

• The Teaching: This fable vividly demonstrates how "sanity"

or "reality" is a collective agreement. If you deviate from the consensus perception, you are deemed "mad" by the majority, even if they are the ones whose perception has been altered. The king had to conform to the "madness" (the new collective reality) to maintain his position.

Old Schools and Cognitive Re-education

• The old schools believed it took a lifetime to learn how to see the

world, and similarly, a lifetime to "re-teach" oneself to see fundamental reality.

• They viewed the "average cognitive system" as a form of

"slavery."

• Their aim was to "redefine cognitive awareness" for disciples,

enabling them to become "adepts" through cognitive realignment.

• Is this brainwashing? "Certainly in a general sense, any kind

of cognitive re-adjustment is a type of brainwashing." This process creates devoted adepts, ensuring knowledge survival.

• Beyond Collusion: While social scientists might attribute old

schools' power to "communal organizations" and "collusion," the author argues that many joined for "great perceptual power," "increased cognitive ability" leading to wealth, recognition, and thriving, and "a thirst for knowledge."

• Science's Limitation (Revisited): Science struggles to admit a

world beyond its understanding, often seeing power only in social control. It currently "cannot begin to postulate the possibility that humanity has far greater capabilities."

The Electromagnetic Spectrum: Visual Proof of Hidden Reality

• Figure 4. The Electromagnetic Spectrum: This diagram shows the

vast range of electromagnetic radiation, from gamma rays to radio waves.

• Core Teaching: Our eyes can perceive only a "tiny little slit

worth" of this entire spectrum (visible light).

• Implication for the Paranormal: "The next time that a person

tells you that ghosts, UFOs, or any of the other paranormal things that some have reported seeing cannot exist, perhaps you should show him or her this chart. Imagine how utterly simplistic it is to believe that things do not exist because we cannot see them while all around there is a HUGE amount of electromagnetic radiation, a far greater universe of available data, that we 'supposedly' cannot perceive at all."

• This directly challenges the skeptical argument that "seeing is

believing" when our senses are so limited. There could be "something quite close to you right now that would blow your mind if your vision could perceive just a little more of the electromagnetic spectrum."

Changing Understanding, Changing Perception

• Our understanding of the world is "constantly changing." The

scientific community revises what's possible as its understanding expands.

• "Perhaps science one day will discover the fact that our

cognitive system can be changed considerably and perhaps through this change in beliefs, new perceptive abilities will become possible."

• Meteorite Analogy (Revisited): Before the 1800s, "rocks

couldn't fall from the sky... But now they do and we call them meteorites." This shows how beliefs and scientific understanding dictate what is accepted as reality.

POINTS TO REMEMBER (Chapter 2)

• Our senses are lying to us.
• Our senses aren't evil; it's a decision made long ago that our

"current cognitive slant" was preferable.

• Old schools have taught this for thousands of years.
• Old schools believed they could retrain the human cognitive system

to expand awareness.

• Science is playing catch-up with these old schools of thought,

whether it believes it or not.

• People who deny the paranormal because they "can't see it" have

"very little understanding of the vastness of what is out there." Carry an EM spectrum chart.

• Current cognitive slant is heavily dependent on socialization and

learned behavior. Changing that behavior literally changes the world.

• "But never forget the story of the king and the well." (The

power of collective belief and the pressure to conform.)

This chapter goes deeper into the societal mechanisms that shape our perception, focusing on how collective agreement and "memes" enforce a singular reality, and how to begin breaking free from this indoctrination by questioning fundamental beliefs.

How We Form Perceptual Conclusions

The author explains that our perception of reality is primarily based on shared experience and validation:

• We perceive data with our senses, conduct "experiments" (e.g.,

touching a furry object), and then check if others get the "same results."

• "If enough people agree that there is indeed a 6 foot tall pink

bunny rabbit then the 6 foot tall pink bunny rabbit is real."

• The Consequence of Non-Conformity: "If we see this 6 foot

tall pink bunny rabbit and insist that it is there even though no one else can see it, then we are shipped off to a loony bin and doctors either 'fix' us or we are sequestered somewhere, kept far away from normal people so that we do not scare them with our 'unreasonable' perceptions."

• This shows that "sanity" is defined by collective

agreement, and deviating from it leads to ostracization or institutionalization. The footnote references the movie "Harvey," a classic about a man with an invisible giant rabbit friend.

The Pervasive Indoctrination from Birth

Our cognitive conditioning begins from the moment we become aware:

• Parents and others define the world for us (e.g., "Look Billy

you're on a chair. This is a chair isn't it hard?").

• This process allows us to understand and communicate within the

shared reality ("no monster in your closet... No Santa Claus... But if you put your hand on the fire you will get burned").

• Telepathic Conditioning? The author provocatively suggests that

"if we take it for granted that telepathic communication does exist, then we must conclude that this cognitive conditioning might even begin before we are born (while we are conscious in the womb), while we sleep, and for the rest of our lives whether we are aware of it or not."

• Footnote \[2\]: References Victor, the feral boy, who could

pluck potatoes from boiling water without discomfort, suggesting that early, unconditioned human perception might bypass certain physical reactions common in "civilized" people.

• Telepathy "Is Not Real"?: The author challenges this notion

by listing concepts like "the hundredth monkey effect," "double-blind" drug experiments (which often rely on placebo, i.e., belief), Carl Jung's collective unconscious, Rupert Sheldrake, and Joseph Banks Rhine -- all associated with ideas beyond conventional scientific understanding, implying they support the reality of telepathy or similar phenomena.

The Power of Memes

The concept of a "meme" is introduced as a central mechanism of this societal control of beliefs:

• Definition: "An idea, behavior or style that spreads from

person to person within a culture." Memes carry cultural ideas, symbols, practices, transmitted through writing, speech, gestures, rituals, etc. They are like "cultural analogues to genes," self-replicating and mutating.

• Influence: These "infectious ideas" dictate human action and

perception. They range from small (a hand gesture) to large (global religious movements).

• The "Mob" Effect: The human desire to perpetuate a meme and

"become part of a collective unit (or mob) is amazing."

• Memes as Entities: The author metaphorically suggests memes

"seem to somehow become live entities that feed off of the attention and energy that is given off by its believers." They are like "weather patterns" affecting Earth, clashing and creating "complex chaotic systems," making their consequences difficult to forecast.

Limitations of the Collective Human Psyche

Understanding these "complex chaotic systems" is essential because they profoundly affect us. The "grand structure" of the "collective human psyche" has both advantages and disadvantages:

• Advantages: It creates "highly organized social structures that

benefit the many."

• Disadvantages: It creates "many limitations upon those that are

a part of the system."

• Being part of the system means being "essentially stuck in a

'matrix'... Where you believe the notion that the world exists in only one way."

• Anyone who "steps outside of this belief system, this

collective human belief, is in danger of being ostracized and quite possibly killed."

• Footnote \[4\]: Mentions "Twilight" vampires, suggesting how

even "paranormal interest" in high school is highly structured by popular memes to be "comical" and not truly real.

• The dark truth: History shows that powerful memes (witch

trials, Christianity, communism, capitalism) have led to torture and death.

How Indoctrination Limits Perception

The book aims to show how this "indoctrinated belief structure limits our potential perceptive capabilities." The author uses the example of "imaginary friends" to illustrate this process:

• Early Childhood: Imaginary friends are seen as "healthy

childish imagination."

• Societal Pressure: The word "childish" reveals how society

views this "perceptual oddity"---the ability to interact with "insubstantial, invisible, or imaginary" objects.

• Curtailing Imagination: Parents begin to "curtail this

imagination" by teaching children that many things they perceive "don't exist."

• School and Conformity:
• By Grade 5, continued belief in imaginary friends leads to

worry, psychiatric consideration, and potential medication (e.g., Ritalin).

• Peers, swayed by the "new and more powerful belief system or

meme," engage in bullying and ostracizing behavior to push non-conformists out.

• In high school, this "collective 'mind set' has taken gigantic

proportions," making non-conformity extremely dangerous, even leading to "suicides and murders."

• Adulthood: This developmental process is seen as a "highly

focused and incredibly powerful indoctrinating system," allowing "very little deviation from a structured belief system." While beneficial for social structure, it comes at a cost:

• Fringe elements are controlled to prevent revolution.
• "As a collective homogeny the human race sets huge limits

upon itself and its capabilities."

Escaping the Structured Belief System

• The author states the need to "study this structured belief system

so that we may understand how to escape it!"

• Beliefs Change Brains: This is a teaching. "Belief

systems change our brains."

• They control what we focus on and ignore, directly influencing

which nerve structures in our brain are engaged. More use leads to increased complexity and number of nerve structures.

• fMRI and Placebos: Functional magnetic resonance imaging

(fMRI) reveals the subconscious's ability to engage brain parts while ignoring conscious awareness. Placebo effects demonstrate that a "belief in the certainty of a medication will engage the deep subconscious part of ourselves that can alter the brain's physiology in order to suit those beliefs."

• "In other words a belief is so strong that it can actually

change how your brain functions and by concentrating on this belief over a long period of time you can indeed change the physiology of the brain through nerve conditioning."

Taking Responsibility for Your Own Beliefs

To make fundamental changes in cognitive abilities, there's no need for revolution or overthrowing "giant organizations." This system is "created through our own participation."

• "We can begin the process of extricating ourselves from it and

expanding our capabilities by taking responsibility for our own beliefs."

• No need to "take on the big belief systems like: Religion \[or\]

Politics."

Questioning Fundamental Beliefs (Practical Exercises)

To change yourself, explore more fundamental beliefs:

• Color: "Is my red the same as your red? Who said red was red?"
• Names: "Who came up with the original names? Why can't I make

up my own names?"

• Word Repetition Exercise: "Try repeating the word house over

and over again until the word becomes silly in your mind. Why don't I think that all words are silly?" This breaks the conditioned meaning.

• Breathing: "Do I need to breathe? Is the way that I'm breathing

right? Is there a better way to breathe?... Why don't rocks breathe?"

• Challenge Science: Science has answers to these, but "who

said that it was right?" Since you can't verify scientific conclusions yourself, you're taking them "on faith." "Perhaps you should start believing in yourself."

The Impact of Questioning

• These questions, though seemingly silly, target "fundamental

beliefs that we all have, that quite possibly you have never questioned." These beliefs were "imposed upon you from the day of your birth (and if telepathy is real, from a time even before you were out of the womb)."

• Questioning them systematically "restructures that belief system."
• "This slight alteration in how you perceive the reality about you

can have some dramatic effects."

• "Life is what it is because of what we believe." Its order is

maintained by our failure or unwillingness to question beliefs.

• Action: "Begin to question all the simple things you take for

granted around you. Question the labels that you use to understand your life."

• Overcoming Fear: Fear of "wasting your time" or "losing your

mind" arises because these beliefs are "so fundamental to your existence that questioning them implies a form of insanity."

• "If you wish to go beyond what you believe is possible, this is

where you begin."

POINTS TO REMEMBER (Chapter 3)

• You are what you believe.
• You perceive what you believe that you can perceive.
• From birth (or even before, if telepathy is real), the world imposes

its beliefs upon you.

• Memes are like viruses; understanding their power helps

comprehend how beliefs control large groups and explain our perceptions.

• To change perceptions and escape indoctrination, you don't need a

revolution; you need to begin by questioning your most fundamental beliefs.

This is a close look at the foundational concepts. The author systematically breaks down our ingrained assumptions, from the scientific understanding of matter to the societal construction of "reality" itself. The core message is that our perception is not an objective window but a conditioned lens, and by recognizing and challenging the beliefs that shape this lens, we can begin to expand our awareness and interact with a far more complex and "paranormal" world. The emphasis on the power of belief and the need for individual introspection and questioning forms the bedrock for the practical exercises to follow.

We are continuing our close look at John Kreiter's "The Occult Experience: Proof of the Paranormal." Having laid the groundwork by challenging our fundamental assumptions about reality and the limitations of our senses, we now move into the practical application of these profound concepts.

Chapter 4 marks a pivotal shift from theoretical understanding to practical application. The author emphasizes that true expansion of perception hinges on challenging ingrained beliefs and, more practically, breaking established routines.

The Foundation of Understanding

The author reiterates the purpose of the preceding chapters: to build a foundation for understanding why we perceive the world as we do. The core takeaway is that "most of our perceptive abilities, and as a result our capabilities, are the result of what we believe and what we have been told to believe since our birth."

The Paramount Importance of Beliefs

This concept is so vital it's re-emphasized:

• "Beliefs are very important; they control what you will

experience in this life."

• To expand psychic abilities, one must "truly believe that you can

change how you see the world."

• This change in belief reveals that "the world, and our perceptions,

are far more malleable than we might presume. That there is magic just around the corner if we only allow ourselves to believe that we can see it and use it." The author strongly encourages independent exploration of beliefs, suggesting further reading for those who need to deepen this understanding. Personal conviction is the only barrier.

The Old Schools and Breaking Routines

The ancient "old schools" understood the difficulty of changing deeply held beliefs directly. Their ingenious solution was to "focus their efforts on breaking routines."

• What is a Routine? A routine is "a sequence of actions that you

regularly follow."

• Routines and Beliefs: Each belief, or group of beliefs, creates

a conditioned response. "If something is repeated over and over again, this physical and mental action changes the structure of the body and the brain." This "hardwires" us into specific actions.

• Analogy: A tennis player's neural and nerve structures for

racket swinging become denser and more numerous, forming "superhighways" of connections. Muscles, sinew, and bone also adapt.

• The Power of Breaking Routines: Since beliefs control actions

and thus shape our nervous structure, it's easier to break the conditioned responses (routines) than the beliefs themselves. "Put simply, breaking your perceptual routines allows you to see things that you have not seen before." It's like repeating a word until it loses its habitual meaning, allowing new perceptions of it.

Methods of Routine Breaking

1 Ritual Behavior:

• "Any kind of ritual behavior is a type of routine break."

Rituals involve "highly stylized actions and procedures that are not to be found in regular life" (e.g., a Christian mass).

• Performing rituals creates a "perceptual break" that allows

awareness to "break from its usual perceptual boundaries and limitations."

• "The term weird in the English language actually refers to

this kind of routine break. Usually by doing something weird you begin to perceive the Weird around you. Weird begets weird; it breaks perceptual routine and creates perceptive expansion."

2 Wu-wei (Not-Doing):

• An ancient Taoist methodology, often translated as

"not-doing."

• Modern interpretation sees it as knowing "when to act and

understanding the natural flow."

• Author's Deeper Meaning: Wu-wei is "far more complicated"

and involves the "ability of the body and being to act without conscious attention." It's a "highly complex and very powerful 'routine break'" aimed at dissolving perceptual barriers.

• Taoists believed prolonged Wu-wei practice could lead to a

"huge perceptual break," transforming the disciple into an "enlightened immortal" (footnote [5] questions societal limits on lifespan, suggesting belief influences even death).

• Practical Outcome: While not necessarily achieving

immortality, these breaks lead to "small perceptual oddities" that can "scare the wits out of you," revealing the malleability of awareness.

• Crucial Advice: "Go Slow!" Make incremental gains and

allow new realizations to "cement themselves within your psyche" to avoid overwhelming "onslaught."

Specific "Not-Doing" Exercises

• Looking at Space, Not Objects:
• Problem: We are conditioned to look at objects and ignore the

space that defines them. Space is often seen as mere "real estate" for objects.

• Exercise: Find a quiet place, look at the space around

objects, beneath tables, above furniture, "every inch of empty space." Intentionally focus on it, "try to see something there."

• Variation: While walking, focus on the space around you (while

still being safe). When looking at a tree, stare at the spaces between the leaves to understand space as a "boundary that creates a definition."

• Duration: Minimum 15 minutes, extend to an hour. Observe

feelings.

• Looking at Shadows:
• Problem: Shadows are also "always overlooked" but define

space.

• Exercise: Focus intently on the shadow of an object for 15

minutes, extend to an hour.

• Observation: The shadow might feel "sort of like glue that

holds an object in place." Explore feelings.

• Doing Something for Absolutely No Reason:
• Problem: We are conditioned to do everything for a reason

(efficiency, energy saving, even play is rationalized by science).

• Exercise: Perform tasks with "absolutely no reason at all."

Stack books in the middle of a room, then remove them. Jump up and down, wave arms, "not because you want to get exercise but for no reason at all."

• Variation: Rearrange furniture to face one direction for no

reason. Observe feelings, especially when others react.

• Laughing for No Reason:
• Exercise: Begin to laugh spontaneously, against "reasonable

behavior." It might take effort but can become "hysterically" tiring.

• The Amnesia Game:
• Exercise: Sit or walk, pretending you have amnesia. You can't

remember the past or anticipate the future; the "only thing you know for certain is what you are looking at right now." Bring your mind back to this state if it drifts.

• Duration: 15 minutes, extend to an hour.
• Doing Something Crazy in Public (Ultimate Routine Breaker):
• Disclaimer: The author warns to "be most careful" and takes

no responsibility.

• Exercise: Perform something "completely odd" in public (e.g.,

laughing for no reason, jumping jacks).

• Impact: This "not-doing" is "perhaps the most powerful one"

for the average person, as it directly confronts societal conditioning and self-perception ("your mind will go crazy here").

Cumulative Effects and Developing Will

• Destabilizing Effect: These exercises have a cumulative,

destabilizing effect.

• Multiple Perspectives: You begin to "look at things from more

than just one perspective," leading to "greater perception." This can sometimes cause "addle-brained" feelings due to increased consideration.

• Inner Strength/Energy: Many report developing a "certain type

of energy" or "inner strength" that can be applied elsewhere. This comes from expanding belief in what's possible, recognizing "choice."

• Perception as Choice: You realize "the way you perceive things

is a type of choice," and continually making this choice "develops your willpower." A robot follows programming, but a "free being needs to have will."

• "Not-doing exercises develop your will!"

Dealing with the Onslaught

• World "Falling Apart": After sustained practice, your world

might feel like it's "falling apart." This can be "quite scary" and might tempt you to abandon the exercises.

• The "Scariest Thing": The most frightening aspect is "to

begin to see the world in a different light and to fundamentally begin to believe that the world around you is far stranger than you thought." It's like seeing a unicorn and losing perceptual innocence.

• Maintaining Sanity: Use new understanding and willpower to

realize that a stranger world doesn't mean insanity. "You can have the Weird alongside with the 'normal'."

• Slow Progress: This is why "taking these exercises slowly" is

recommended -- incremental gains, allowing new realizations to "cement themselves within your psyche," preventing "complete onslaught."

Journaling

• Mandatory Practice: Keep a log of all exercises, their duration,

and especially "what these exercises are doing to you."

• Purpose: Explore your feelings and "subjective reality" to

notice "gradual change in how you perceive yourself and the world around you." This log is invaluable for replicating successful experiments.

Chapter 5 moves into the direct experience of subtle energies, offering practical techniques for perceiving auras and sensing energy with the body, tying back to the book's core premise that reality is fundamentally vibrational.

Everything is Vibrational Energy

The chapter begins by recalling the first chapter's teaching:

• Science acknowledges that atoms are "vibrational energy," meaning

"we are vibrating energy." We are not solid objects.

• "Everything that we see around us, even what we considered to be

empty space, is actually vibrating energy."

• Our eyes, as shown with the electromagnetic spectrum, perceive only

a "very small amount of the energy that makes up all of the things around us."

Expanding Perceptual Capabilities

This chapter aims to help you "perceive a little more of this electromagnetic spectrum," specifically to "increase our perceptions of the world."

• The Challenge of Belief: The author acknowledges the common

skepticism towards seeing auras, where people think you're "a bit of a nut or full of bull." This stems from the difficulty for "the average person to even conceptualize the fact that there is something more out there that can be perceived right now by anyone, if only they were to change their beliefs and visual focus just a bit."

• The Promise: "The fact of the matter though is that

perceiving auras is not a very difficult thing and once you have learnt how, you will be amazed that you hadn't been able to do this all your life."

Understanding Eye Structure: Rods and Cones

To see auras, you need to understand and train your photoreceptors:

• Cones: Active at higher light levels, responsible for color

vision and spatial acuity. We are confident in what our cones show us.

• Rods: Responsible for vision at low light levels, not capable of

perceiving color well. They primarily enable night vision.

• The Key: Rods can pick up a "different range of the

electromagnetic spectrum than can the cones; they can see a little more into the ultraviolet and infrared." By training yourself to use your rod receptors better, "you will be able to pick up subtler energy frequencies."

Exercise 1: Training Rod Photoreceptors (Night Vision)

1 Setting: Wait until nighttime, turn off all lights in a room,

allow eyes to slowly adjust to low light (some minimal light is preferable).

2 Direct vs. Peripheral Vision: Try to look directly at an object

-- it's difficult to see clearly. Then, try to look at the object from the "corner of your eye" (e.g., slightly above or to the side).

3 Observation: You will notice that through peripheral vision,

you perceive the object "far more clearly." This is because rods are concentrated around the periphery of your retina.

4 Navigating the Dark: To increase night vision, navigate the dark

room by "looking at things through the corner of your eyes." You'll be "amazed at how much more you can see by using your peripheral vision."

5 Maintaining Acuity (Visual Purple): Increased night vision (due

to "visual purple" in rods) can dissipate quickly. To replenish it, "keep your eyes darting back and forth or perhaps in a circle" while using peripheral vision. This uses different parts of the retina, allowing faster replenishment.

Transitioning to Aura Vision

This rod-training exercise provides an understanding of how rods work. The next step is to "engage these rods and cones simultaneously so that you are actually able to perceive the energetic radiation that surrounds everything around you."

The Energetic Body (Candle Flame Analogy)

The author explains the body's energetic layers, framing them for visual perception:

• The "Solid" Body: Our "solid object" body is actually

"vibrating energy," similar to a "candle flame." The core of the flame is dense, interacting with other dense matter.

• The Etheric Body: Just beyond the physical body/flame (about

half an inch), there's a slightly denser frequency of energy than air, like the "heat that is given off by the flame." Western Mystics call this the Etheric body.

• The Emotional Body (Aura): The next layer, easily visible with

practice, is "sort of like the light that is given off by the candle flame." This is the emotional body, "even less dense than the other two," extending "quite a distance around the body," often described as "somewhat egg shaped."

• The Challenge: Most people can perceive the physical body but

not the radiation it emits, unless taught.

Sensing Energy with Hands/Forearms

Before visual aura perception, the author introduces a kinesthetic approach:

• "Being able to perceive energy with your skin is simple and can

be done by anybody."

• Exercise 2: Ethereal Caress Method:

1 Hold one hand out, palm open.

2 Slowly brush the other hand over the forearm of the first hand,

about 2 inches from the skin, without touching.

3 Concentrate on the stationary forearm, ignoring the moving hand.

4 You should feel a "slight displacement" or "some heat."

This displacement is caused by the body's radiated energy -- you are feeling your aura.

• Forearms as Receptive Tools: The fine hairs on forearms are

"incredibly receptive tools," picking up "electric energy, static energy, shifts in wind and air pressure," and eventually "the presence of another living entity."

• Practice: Practice walking around, paying attention to forearm

sensations. Over time, sensitivity increases, allowing hands/forearms to be used "to great advantage."

• Partner Exercise: With a friend, use this method to feel

displacements along their body, "especially around the areas where there are supposedly Chakras" (footnote [6] defines chakras as energy vortexes, noting different belief systems have different numbers/positions, and suggests exploring their location based on nerve fiber concentration).

Seeing Your First Aura (Visual Technique)

This is the core visual exercise for aura perception:

1 Setup: Friend stands against a white, gray, or pale-colored

wall. Dim the light to create a "twilight effect."

2 Focus Point: Have your friend stick out their thumb about 6

inches from their face/body. You relax and focus on the tip of the thumb, keeping the thumb in clear focus while the rest of the body is slightly out of focus.

3 Initial Perception: While maintaining focus on the thumb, pay

attention to the blurred body of your friend. If relaxed and lighting is good, you should see a "thin corona or a mist of white or blue light" around them.

4 Eye Movement for Clarity: If having trouble, return to thumb

focus. When the blurred effect is achieved, "look around the head and shoulders of your friend darting your eyes back and forth." This helps activate rods. With practice, you might start seeing colors and "flares of energy."

5 Observing Changes (Emotion):

• Have your friend take a deep breath and think of something they

"really like." Observe any "change in the aura" (color, intensity).

• Then, have them think of something they "really hate." Again,

observe changes.

6 Memorize the Feeling: "As you are doing all this, try to

memorize the feeling of what you're doing." This "memory feeling" is crucial for duplicating the perceptive ability in the future.

Continued Practice and Skepticism

• Consistent Practice: "Go out there and practice seeing auras as

much as possible," especially in lowlight. Eventually, you can see them in most lighting.

• Obstacles: If you struggle, it's likely due to difficulty

"relaxing yourself and allowing yourself to believe that you are seeing what you are seeing." The collective psyche "usually block this perception out because our collective psyche tells us that it doesn't exist."

• Aura Color Meanings (Reference Guide): The author provides a

general reference, encouraging readers to build their own catalog of meanings through practice:

• Brown: inflated ego, desire to win.
• Beige: dependent, cowardly.
• Olive, drab: lying, deceit, jealousy.
• Green, lime green: high energy, intention.
• Yellow: charisma, mental energy.
• Pink: loving energy.
• Practical Use: Understanding aura colors can help "understand

their intention," whether someone is lying, or their "next move."

Application to Paranormal Research

• Scanning for Energy: Using the peripheral vision technique in

"paranormal areas" allows you to pick up "color alterations" or "energy vortexes."

• Paranormal Phenomena: Large sources of electromagnetic energy

"usually feed supernatural phenomenon." Areas with concentrated fields "will usually exhibit paranormal phenomena."

• Ghost Vision: Enhanced vision can help "look for ghosts,"

which can create a "small auric field."

• Kinesthetic Sensing: Use your "kinesthetic sense"

(forearms/hands) to feel energy displacements in the environment.

• The Reward: "Expand your capabilities with practice and the

desire to see. You will eventually discover the amazing complexity of the world around you." Mastering these methods allows your body and enhanced senses to guide you toward "paranormal activity."

Chapter 6 tackles perhaps the most fundamental routine we adhere to: our sleep cycle. The author argues that disrupting this deeply ingrained pattern is a powerful way to expand consciousness, tap into the subconscious, and experience reality in a completely different, more fluid way.

Beliefs, Brains, and Routines

The chapter starts by reiterating key concepts:

• "What we see 'out there' is the result of beliefs."
• Beliefs have "incredible power" over perception.
• "These beliefs create certain neural pattern in our brains which

are enforced and reinforced during the course of our lives through repetition." This repetitive pattern becomes a "routine" that we "take for granted," serving as a "salve" to make us feel comfortable in a seemingly understood world.

• The Danger: While comfort isn't bad, "hypnotizing ourselves

into believing that this is the only way of things, can be quite dangerous."

The Sleep Cycle: The Greatest Routine

• Our sleep cycle is identified as "one of the greatest routines that

we have, perhaps even the greatest."

• It's not natural: Our conventional sleep patterns (e.g., 8

hours straight) have "very little to do with natural human sleeping cycles and is actually completely controlled by what we believe."

Challenging the Modern Sleep Myth

• Circadian Rhythm: Scientists now believe our circadian rhythm is

greatly controlled by the sun, leading to natural sleep at night and wakefulness during the day.

• Hunter-Gatherer Sleep: However, "more natural people,

hunter-gatherers living far away from civilized areas, tend to have a sleep cycle that is highly varied." They don't sleep all night and wake all day; they often take "long sleep breaks during the day" and are active at night. The idea of humans being "fearful and highly ill-disposed creatures at night is silly."

• Agricultural Era Shift: The shift to agricultural societies

introduced the "all night" sleep cycle, necessary for daytime field work. But even then, it wasn't a constant 8-hour chunk. "It actually consisted of two chunks." Ancestors would sleep early, wake for a few hours (when "much of the fairytale world of our forefathers became alive" -- footnote [7] suggests researching Thomas Wehr and Roger Ekirch's "At Day's Close" for more on this historical "biphasic" sleep), then return to sleep until morning.

• Modern Rigidity: Despite technological advances (e.g.,

electricity for light), our modern age has imposed "a more rigid sense of what sleep is supposed to be." Even nocturnal individuals often try to maintain a straight 8-hour block. The 9-to-5 schedule further enforces this.

• Body's Needs: Our bodies are "made to take shorter breaks."

Going 8+ hours without food/water while sleeping is unnatural and "hurts the body." Wakeful attention needs rest after 6+ hours. This explains the popularity of coffee shops.

• Side Note (Spanish Siesta): The Spanish practice of taking a

large nap during the day leads to legendary nightlife (11 PM-7 AM fun in Madrid), demonstrating a different, valid sleep pattern.

Breaking the Sleep Cycle Routine

• The Greatest Routine to Break: "Breaking this modern sleep

cycle is probably one of the greatest things that you can do to begin to experience a wholly different reality."

• Benefits: It's "not only sensory enhancing; it is also good

for the body."

• Conscious Subconscious Access: Disrupting the sleep cycle

"naturally opens up this segregation of the conscious and subconscious mind." You become "far more conscious during the times when you previously thought you were dead to the world."

• Perceptual Occurrences: You'll experience "many interesting

perceptual occurrences during your awake time" (footnote [8] lists increased intuition, insights, euphoria, relaxed state, creativity, potent visualizations).

• Blurring Divisions: Shorter sleep cycles "blurs the division

somewhat between sleeping consciousness and wakeful consciousness." You become more aware of dreams and your "sleep life." Wakefulness becomes "less painful and far more fluid," less consumed by the "stark concreteness of the objective world."

Recommended Sleep Cycles

• The author's successful pattern: "one chunk of sleep of five

hours followed by a nap during the day." Naps should be no more than half an hour.

• Variation: "large sleep chunk of four hours and then taking two

small naps."

• Commitment: Dedicate a "whole month" to changing your sleep

cycle. It will be hard initially, but with time, it becomes easier, leading to "amazing changes in your consciousness."

• For Full-Time Workers: Stay up late for 5 hours of sleep, then

nap right after work. Groggy feelings initially will dissipate.

• Footnote \[9\]: The grogginess is a "wonderful relaxant"

produced by the body; don't fight it, let it envelop you. It can quiet the mind and help with nervous conditions.

Hypnagogic and Hypnopompic Exercises

For those finding it hard to start breaking sleep cycles, these exercises are a stepping stone:

• Hypnagogic: The drowsy, half-asleep period just before falling

asleep.

• Hypnopompic: The drowsy, half-awake state just after waking

from a long rest. This is the "wonderful time... When you can just soar between sleeping and waking."

• Purpose: These exercises "extend the reach of your conscious

mind into the sleeping world." They allow you to "go deeper and deeper into your subconscious and dreaming self," altering perception and physiology.

Symptoms of These Exercises

• Mental Hallucinations: Initially, seeing "lights and swirling

geometric patterns." Hypnopompic exercises might go straight into a dream or start with these patterns if you've been awake a while.

• Sleep Paralysis: "Your body is basically passing out."

This is responsible for head bobbing when falling asleep. Full-body paralysis sets in.

• Full Hallucination: Just before or after sleep paralysis,

you'll experience "full on hallucination"---odd mental events, flashing objects, weird body sensations, or even "fully engaged events where you could essentially be said to be dreaming."

• Sound Hallucinations: Hearing people talk or "weird buzzing

noises."

The Trick

• Wake Up Before Full Sleep: The goal is to wake yourself *just

before* full sleep to "consciously remember the physiological hallucinations." With practice, you can extend time in this "threshold of consciousness," experiencing a "weird ethereal world where the nature of reality collapses."

How to Perform Hypnagogic Exercises

• Position: Sitting position is easier than lying down, as it's

not a natural sleep position, making it easier to avoid deep sleep and leading to "more interesting and vivid" effects.

• Method 1 (Head Bob): Find a comfortable sitting position and

"let yourself drift off," allowing the bob of your head to wake you.

• Method 2 (Object Drop): Hold a relatively heavy object in your

hand. When sleep paralysis sets in and your grip loosens, the object drops, clattering, and bringing you back to consciousness.

How to Perform Hypnopompic Exercises

• Alarm Clock Method: Set your alarm clock half an hour earlier

than needed. When it rings, hit snooze for 5-10 minutes, and repeat this for the entire extra half-hour. This lets you "go back to sleep" but "wake up every 10 minutes" to remember the sleep state. Extend to an hour if desired.

• Tips for Help:
• If not experiencing much consciously, wake a little more after

the first alarm (sit up, stretch, deep breaths) before trying to go back to sleep.

• Hearing-Impaired Alarm Clock: Use a vibrating pad under the

pillow to avoid waking a partner.

Journaling for These Exercises

• Log Hallucinations: "Keep a log of all of the hallucinations

that you have during these exercises in your journal."

• Questions: Ask yourself questions before exercises and see if

hallucinations provide answers.

• Control: Try to control hallucinations and observe the willpower

required.

• Out-of-Body & Fantasy: Attempt out-of-body experiences or live

out fantasies within these states.

• Time Distortion: "Keep track of the time during these

hallucinations; is there a difference between the time that you think you spent in this exercise and the actual time that this exercise took in the objective world? Does time become elastic during these hallucinations? How does this elastic time make you feel?"

The Ultimate Goal

• While hypnagogic/hypnopompic exercises open consciousness, the

author hopes they lead to changing your sleep cycle permanently. The latter "can completely alter your reality on a full-time basis."

• "Magic(k) begins to come back into your life when you change your

sleeping cycles." Perceptions usually called "hallucinatory phenomena" become "far more prevalent."

• Not Hallucinations: These aren't just hallucinations but

"symbolic representations of what is going on inside your subconscious mind." Many are "quite legitimate extrasensory perceptions."

• Blurring Lines: Changing sleep cycles blurs the lines between

conscious and sleeping self, conscious and subconscious self.

• "Running Consciousness": Pay more attention to daily thoughts,

as they are "your connection to a deeper part of yourself" and "a greater perception of the world."

• Inner and Outer Mind: When working together, they "provide an

incredibly rich source of extra-sensory perception."

The progression here is clear: from deconstructing our perception to providing concrete methods to consciously alter it. The next chapter will build on these insights, delving into the powerful implications of consciously shifting our belief systems.

We've journeyed through the intricate ways our perceptions are shaped by our senses, our society, and our most fundamental beliefs. Now, John Kreiter takes us beyond understanding how our reality is constructed to how we can actively reconstruct it, and what challenges and tools await us on this profound journey.

Chapter 7 serves as the culmination of the foundational work, pushing the reader to the ultimate frontier of perception: the deliberate and active manipulation of one's own belief system. It's presented as the most challenging yet most rewarding step, capable of profoundly altering one's reality.

Review of Techniques So Far

The author reminds us of the tools already explored, which are designed to expand our perception beyond the "normal":

• Not-doing exercises: Breaking perceptual routines to see things

differently.

• Auric vision: Training the eyes (especially rods) to perceive

subtle energy fields.

• Disrupting sleeping cycles: Altering sleep patterns to access

the subconscious more consciously.

• Hypnagogic and hypnopompic exercises: Consciously exploring the

states between waking and sleeping, leading to enhanced perceptions.

These techniques, the author asserts, are powerful enough on their own to introduce one to a new existence where the paranormal is commonplace. They are designed to expand perceptive abilities and provide more "information."

The Final Step: Wholesome Belief in the Supernatural

While previous exercises can yield results without a radical shift in belief, The chapter the "final thing" required for "greater vision and perception" -- a direct return to the power of beliefs.

• "This final step is beginning to admit to yourself wholeheartedly

that what most consider the supernatural is actually real."

• The Logic: By consistently increasing your range of perception

through the exercises, you will "begin to prove to yourself that these paranormal realities do in fact exist."

• Natural Expansion: Once this belief is truly cemented, you will

"naturally expand your awareness." The exercises will then provide a "modicum of control" over this expanding awareness, allowing you to "channel it and focus your range of perceptions in the direction that you choose."

• The Empowering Truth: "It is possible for you take a more

active role in this fundamental change in beliefs." This is the core teaching of this chapter.

The Belief Manipulation Exercise

This exercise is presented as a way to "manipulate your beliefs to a great degree." While simple to describe, it requires "strong focus and effort."

Exercise: Believing with Every Fiber of Your Being

1 Environment: Find a quiet, undisturbed place where you can be

alone.

2 The Core Act: For "five to twenty minutes, believe with every

single fiber of your being that you can see; ghosts, UFOs, aliens, monsters, auric fields, the weird, etc."

• Specificity: Choose one specific thing from the list to

focus on. For example, "believe with every fiber of your being that you can see ghosts, that you have the capability to see these entities and if there is one around you, you can see it now."

3 After the Exercise: Once done, "forget about it and go about

your daily business as usual." Do not dwell on it.

4 Repetition: Perform this exercise for "five days in a row,

once a day if you can." Then, take "a couple of weeks off and then do it again for five days in a row in a type of repetitive cycle."

The Challenge and Effects

• Difficulty: This exercise is "far harder than it first

appears." It's "quite a taxing thing to try and believe something with every fiber of your being."

• Comparison: It's like "playing a game of pretend but one that

has to be maintained for a period of time without any relaxation." This requires "incredible amount of concentration and effort," potentially causing you to "actually begin to sweat."

• Journaling: "Remember your journal and write down when you

performed the exercise and any experiences you might have from doing the exercise." Track "slight changes within you over time" and your "subjective/mental scape."

• Manifestations of Change: This exercise directly works on your

"psyche and change old beliefs into new ones." Manifestations include:

• Odd synchronicities: Meaningful coincidences.
• New desires or impulses: To try things you previously

avoided.

• An "odd sense of confidence."
• Increased "impetus" to try other exercises (e.g., auric

vision after practicing seeing ghosts).

• Changes in perceptual structure: You become "more disposed

to the possibility of seeing ghosts," activating "unused perceptive abilities that are latent within you." You might notice things previously overlooked, like "air displacements or odd shadows."

Confronting Fear: The First Challenge

• The Reality of the Paranormal: As you believe more, the reality

of the paranormal becomes "very 'real'."

• "Fear will always be the first challenge in seeking the

paranormal and it is this fear that you must combat."

• Spooky Areas: After practicing for a while, perform this

exercise in an area with known or suspected paranormal activity. This directly combats the "desire to flee from that which you actually wish to perceive."

• Human Repression: Most people overlook paranormal activity

because they "have a deep fear of actually seeing something." They "naturally turn away from the strangeness." Many repress natural talents to avoid this fear.

• Ghost Hunters: Even intrepid ghost hunters often "cannot see

what they should be able to easily perceive because they are so darn scared of actually seeing."

• Out-of-Body Experiences: These are often cut short or forgotten

because they are "so jarring to the psyche that forgetfulness seems prudent."

• Controlling Fear: "You must fight this fear with curiosity

and with a great desire to see and experience more of the world around you." The 5-20 minute belief-changing exercise is your primary tool for this.

• Entering the "Land of Weird": Conquering fear expands

perceptive abilities, opening the world in "baby steps," perhaps crawling, into the "land of 'Weird'."

• Pushing Comfort Zones: Practice the exercise in as many

"strange places" as possible (e.g., backyard looking at stars, believing a UFO will appear). "The more that you push yourself out of your comfort zone the better."

Fluidity of the Exercise and Integration

• Subjective Nature: The exercise changes as your psyche changes.

If initially focused on seeing ghosts, you might later shift to "not being afraid of seeing ghosts" as fear becomes the block. It's a "fluid methodology" that adapts to your subjective experience.

• Strengthening Other Abilities: This exercise is a

"strengthening exercise" for all other techniques mentioned in the book. "This exercise feeds on those exercises and those exercises combined with this one will empower your perceptive abilities to an incredible degree!"

Chapter 8 introduces a critical concept for anyone serious about exploring expanded perception: "Chapel Perilous." It's presented not as a warning to turn back, but as a crucial stage on the journey, requiring specific character traits to navigate.

Chapel Perilous: The Core Obstacle

• Definition: "Chapel perilous is an occult term and one that

might become all too real for you if you practice the things mentioned in this book."

• The First Obstacle: It is the "first obstacle in the

paranormal" encountered when beliefs are altered, and this obstacle is fear.

• Robert Anton Wilson's Usage (footnote \[10\]): Wilson used the

term to describe a state where it's "difficult to figure out whether what you are experiencing is purely imagination or if there is truly something out there."

• Two Aspects of Chapel Perilous:

1 The Fearful Realization of Belief Plasticity: The

understanding that "beliefs are indeed quite plastic and that what you might be witnessing at the moment might only be a personal delusion brought about through a change in belief."

2 The Struggle of External vs. Internal: The battle to

"determine whether or not there are outside forces, which you are now perceiving, or is it all just a lie (crazy belief) in your mind."

• "Here is the place where Reasonable Logic dies." The

structured logic we rely on in consensus reality becomes insufficient.

The "No Going Back" Principle

• John Keel's "The Mothman Prophecies" (footnote \[11\]): Keel

explored this "subjective state" where paranormal phenomena seem to materialize due to belief.

• The Idea: "Once you see the paranormal (or some other

paranormal creature); there is no going back to sanity." The paranormal becomes "public enemy number one" and will try to "take you out or drive you mad just to protect its secret existence."

• Keel's Conclusion: "The Weird exists and is as tangible as

this world but there is usually a cloud over it which keeps it hidden from us. Once we see beyond this cloud everything breaks out of Pandora's Box and we can never go back to the sanity that we knew before."

• Chapel Perilous is this Questioning: This questioning of your

sanity is precisely "Chapel perilous." It's "perilous ground and must be tread lightly."

The "Only Because I Believe It?" Question

• The logical next question, given the power of belief in shaping

reality, is: "Aren't I seeing what I'm seeing only because I believe it?"

• The Easy Part?: The author ironically states, "Believe it or

not (pun?) this is the easy part of Chapel perilous." This question, though challenging, merely "opens up a whole new reality, a reality where anything is possible as long as we are willing to believe completely."

• The Hard Part (The Real Scary Part): The truly terrifying

aspect, the one that can derail your quest, is: "Are there forces out there right now manipulating me?"

Agnosticism and Chaos Magic: Potential Traps

• Robert Anton Wilson's Agnosticism: While Wilson advocated

agnosticism (believing nothing is known or can be known about nature, God, or the supernatural), the author advises against it. An agnostic answer "can be the beginning of the end."

• Lack of "Testicular Fortitude": Agnosticism is seen as a

"choice made by those that do not have the 'testicular fortitude' to look for the real answers 'out there'."

• Chaos Magic (footnote \[12\]): If pursuing this path, at least

go the way of Chaos magicians, who believe "nothing is true and everything is permitted." They switch beliefs to attain specific results.

• Author's Critique of Chaos Magic: "Unfortunately even the

Chaotic route tends to bring an end to most true paranormal study." While it offers flexibility and "security" by allowing easy belief-switching, "it does not allow the body to pursue its greater evolution." Many Chaos magicians are seen as "jaded individuals that tend to really be atheists in disguise."

• The "Dark Sea of Perception" (footnote \[13\]): The author

refers to Don Juan's term for the chaotic possibilities of perception. Chaos magicians and agnostics "are barely touching the tip of this colossal iceberg." They satisfy themselves with "small beginnings," but true exploration requires a "plunge in order to explore the greater depths."

Why This Chapter (Twofold Purpose)

1 To Inform: "To tell you about Chapel perilous and to give you

some ideas on how to deal with it."

2 To Guide: "To give a basic guide to those that wish to go a

little deeper into the great sea of perception."

The First Test

• Chapel Perilous is your "first test." It starts with "pangs of

fear" when facing the unknown, which then grow until you "begin to question the very sanity of your mind."

• "Know then that this test stands before you and be prepared."

Navigating Chapel Perilous

• Embrace It: Don't try to avoid it. "What you must do is let

Chapel perilous become a dear friend in your life. A constant companion that will always be there filling your life with fear and perhaps even dread." If you're doing the work right, you can count on its company.

Character Traits of the True Adventurer

To withstand the "chaos of the great sea of perception," specific traits are required:

• See Everything as a Challenge: "Every problem faced on the

journey must be seen as an obstacle to be overcome, as a challenge to be vanquished through greater discipline and strong imagination." Pessimism leads to failure.

• Challenge Every Belief: "An adventurer on this quest must

challenge every single belief that he or she has." Recognizing the power of beliefs, it becomes your responsibility to question them, as they "shape your reality."

• Question Everything You Perceive: Taking responsibility for

beliefs also means taking responsibility for perception. If perception seems "even beyond what you believe," examine it. This might be when you face a "foreign energy source, one that is perhaps beyond yourself."

• Incredible Temperance: This is developed through logic (as

defined by the author). "There is nothing wrong with creating these reasonable assumptions as long as you logically understand that there is every possibility in the world that you can create a completely different mental structure using the same logic and a different reasonable assumption" (footnote [14] distinguishes this from Chaos Magic: the adventurer becomes insane, creates new beliefs, navigates treacherous waters; the Chaos magician pretends to go insane to achieve a desire).

• Trust Impulses and Feelings: Do not let the world tell you your

feelings are wrong. "Learn to listen to all of these feelings and study them so that you discover their source. Out there you only have your feelings to guide you." Respect them.

• Take Responsibility for Consciousness: "Finally an adventurer

of the great sea of perception needs to take responsibility of his/her consciousness." You are who you are because of what you perceive, and since perception is shaped by beliefs, you must "take responsibility for this consciousness... From now on."

The Explorer's Code

This is a "basic outline of the way of the explorer, the way of the true magician or sorcerer." It's "not about ethics," but a "code that will hopefully allow you to maintain 'yourself' when you are facing the onslaught of the chaos out there."

• Self-Preservation: Unlike Buddhists who might suggest losing the

self, the author advises: "I would tell you to build walls around the self and guard it with your life because if you lose it out there, you are truly lost."

Chapter 9 provides the practical means to navigate the "Chapel Perilous" and manage the influx of expanded perceptions. It introduces the concept of "banishment" not as denial, but as a tool for control, stability, and temporary respite, a "bronze shield" for the explorer.

Understanding Banishing

• General Definition: "To send away from, to forbid, get rid of

or abolish."

• Occult Definition: "A number of different rituals and practices

that are used to exorcise certain entities or energies from a general area."

• The Constant: Recalling Chapel Perilous, the author emphasizes

that those who truly explore beyond current limits must "constantly live in a world where the impossible becomes every day." You cannot "free yourself from that state of being."

• Avoiding Traps: Banishment is key to not falling into the traps

of agnosticism or Chaos Magic, which merely create a "bigger and more varied" cage, but a cage nonetheless.

• The Need for Stability: While embracing the Weird, there will be

times "when you will need your stability. When you will need to at least find a place where you can rest and perhaps forget about the insanity of the world; or was that your insanity?"

How Banishing Works

• Core Mechanism: When you banish, you are "willfully and

powerfully taking your attention away from a certain thing."

• Simplicity to Complexity: It can be as simple as shifting

attention or as complex as "creating an actual energetic barrier."

• Common Practice: People do banishings all the time, often

unknowingly. The "law of attraction" and New Age movements using positive thinking are forms of banishing negative focus. NLP (Neuro-Linguistic Programming) also uses various banishing techniques.

Why Banish? (The Crucial Purpose)

• "When you extend the abilities of your perception, there will be

certain things that you perceive that will be scary or even shocking."

• Intrusive & Dangerous: These paranormal perceptions can be

"intrusive" and, depending on skill level, "even dangerous."

• Safe Haven: "There will be a time therefore when you wish to

rest and to get back to the life that you knew before. We all need a safe haven where we can recharge our batteries so that we can study what we have learnt, contemplate where we wish to go from here, and to gather the impetus needed to go even deeper if we desire."

• Protecting Advancements: Banishing allows you to take a break

"without permanently stopping the advancements that you have already made." It "curves the focus of your attention without you having to create a permanent new belief system that might thwart your current abilities."

• Action, Not Belief Change: "A banishing is an action, either

mental, physical, or both, that allows you to create a barrier between you and a perceived entity or object without the need to change your beliefs." (e.g., creating an energetic barrier against a ghost without disbelieving in ghosts).

• Contrast with Paranormal Investigators: Many investigators do

the opposite: they reject the existence of fearful phantasms, subconsciously telling themselves "what they saw or heard isn't real" to protect themselves from psychological trauma. This re-establishes limiting beliefs.

• The Goal: Banishing allows you to "regain control over

yourself and your perceptions without the need to create limiting beliefs." It's a "routine that will allow you to relax and recharge without rejecting that which you are supposedly trying to discover in the first place."

Practical Banishing Methods

1 Simple White Light Banishing (Focus Refocusing and Energetic

Barrier):

• Scenario: You've been seeing ghosts/paranormal activity

everywhere after exploring a haunted area, and you need rest.

• Method: While in bed, "imagine that you are covered in a

beautiful white light." Use imagination to perceive this light around you.

• Functions:
• Changes perceptions through refocusing attention.
• Creates an energetic barrier, its strength dependent on

your attention, to keep away external influence.

• Result: If successful, you can rest, free from external

perceptions and negative influence.

2 Our Father The Sun Banishing (Enhanced Visualization):\

This is a "better version" of the white light banishing, emphasizing deep, multi-sensory visualization.

• Preparation: Close eyes, relax.
• Step 1: Visualize a White Sphere/Sun: Imagine a "gorgeous

white glowing sphere above you." Concentrate, becoming aware it's the sun. Look into it without fear, feeling its light "raining down."

• Step 2: Fly Towards the Sun: With eyes closed, imagine

"lifting off from the ground and flying closer and closer to this giant white Sun." As you approach, it gets larger, and its light stronger.

• Step 3: Enveloped by Light: Travel until "completely

enveloped within it."

• Step 4: Inside the Sun: Imagine being "inside this gigantic

white Sun, completely covered in this glowing angelic white light." This light "does not burn you but purifies you and invades every single atom of your being." Stay as long as possible.

• Step 5: Return & Glow: Open eyes, realize you're back in

your body, but now "glowing with power and white angelic energy." The white sun is still above, raining cleansing, protective light.

• Key to Success (Visualization):
• Engage All Senses: "You need to involve every single

one of your senses into your visualization." The stronger the visualization, the more powerful the banishing.

• Progressive Visualization:
• Dissociative to Associative State (footnote \[15\]):
• Dissociative: Seeing yourself in the visualization

(like watching a picture on a TV).

• Associative: Being inside the visualization,

experiencing it firsthand (like being in a Star Trek Holodeck). This is the "first depth to enhancing your visualization."

• Enlarge & Intensify Visually: Don't just see it far

away or cloudy. Make it "enlarge... So it covers everything," so you are "within it." Add "color and vividness" to make it stronger.

• Add Kinesthetic Feeling: Feel the light (e.g.,

"light heat," "warming up the skin," "tingling feeling," a type of "vibration"). This is external.

• Add Internal Feelings: Visualize the light bringing

"goodness," making you feel "clean and full of joy," "refreshed, clean, and wonderful."

• Add Sound: Visualize hearing a sound. As the light

envelops, hear a "low drone." As you get closer/light intensifies, the drone gets "louder and louder," increasing in "energy and power."

• Optional (Smell/Taste): Experiment with these senses

for maximum immersion.

• Result: With practice, your visualizations become so

strong there's "little difference between them and what you are experiencing and the 'real' world."

3 The Gnostic Pentagram Ritual (Light, Physical Action, Sound):\

This is a more complex ritual combining visualization with physical actions, popularized by Chaos magicians like Peter Carroll.

• Core Components:
• Visualization of Radiance: In five body areas

(corresponding to some chakras).

• Mantra/Vibration: Each visualization is accompanied by a

sustained vibration of a vowel sound (I, E, A, O, U) during a slow exhalation. This should produce a "physical sensation" in the attributed body part, "playing" the body like a musical instrument.

• Gesture/Breath Control: Pentagrams drawn in the air with

the left arm at four points around the operator, with an anti-clockwise quarter turn after each. Strong visualization (eyes open or closed). Each accompanied by the IEAOU mantra. The mantra blocks "discursive thought."

• Procedure:

1 Stand, facing any direction.

2 Inhale, exhale "I" (eehhhhhhh) visualizing energy in the

head.

3 Inhale, exhale "E" (ehhhhhh) visualizing energy in the

throat.

4 Inhale, exhale "A" (ahhhhhh) visualizing energy in the

heart and lungs, spreading to arms.

5 (As in 2) Inhale, exhale "O" (ohhhh) in the belly.

6 (As in 2) Inhale, exhale "U" (uhhh) in the genital/anal

area.

7 Repeat steps 6 then 5, 4, 3, 2 (working back towards the

head).

8 Inhale, exhale IEAOU sounds in turn while drawing a

pentagram in the air with the left arm (visualized strongly).

9 Make a quarter turn left, repeat step 8 for remaining

pentagrams until returning to start.

• Result: The greatest form of banishing is to "engage" in a

routine that is "all covering and allows you to focus on it completely."

Other Practical Banishings

• Engaging Routines/Vices: Any pleasurable routine that can engage

your "full attention" can be a "great banishing routine."

• Examples: Watching television ("a wonderful banishing

routine"), playing video games, reading a good book.

• The Trick: "You must focus all your attention on it." Save

these "vices" as a "balm" for relaxation.

• Effectiveness: "99% of the stuff that you will perceive

'out there' will be of the kind that can be successfully banished by just turning your attention away from it." This includes most entity type phenomena.

• Why it Works: Even if an entity is "exterior," it

"usually requires your emotional energy to give it power." If you completely focus attention elsewhere, the entity "has no more power and can therefore do little to affect your reality." They will either move away or become inert. You could have "ghouls running through your house" while playing a video game, and they'd leave.

• The Cold Shower (Emergency Reality Check):
• When to Use: If you are "lost in an almost dreamlike

state" after prolonged paranormal exercises (especially hypnagogic) and need to re-engage with "present physical reality" quickly.

• Method: Take a "quick cold shower."
• Effect: "The cold water hitting your body will instantly

put you back in this physical plane." You can stay there as long as needed. If the dissociative state persists, take another shower. Follow with a warm meal or coffee.

• Purpose: This is a "last safe measure" when perceptions

become "mind-bending" or "aggressive."

The True Purpose of Banishment

• Not a Permanent Wall: These banishings "are not meant to put up

a permanent wall between you and the chaos 'out there'."

• Energizing Cocoon: They are for "providing an energizing cocoon

when you need to take a break from it all." No one can be "on the go all the time."

• Avoiding False Reality: Creating a new belief system that denies

the weirdness (e.g., everything is just a mental plaything) "is not good enough because it will just create a wall between you and the real Weirdness out there."

• Control, Not Separation: "Banishing then does not become a

way of separating yourself from the infinite out there, because there is no possibility of your separation from it. What it does is it allows you to control your space in these belief structures so that you can begin to explore them all fully, realizing that they're all true and as concrete and real as the consensual world we all consider to be so solid."

The Epilogue is a powerful summary, reflecting on the journey undertaken, critiquing the limitations of current scientific frameworks, and offering a hopeful vision for the future of human perception and knowledge.

The Journey's Outcome

• The author has provided "methodology in order to expand your

sensual and intuitive capabilities." This path, if followed with "enough discipline," will grant a "real good look behind the curtain."

• The Curtain: This "curtain" is "imposed on us and we impose

it upon ourselves; it is a very big, thick, and heavy curtain but it can be moved aside with some effort."

Critique of Modern Paranormal Research and Science

• Quality Decline: Despite an increase in paranormal research, its

quality has "not improved," possibly due to "weekend warrior type researchers" or a "type of impasse" in the West.

• Scientific Impasse: This impasse is due to the limitations of

science's "current belief structure." The author clarifies he's not criticizing true scientific method, but "those entrenched beliefs that maintain a type of orderly religiosity over human possibility and perception."

• Science as a Tool: True science, "still emerging," is a "very

powerful way to expand our power in this universe."

• The Power Grab: The problem lies with those who "covet" this

power to increase their personal power at others' expense, mirroring the "selfish power grab that created a Christian church which was more interested in gaining wealth and controlling the masses than in pursuing communion with God."

• True Scientist vs. Social Indoctrination: A true scientist

quests for knowledge using empirical methodology and logic, not relying on "bureaucratic system[s]" or "ultimate truth" definitions. However, neither current scientists, paranormal researchers, nor the average person have "completely remove[d] the blinders created by social indoctrination," primarily because they are "far too comfortable."

• Instrumentation's Limit: "Instrumentation cannot do this

because instrumentation is created to see what the creator wishes to see."

A Vision for a New Science

• Combining Advances: The author envisions a "new science" for

this century, combining "incredible technological advances with our totally untapped perceptual potentials."

• Learning from "Old Schools": Ancient schools gained knowledge

through "experimentation with psychotropic flora and fauna." Modern pharmacology might also contribute.

• Commitment to Knowledge: "If we truly commit ourselves in the

proper way, we can greatly increase the knowledge that we have attained, and that our ancestors attained through their methods." The author has "faith in scientific principles," but rejects dogma.

The Power of Expanded Awareness

• An Asset: The methods in the book are an "asset," allowing you

to be "a step ahead of the competition."

• Increased Intelligence: "Expanding your awareness is an

incredibly important aspect of intelligence." Seeing things from "different angles" provides an "intellectual boost." "The more that you can see things from different angles the smarter that you will become."

• Specific Benefits of Auric Perception:
• Perceive truth or falsehood.
• Perceive others' health and potential.
• Perceive intention, and thus their future.
• Locate, track, and identify UFOs, ghosts, poltergeists, Bigfoot,

and other cryptic phenomena.

• Your natural visual receptors become "far greater use" than

current instruments (EM meters, thermal imaging, video cameras).

• Subconscious Expansion: "Expanding your subconscious allows you

to expand your possibilities." Creation begins in the subconscious. Understanding it allows you to understand the forces shaping your reality, and to "create with far greater facility."

Final Encouragement

• Beyond Measures: The true experience is not about "charts,

measures, hard work, and 12 hour days."

• Personal Exploration: "It is my great wish that you expand on

all the ideas presented here and that you find your own methodologies as you go along."

• Community: The author hopes readers are "encouraged to create

groups and organizations that can use empirical methodology to explore what has hitherto been referred to as the occult, the paranormal, the supernatural, the Weird, the far too strange to be taken seriously."

FURTHER READING

This section provides a curated list of books that the author believes offer a strong foundation and deeper exploration into the themes covered in "The Occult Experience." Many are older but highly recommended, with some marked with an asterisk for particular emphasis.

• Cosmic Trigger Trilogy by Robert Anton Wilson
• Prometheus Rising by Robert Anton Wilson
• Liber Kaos by Peter J. Carroll
• Prime Chaos by Phil Hine
• *The Nature of Personal Reality: Specific, Practical Techniques for

Solving Everyday Problems and Enriching the Life You Know* by Jane Roberts (Highly Recommended)

• Tales of Power\\ by Carlos Castaneda (Highly Recommended)
• Using Your Brain For a Change: Neuro-Linguistic Programming by

Richard Bandler

• Path Notes of an American Ninja Master by Glenn Morris
• The Mothman Prophecies by John A. Keel

ENDNOTES (Integrated with explanation above, but summarizing the key points from them)

The Endnotes provide additional context and references for specific points made throughout the book, enriching the understanding of the concepts discussed.

• \[1\] The Flawed Skeptic: The author asserts that a "zealot

skeptic" often fails at true logic. If they were genuinely proficient in logical reasoning, they couldn't maintain their rigid skeptical stance, as logic itself (as the author defines it) is more flexible and open to various conclusions based on assumptions.

• \[2\] The Feral Boy, Victor: This note refers to Victor, the

feral boy of Aveyron, suggesting that his reported ability to handle extreme temperatures (like plucking potatoes from boiling water without getting burned, or showing no discomfort in winter) points to a human capacity beyond typical "civilized" conditioning. It reinforces the idea that much of our physical and mental reality is learned, implying that altered perceptions can lead to altered physical capabilities.

• \[3\] Meme Defined: Provides a formal definition of "meme"

from various sources (Wikipedia, Merriam-Webster, Gordon Graham), emphasizing it as a unit of cultural transmission (ideas, behaviors, styles) that spreads, self-replicates, and mutates, much like a gene. This solidifies the author's argument that our shared reality is built on these pervasive, self-enforcing ideas.

• \[4\] Structured Paranormal Interests: This note clarifies that

even seemingly "paranormal" interests in high school, like an obsession with "Twilight" vampires, are often highly structured by popular "memes." These representations are stylized and comical, implicitly preventing a deeper, more genuinely disturbing encounter with true strangeness, thus reinforcing the consensus reality.

• \[5\] Transcendence of Death: A provocative question is posed:

If perceptual reality is based on imposed belief systems, is it possible for those who transcend these limitations to also transcend death? The author challenges the fixed belief in our mortality, suggesting it too might be a culturally imposed limitation.

• \[6\] Chakras and Energy Vortexes: This footnote defines

"Chakra" as a "whirling vortex of energy" and advises the reader to discover these energy concentrations on their own, especially in areas with high nerve fiber density (like the solar plexus), rather than strictly adhering to existing literature. This encourages personal empirical validation over dogmatic belief, even within occult traditions.

• \[7\] Biphasic Sleep Research: Refers to the work of

psychiatrist Thomas Wehr and Roger Ekirch's book "At Day's Close." This provides scientific and historical backing for the idea that human sleep was naturally biphasic (two chunks) before the agricultural and industrial revolutions, supporting the author's argument for disrupting the modern monophasic sleep routine.

• \[8\] Benefits of Altered Sleep: Details the "odd perceptual

occurrences" that can arise from breaking the sleep cycle, including increased intuition, flashes of insight, greater feelings of euphoria, a more relaxed state, increased creativity, and more potent visualizations. These are presented as genuine cognitive expansions.

• \[9\] Groggy State as Relaxant: Explains that the "groggy"

feeling experienced when altering sleep patterns or during hypnagogic states is actually a natural relaxant produced by the body. Instead of fighting it, one should embrace it as a way to quiet the mind and alleviate nervous conditions, turning a perceived negative into a beneficial tool.

• \[10\] Robert Anton Wilson's "Cosmic Trigger": Recommends

Wilson's "Cosmic Trigger" trilogy for direct reference to "Chapel Perilous" and the process of challenging reality and beliefs, reinforcing the profound impact such exploration can have.

• \[11\] John Keel's "The Mothman Prophecies": Highlights

Keel's work as a point of reference for understanding the "no going back to sanity" idea once paranormal phenomena are experienced, distinguishing the book from its more sensational movie adaptation.

• \[12\] Chaos Magic's Dictum: Explains the Chaos Magick tenet,

"nothing is true and everything is permitted," attributed to Hassan-i-Sabbah. It describes Chaos magicians as individuals who adopt beliefs to achieve specific results and then change them, contrasting this with the "true adventurer" who, according to the author, becomes genuinely "insane" (unconstrained by perceptions) to navigate the depths of reality.

• \[13\] Don Juan's "Dark Sea of Awareness": Acknowledges a

slight modification of Carlos Castaneda's term "the dark sea of awareness." This term signifies the chaotic, infinite possibilities within perception, and the author uses it to imply that traditional Chaos magicians and agnostics only skim the surface of this vast, potentially dangerous realm compared to the deeper exploration encouraged in the book.

• \[14\] Adventurer vs. Chaos Magician Logic: Further clarifies

the distinction between the "true adventurer" and the Chaos magician. The adventurer "creates and catalogs an infinite variety of mental structures (beliefs) and uses them like markers" to navigate treacherous waters, fundamentally changing their perception. The Chaos magician, by contrast, is portrayed as a "highly sane individual that pretends that every once in a while he can go insane in order to achieve his desire." The adventurer truly embodies the transformation.

• \[15\] Dissociative vs. Associative States: Provides a clear

analogy for visualizing during banishing exercises:

• Dissociative State: Watching yourself in the visualization,

like seeing a picture on a TV screen.

• Associative State: Being within the visualization,

participating, like being in a Star Trek Holodeck. This shift from observing to experiencing is critical for enhancing the power of visualization.

John Kreiter approaches the definition of a servitor from two angles: a simple, accessible answer and a more complex, metaphysical explanation to foster deeper understanding.

The Simple Answer: A Thought Form At its most basic, a servitor is a thought form. However, Kreiter immediately clarifies that "thought form" itself can be a bit of a misnomer. Every single thought we have inherently possesses a "form." In occult circles, the term "thought form" specifically refers to a thought that has been given sufficient attention or energy to enable it to manifest, to varying degrees, within what we perceive as consensual reality. This distinction is crucial: it's not just any fleeting thought, but one imbued with concentrated power.

Historical Context and The Power of Belief The creation of thought forms, the author notes, is an ancient practice found in nearly every culture. He highlights Tibetan culture as particularly renowned for its advanced techniques in this area. To illustrate, he highly recommends "Magic and Mystery in Tibet" by Alexandra David-Neel, which shows how Tibetans have successfully practiced thought form creation for a long time, using them for:

• Deity worship
• Mental exercise
• Attaining desired results

The author stresses the importance of reading such credible, non-skeptical sources. Why? Because this leads to the single most important aspect of creating a servitor: Belief.

Core Teaching 1: The Paramount Importance of Belief To achieve what might seem "impossible" -- the manifestation of a servitor -- you must let go of doubt and believe that the impossible is indeed possible. Specifically, you need to believe:

1 That thought forms are real.

2 That they can affect our shared, consensual reality.

3 That others have successfully created them.

Kreiter shares his personal testimony, stating his own accomplishments with servitors have been "spectacular." However, he understands that readers might need more reassurance, hence the recommendation to read widely on the subject from a positive perspective.

He then offers a powerful analogy to reinforce the role of belief: "Do you know why nothing paranormal or magical ever happens around the skeptic? It's difficult to have magical things occur around the skeptic because the skeptic believes his beliefs so completely, that he is able to cancel out or ignore any results that disprove his notions of reality." He humorously points out that the skeptic, in trying to disprove such phenomena, actually proves his own theories by unconsciously using the very techniques (belief and intention) he tries to deny. Therefore, Kreiter issues a challenge: "In order to create servitors therefore, I challenge you to believe in their possibility with as much fervor as the skeptic believes in his reality." This isn't just about wishing; it's about a deep, unwavering conviction.

Understanding Thought Forms: Beyond Simple Data To truly grasp servitors, Kreiter explores the nature of thought itself. He offers a potent definition: "A real good description for thought in my opinion is information." However, he immediately elaborates that thoughts are far more complex than our current technological understanding of "information" (like ordered strings of symbols). Thoughts are "highly complex energetic units of information that can morph and weave into different kinds of information units." This flexibility allows them to create "vast (near infinite) information matrices."

"Size is also not a factor since the smallest possible part of a larger thought can also contain a near infinite amount of information." This challenges our linear, physical understanding and explains why our subjective reality is "unmeasurable using current logic" and thus dismissed by science as "a storm of dark unconscious drives."

Our sensory perceptions tend to categorize thoughts as pictures, feelings, sounds, tastes, or smells. But these are merely limited interpretations. Thoughts, the author claims, "exist outside of physical reality but this would not be accurate because it is thoughts that make up what we consider physical reality." This is a statement: our reality is thought.

When thoughts influence objective reality, we label it as intention, will, or synchronicity. But what's truly happening, Kreiter explains, is the creation of "a complex gestalt of thoughts which creates certain effects that we can detect through our sense perceptions." When many such gestalts intertwine into larger patterns, we begin to perceive them as physical reality. Those who practice occult techniques or believe in "the law of attraction" are, "manipulating their subjective realities in order to try to manipulate their objective ones." A servitor is presented as a direct method to achieve this: "a method of using subjective reality, by focusing and directing intensified thought, in order to create objective/physical results."

Thoughts, Perception, and the Nature of Time Kreiter briefly expands on the nature of perception and its relation to time, offering additional context for the "information matrix" of thought. He states that "thoughts are the basis of everything that you experience in physical reality." The conscious mind cannot process the totality of information in a particular thought.

Drawing from physics, he notes that time "does not exist as we think it does." Our perception of time as linear (past, present, future) stems from our inability to perceive the "infinite now" or "spacious present" in its entirety. The conscious mind filters and processes information linearly, creating our experience of time. "Thoughts then are highly complex energetic units of information that can morph and weave into different kinds of information units, which as a result of this flexibility can create a vast (near infinite) information matrix." He reinforces that we do the same with thoughts: we perceive parts of them linearly, creating our sense of reality.

To understand non-linear thought/reality, we use concepts like frequencies or dimensions. In this context, thoughts possess different frequencies, each representing a "perceived aspect of our shared reality." Kreiter outlines a fascinating progression of thought frequencies:

• Most ethereal: Mental images or ideas.
• More solid: Emotions or emotion-generating ideas.
• Closer to physical reality: Beliefs.
• Further solidified: Beliefs become assumptions, then facts.
• Finally: Facts become physical objects or events.

He cites the Higgs boson particle as a "fantastic example" of how an idea or theoretical concept can eventually manifest as a measurable physical entity.

The Definition Refined: Intentional and Materializing Thought Bringing it all back to the core subject, Kreiter defines a thought form (and thus a servitor) as "an intentional thought, one that has been intentionally designed." More than that, it's a thought whose "frequency is adjusted so that it goes from being a very ethereal mental experience to one that can actually begin to affect and partake in physical reality." "A thought form is a thought whose frequency has been changed; it is essentially a thought that begins to attain physical form."

He reassures the reader that despite the complex metaphysical explanations, "creating a servitor is an easy and natural affair; you could say that we do it quite naturally all the time." The subsequent chapters will detail this simplicity. The depth provided here is to offer a "more grounded understanding" and to address the "implications" that might cause some to question their personal reality. The author hopes this foundational knowledge provides answers to those questions, paving the way for practical creation.

Let's continue our exploration of John Kreiter's "Create a Servitor," delving into the practical applications and the meticulous process of creation, charging, and casting.

The chapter addresses the boundless potential of servitors, asserting that they can be used for "just about anything you can imagine." This liberates the reader's creativity, emphasizing that the servitor is a direct manifestation of our imaginative and mental power. It is, a "fantastic creation that we design ourselves in order to satisfy a need." The only true limitation, Kreiter states, is our own creativity.

The Dynamic Nature of Servitors: Evolution and Growth Kreiter shares a personal anecdote about his own protection servitor: "He was specifically designed in order to protect me but I have found that his form and power tend to grow over time, very much like an actual living being, evolving as my desires do." This is a teaching: servitors are not static creations. They are dynamic thought forms that:

• Grow in power and capability with use.
• Become more powerful the more you use them.
• Become more successful the better results you get.
• Strengthen as your confidence in using them increases.
• Are "charged" and thus grow with each interaction.

This concept mirrors the idea that consistent attention and belief imbue these thought forms with more energy and solidity in our reality.

Our Power as Creators: Shaping Reality The author reinforces a fundamental metaphysical principle: "This is our power as creators; our thoughts affect our entire world and through our thoughts we are also the creators of new worlds." Thoughts possess an inherent continuity; they don't simply cease to exist after their initial creation. Instead, they continue to "exist and evolve in other dimensions (frequencies)" largely outside our normal perception. However, we have the unique ability to "maintain and empower certain thoughts with a little extra; something we call form," thereby creating a "new type of life" --- our highly charged intentions, our servants, our companions.

Practical Applications: Concrete Examples To make the concept even more tangible, Kreiter provides several compelling examples of what servitors can be used for:

• Protection: Like his own servitor, they can be designed to keep

oneself and loved ones safe.

• Wealth Generation: Servitors can be tasked with attracting

material abundance.

• Companionship: He humorously recounts a friend's servitor

"pet" that is loving, helpful, and requires no messy cleanup, showing the versatility of servitor design for even niche desires.

• Attraction (The "Glowing Lamp" Servitor): This is a vivid and

specific example. His friend created a servitor that manifests as a "glowing lamp" exuding "erotic sensuality." This servitor works by "heating up everyone in the place indiscriminately" when activated, demonstrating how specific intentions can be encoded into a servitor's function and appearance. It also subtly shows that a servitor's actions can sometimes have broader, unintended effects (like heating up everyone).

Design Principles: Form and Function Kreiter advises that while servitors can take on any form imaginable -- from "powerful tentacles or butterflies wings" to "amorphous blobs" or even copies of existing characters like Pokémon -- the design should always be functional. It's not just about aesthetics; the creature's form should align with its intended purpose and powers.

A Crucial Warning: Responsible Creation The chapter ends with a stern but vital piece of advice: "I hope though that you stay away from thought forms that could be considered negative or destructive." While acknowledging that "there is no morality here," Kreiter's primary goal is to help readers achieve personal happiness. He likens negative thought forms to "having a pit bull or a gun" -- they can be very hard to control. He warns against "a rogue thought form running around your house at night scaring your family."

Core Teaching 2: Start Small, Gain Control, and Prioritize Personal Well-being. Kreiter strongly suggests that practitioners "become very good at controlling and maintaining your own servitor, one that provides fun and fulfills a basic desire, before you start trying to rule the world." This emphasizes responsibility and mastery over one's creations, setting the stage for the practical, step-by-step instructions in the following chapters.

The chapter framing servitor creation as a "fun and creative exercise," deliberately countering any preconceptions that it requires "weird and arcane phenomena," "auric color matching," or "odd trances." Kreiter directly challenges the notion that such practices are necessary, stating that they only make the natural act of creation seem difficult.

The Essence of Creation: Belief and Concentrated Attention The author reiterates his core philosophy: "All we're doing here is working with beliefs and a type of concentrated attention which is quite definitely psychic force." This psychic force isn't some mystical energy accessible only through elaborate rituals or specific celestial alignments. It's an inherent human capability. He dismisses the need for "occult jargon" or "arcane grimoires," emphasizing that the symbolism used for a thought form is personal and doesn't need to conform to ancient traditions.

The "Software" Metaphor Revisited Building on Chapter 1, Kreiter uses the "software program" analogy again to explain the subtle complexity of thought forms. Just as a software program like Microsoft Word has a simple name and logo but an intricate underlying code, a servitor's "exterior form" (what we consciously design) is merely a representation of a much deeper, more complex "thickness" (information matrix) that we cannot fully perceive. "This certain thickness that makes up our thought form, our servitor, is sort of like the code inside a software program."

The good news is, "The coding of our servitor thought form is done with the great power of our psyche. In other words we don't need to write code." Our "inner self" or subconscious is the master coder. Our conscious role is simple yet powerful: "All that is needed from us on a conscious level is intention and very focused attention."

The Three Steps of Conscious Mental Action

To achieve servitor creation, Kreiter outlines a clear, three-part process:

1 Creation and design: Defining what the servitor is.

2 Charging: Imbuing it with energy and making it real.

3 Casting or sending forth: Activating it to fulfill its purpose.

He explicitly states that we "do not need to follow arcane rituals or create odd trance states" because these often stem from a lack of faith in one's own "magical inner selves." He warns against those who attribute failure to external factors ("the moon was in the wrong quadrant") rather than their own internal focus and belief. "All that you need is singular focus on a conscious level while you are performing the 3 steps mentioned above."

The chapter then transitions into the practical execution of Step 1: Creation and Design. He advises having a piece of paper and a quiet room for relaxation and concentration.

Statement of Intent

This is the foundational step. The goal is to "create a phrase or a paragraph that describes exactly what you want to accomplish with your servitor." This isn't just brainstorming; it's a critical act of clarification.

Core Teaching 3: Clarity of Intent is Paramount

"Clarifying what you want allows you to get it by helping you come up with a really concise design and intent for your servitor." The example given is simple: "I want to protect my home" leads to "I want a servitor to protect my home." This statement should be at the top of your paper.

The process of refining this statement is iterative. You might initially write something down, then realize you want to express it more precisely. "Keep doing this until you have the statement that you think exemplifies what you want." This ensures your conscious mind is perfectly aligned with your desire.

Appearance, Purpose and Powers

Once the statement of intent is clear, the next step is to visualize and describe the servitor itself.

• Imagining the Creature: Begin to imagine the kind of servitor

that would fulfill your desired task. For home protection, it might be armored or an ethereal creature radiating protective light.

• Detailed Description: Underneath your statement of intent,

write a paragraph describing "exactly what your servitor will be doing and how it will be doing it." Use point form or any style you prefer, but be as descriptive as possible.

• Developing Powers: At this stage, you must "fully develop all

the powers that your servitor will have." This is where the functional aspect comes into play -- what capabilities does it need to achieve its purpose?

• Natural Naming: Kreiter notes that a name might even

spontaneously arise during this detailed design process.

• The "Fun and Creative Endeavour" Mindset: Maintaining this

playful attitude is key to focusing your attention effectively.

Core Teaching 4: Keep Servitor Designs Simple and Small, Especially at First. Kreiter offers a crucial practical recommendation: "I personally will recommend to you that you keep your servitors design simple and small." The reasons are clear:

• Energy and Concentration: "It takes a lot of energy and

concentration to create large or highly complex creatures."

• Visualization Ease: Simple forms are much easier to visualize.

He uses the analogy of visualizing a red rose versus a red square; the square is generally easier for most.

• Borrowing Images: Don't hesitate to "borrow any image that you

like" -- from video games, mythology, or anywhere else -- if it feels like the perfect servitor for your task.

The emphasis here is on accessibility and ease of mental focus, especially for beginners.

Drawing

"Now the fun really begins," as this is the visual manifestation of your mental design.

• Sketching the Design: Underneath your descriptive paragraph,

"sketch a design for your servitor. Nothing fancy, just iron out the design that has been percolating in your mind until you have a creature with all of the attributes that you want." This drawing is a physical anchor for your mental image.

• Listing Powers: Below the drawing, it's also good to "do a

point by point list of your servitor's powers." Examples: "it glows with intense loving energy or it shoots lasers out of its eyes." This reinforces the functional aspects.

Name

The naming of the servitor is a critical and sensitive step.

• Writing the Name: Write the name you've chosen "underneath the

picture you just drew."

• The Magical Word and Secrecy: "The name is important because

this is how you call the servitor to you, it is a magical word. You must therefore never reveal the name of your servitor to anyone." The secrecy protects the servitor and your work from external influences (a point revisited in Chapter 8).

Summary of Creation Steps So Far

At this point, your paper should contain:

• A statement of intent
• A paragraph describing what your servitor will be doing and its

powers

• A personal drawing of what your servitor looks like
• Your servitor's powers in point form
• Your servitor's name

Optional Final Step: Creating a Servitor "Logo" or Sigil This is an advanced but highly recommended technique for simplifying visualization during charging.

• Simplifying the Drawing: Take your detailed drawing and "really

simplify the picture." If it's a turtle, create a simple octagonal shape with identifying marks.

• Sigil Creation from Name: An alternative is to create a sigil by

combining letters from the servitor's name (e.g., the example provided for "turtle" shows how each letter's lines are incorporated into a single symbol).

Kreiter states his personal preference for the simplified drawing as a logo, finding it "easier to concentrate on." He advises trying both methods to see what works best for the individual. The simplified image or logo is "very helpful when you begin Part 2... Which involves charging your servitor," because it's easier to visualize this simplified form at first. Over time, as this logo becomes clear in your mind's eye, you can then begin to visualize a "more structured and detailed version" of your thought form, allowing your creature to "evolve over time into a far more detailed and powerful agent." This shows a progressive approach to visualization and power building.

While "writing about how to charge a servitor is actually a pretty easy task," Kreiter acknowledges that "saying and doing are different issues." This chapter aims to bridge that gap by explaining the metaphysical underpinnings alongside the practical steps.

Demystifying the "Magical" Process He reiterates his stance against "weird rituals or terribly complicated trance states" often found online. These, he argues, arise from a fundamental misunderstanding of our "inner psyche's magical aspects." What seems complex outwardly is, in reality, a "quite natural process" that involves the "combination of a huge amount of information and energy" by our inner psyche.

The Walking Analogy: Unconscious Mastery To illustrate this hidden complexity and naturalness, Kreiter uses a brilliant analogy: walking across a room to pick up a glass of water.

• Conscious Simplicity: On the surface, it's a simple, seemingly

effortless act. We don't consciously micro-manage every muscle movement.

• Unconscious Complexity: Yet, our body performs this

"extraordinary feat" because our "inner psyche is able to correlate all of the information and tasks required in perfect order." It possesses a "logic and intuition that would put any modern computer to shame."

• Parallel to Servitor Creation: "The technique for creating a

servitor is the same as this; it is a natural one and in many ways an effortless one." Effortless in that the inner psyche handles the immense complexity, but not completely effortless, as it requires "a little effort to get it right at first," just like learning to walk. Learning to walk involved finding a "magical balance between your attention, your beliefs, and your desires," leading to spontaneous development of strength and balance.

The Learning Curve of Charging Similarly, charging a servitor for the first time will feel like "learning to walk all over again," but mastery comes quickly. "Once when you've charged your servitor one time, the next time will seem infinitely easier." This is because the mind begins to "explore and realize all sorts of new and different capabilities." Each subsequent charge builds upon the first, leading to accumulation of power and easier focus. "The more you do it the easier it gets, the more you do it the stronger your creature gets and the easier it is to recharge it and to see it manifest."

The Practical Steps for Charging

1 Preparation: Get the paper with your servitor's logo and name

(or create a new one with just the logo/name).

2 Environment: Find a quiet, undisturbed place for 10 to 30

minutes.

3 Relaxation and Focus: Relax. Begin paying attention to the

picture and name. Quietly repeat the servitor's name.

4 The Core Act: Belief and Imagination: "Focus completely on

your servitor and imagine with every single fiber of your being that this servitor is real and is now before you." He strongly advises approaching this like a child playing a game, where pretend feels real and effortless.

5 Visualization and Belief Interplay: Imagine the servitor

becoming "more and more focused and solid." While visualization is important, the "main concern is to believe that your servitor is real. It is the actual act of belief that is important here, it is as important as your mental focus."

6 Sustained Mental Focus: Concentrate only on this act,

forgetting everything else.

7 Overcoming Doubt: Doubts will arise. When they do, "power

through it, clear your mind, and then begin to focus once again on the fact that you believe with every single fiber of your being that the servitor before you is real and that it is becoming manifest before your eyes." Your eyes should be open and you should be wide awake, not in a trance.

8 Visualization as a Consequence of Belief: If you concentrate and

focus intensely, you won't need to force visualizations. They will "begin to happen all by themselves." The "blob of energy" will "start to coalesce before you as you believe." Clear visualization is a result of "focused manipulation of your beliefs."

9 Duration and Intensity: Maintain this focused belief for 10 to

30 minutes. Kreiter notes that it can be "quite strenuous," leading to sweating and a rise in blood pressure for him -- indicating the significant psychic energy involved.

Core Teaching 5: Charge Your Servitor Three Times on Consecutive Days Before Its First Mission. "Charging a servitor for the first time can take a lot of psychic force, and the amount of force tends to grow exponentially depending on the size and complexity of your servitor." To ensure adequate strength for its first task, he recommends "charge your servitor three times before you consider it strong enough to go out on its first mission. Each charge should be performed just like I have outlined above and should happen on three consecutive days if you can." This sequential charging builds density and power.

This chapter details the final crucial step: sending your servitor out to perform its task. It builds directly upon the previous chapter's emphasis on charging and belief.

Prerequisites for Effective Casting

Before casting, Kreiter emphasizes two key conditions:

1 Sufficient Charge and Belief: You must be certain that your

servitor has received a "good charge" and that you "truly believe that it is a living creature, or machine if you like, ready and able to do your bidding." This belief is not superficial; it's a deep conviction.

2 Clarity of Intent: You must have a "real good sense of what you

intended it to do so that there are no doubts in your mind." Ambiguity in purpose weakens the servitor's ability to act.

The 5-Step Method for Casting Your Servitor

1 Call Your Servitor:

• Find a quiet, undisturbed place.
• "Call your servitor. Use your magical and secret name and

repeat it until you believe that your servitor is before you." This re-establishes your connection and brings the thought form into your immediate focus.

2 Final Charge (Reinforcement):

• Once you feel confident in its presence (perhaps sensing its

energy or even seeing it as a physical form), "charge your servitor one last time."

• Dedicate "a good 5 to 10 minutes" to this final charge.
• "Follow the methods described in the previous chapter so that

for a good 5 to 10 minutes you believe with every fiber of your being that your servitor is real and before you. Use every single ounce of focusing power available to you and believe in the certainty of your servitor." This ensures maximum power and a fresh infusion of belief right before deployment.

3 Issue the Command:

• "Right after you have finished charging it, I want you to

give your servitor one strong command and then send it out to do your bidding."

• The command should be clear, concise, and given in a "strong

and commanding voice."

• Example: For a protective servitor named "Turtle," the

command would be: "Turtle, go out and protect my house and keep it safe from all who would harm it."

4 Visualize and Believe Its Departure and Action:

• "Now see your servitor leaving your general area, believe it

with every ounce of your being just like you believed that it was real before when you were charging it."

• This "casting process is an act of will, an act of conscious

intent."

• You must "believe that your servitor is leaving and going to

do what you say; you need to believe this with all your being just like you believed that it is real."

• "If you do this correctly, you will see or feel the servitor

leaving your area and going about its business, in other words, doing what you desire." This step emphasizes the active projection of your will and the sensing of the servitor's movement into its task.

5 Maintain Faith (The Act of Faith):

• This final step is a "further development of the intent that

you set in motion."

• "By intending your servitor to go forth and do your bidding,

you are commanding through personal belief."

• "You intend by believing that your will is obeyed." This

is not merely hoping; it's a fundamental certainty that your command is being executed.

• "You maintain this intent by having faith in your servitor

and in the power of your command." This final mental state is crucial for the servitor's continued work.

Core Teaching 6: Simplicity and Inner Belief Over Arcane Rituals

Kreiter concludes by re-emphasizing the accessibility of this practice: "this methodology does not require that you understand ancient Babylonian, get up at 3 AM on the night of a full moon, or vibrate at a certain frequency." All that is truly required is "great focus and have the ability to manipulate your beliefs." The deeper, complex work of forming the powerful thought unit is handled by "the inner self, that bigger part of you that some like to label the subconscious," which is naturally capable of "affecting physical reality."

This chapter solidifies the idea that the power comes from within the practitioner, not from external rituals or paraphernalia.

Let's continue our journey through John Kreiter's insightful book, delving into the crucial aspects of controlling your servitor and managing other thought forms.

This chapter addresses one of the most common challenges people face with servitors: maintaining control. Kreiter immediately tackles this by drawing a compelling analogy from a popular culture reference.

The "Dog Whisperer" Analogy: Attaining Alpha Dominance Kreiter advises readers who struggle with servitor control to watch episodes of "Dog Whisperer" with Cesar Millan. He explains that Millan teaches dog owners how to regain control when their pets have inadvertently become their masters. "Cesar is essentially teaching everyone how to attain alpha dominance and his techniques work perfectly when it comes to thought forms as well."

This analogy provides a powerful metaphor:

• You are the Master: "You must always remember that you are

the one in control, you are the one who gives energy to the servitors that you create and you are the one who can control energy with your mind." Just as a dog owner needs to project leadership, the servitor creator must embody absolute authority over their creation.

• The Root of Problems: Problems with servitor control stem from

the creator's difficulty in adopting this "dominant attitude."

Beyond Creation: Learning to Move and Direct Kreiter notes that some individuals are excellent at creating a servitor's form and imbuing it with psychic energy (making it functional), but they "seem to lack the ability to move this creature about that they have created." For this specific issue, he recommends a modified approach to the charging operation.

The "Slower Charging" Method for Control and Power

Instead of just focusing on general charging, Kreiter suggests integrating control exercises into the charging process.

1 Combined Practice: "Take a longer period to charge their

servitors so that while they are charging them they also practice giving them simple commands."

2 Simple Commands: Once you can "see or feel the form of their

servitor," start with basic commands. For example, if the servitor is hovering over your paper, "order the servitor to go from one end of a room to the other."

3 The Test: Does it Move? If it doesn't move, or moves

unsteadily, the issue lies in your intent.

4 Developing Intent through Belief: "In order to have it move

in the way that you want it to, you need to develop your intent. If you will remember, the act of intending is really the act of believing without question, that the command that you have given is being carried out." You must believe with "every ounce of your being" that it is moving as commanded, using the same method of belief-focused charging.

Core Teaching 7: Control Through Consistent, Believed-In Commands During Charging. The advice is practical and iterative: "If you are having problems controlling your servitor, and getting the results that you want from it, I suggest you take it easy when you are charging it and practice giving your servitor simple commands. It should obey these commands instantly." This reinforces the idea of mastery through practice: "you have learned how to create the machine, now you must learn how to control it."

Benefits of the "Slow Charging" Method

This method offers several advantages beyond just control:

• Enhanced Power: It develops the servitor's power while

simultaneously training your control.

• Greater Concreteness: Your servitor becomes "far more

concrete" after these exercises.

• Refined Visualization: As you command it to move (e.g., across a

room), you are "forced to extend the power of your charge so that you must also fill in the details for what your servitor might look from behind or what it might look like when it is moving." This leads to a richer, more vivid mental image.

• Increased Solidity: A "powerful visualizer" can even create a

thought form "so vivid that it actually looks solid and opaque as it travels from one end of the room to the other."

• Accelerated Development: Servitors created using this "slower

charging method" tend to become "truly powerful in a very short time." Kreiter considers this the "advanced charging method" for exponentially increasing a servitor's power and form.

The Ultimate Outcome: Commanding ALL Thought Forms As you consistently develop your "intent" through "strong focus and the ability to easily manipulate your beliefs," your control over your own servitors will solidify. A powerful long-term benefit emerges: "Once your intent becomes powerful enough, you should have no problem controlling your servitor. You will also discover that you will be able to command thought forms that were not created by you, this is a very good skill to have." This tantalizing prospect opens the next chapter, hinting at the ability to influence even external thought forms.

This chapter pivots to a crucial and often-requested topic: dealing with negative or unwanted thought forms. Kreiter directly addresses reader concerns about "unpleasant thought forms" they've encountered, including those that began positively but turned negative.

The Dual Nature of Thought Forms: Not All Are Benevolent Kreiter immediately states the "obvious": "there are not just positive thought forms like the ones that I'm hoping you will create... There are also many negative thought forms that are created by accident or on purpose and these negative thought forms can cause havoc in the lives of many people."

He addresses the critique of revealing such techniques to the general public, dismissing it by noting that this information is already accessible. His motivation for providing this guide is to empower individuals to understand and overcome negative influences, rather than to enable malicious creation.

Accidental Thought Forms: The Most Prolific Threat The most common type of negative thought form Kreiter encounters is the "accidental thought form."

• Origin: These arise from the "accidental thoughts and

intentions of others; negative thoughts and desires that begin to pool into a large conglomeration of negativity."

• Electromagnetic Quality: Thoughts have an "electromagnetic

quality" that makes them "magnets," attracting similar thoughts. This leads to the formation of "giant conglomerations of thought; sort of like a big stew." These complex "gestalts" evolve and change.

• Manifestation as "Echoes": Less developed negative gestalts

are often labeled "echoes" by paranormal investigators. These "tend to be thought forms that re-create terrible past events," essentially psychic impressions stamped onto reality by "incredibly negative events that had enough psychic energy."

• The Power Source: This "psychic energy" usually comes from

"highly intense emotions, quite possibly negative ones, which supercharge the current event in the minds of those that are experiencing it." It's not the event itself, but the "mental images or thoughts of the event, as witnessed and experienced by highly emotional individuals" that create the "thought stamp." He cites a terrible murder as an example.

The Amplification of Negative Thought Forms

Kreiter describes how these accidental thought forms gain power and definition:

• Human Attention: When a tragic site becomes "infamous" (like a

house where a murder occurred), it draws "attention and fascination." Curious individuals and paranormal investigators are "drawn into this vortex."

• Reinforcement: Their "negative attention" and "emotion"

inadvertently "augment" the negative thought form, developing its "mythic quality."

• Progression: What starts as a "blurred and shadowy echo

event," experienced only by sensitive individuals, becomes a "more defined event" that eventually affects "psychically non-sensitive individuals" who begin to experience "strange sensual phenomena" (sounds, images, ethereal touches, pushes, scratches).

• Intentionality: Through this focused, continuous attention, the

thought form "grows from a static thing to a more developed entity that can begin to move around." Essentially, people "have essentially created a negative type of servitor that begins to express an intent, this intent being a conglomeration of a true event and the legend that has grown around it."

• Impact on Innocents: New occupants of such a location,

particularly those with "stronger emotions and a more vivid imagination," can directly "identify" with the thought form, leading to intense paranormal experiences.

Addressing the Problem: Regaining Control and Dominance Kreiter acknowledges that these thought forms, whether intentionally created for harm or accidentally amplified, can be "quite problematic." His advice for getting rid of them centers on the principle of control:

Core Teaching 8: You Are Always in Control; Cultivate a Dominant Attitude. "My advice usually begins with reinforcing the idea that we are the ones in control. As human beings we can manipulate and control energy while thought forms are dependent on us to give them power." It is therefore within our power to remove any negative thought form.

• "Dog Whisperer" Revisited: He again suggests watching Cesar

Millan or doing anything else to "develop a more dominant attitude." Most people panic when faced with the unknown, making it hard to take a strong stance.

• Desensitization and "Fight Mentality": He hopes that over

time, people become "desensitized" to paranormal events and develop "a little more composure." The goal is to shift from a "flight mode" to a "fight mentality."

• Transforming Fear into Power: "The fear experienced as these

negative paranormal events are taking place must be turned into anger and/or ideally into a highly focused form of positive energy that can then be used to disperse a negative thought form."

• Intent is Key: The crucial component for this transformation is

"intent," defined as "the ability to believe, truly believe, in whatever you are commanding."

Fighting Fire with Fire: Creating a Counter-Servitor Since his book focuses on servitor creation, Kreiter's primary recommendation for dealing with negative thought forms is to "fight fire with fire."

• Create a Counter-Servitor: "Create a servitor that will

either disperse and destroy the negative thought form or at the very least drive it away."

• The Three-Step Process: Use the exact same three steps

outlined for creating any servitor:

1 Design: Create a servitor specifically designed to get rid

of the negative thought form.

2 Charge: Charge it until you "feel confident in its ability

to overcome the negative thought form."

3 Cast: Send your servitor "into the fray so that it can

destroy the negativity that now besets you."

• Intended Action: When casting, "you should be able to see or

feel it move into the area where you feel the most negative energy." You must intend it to go there, believing "with every ounce of your being that your servitor is now moving away from you and engaging this other negative thought form in battle."

• Control through Intent: "You control your servitor through

intent, you develop your intent through controlled belief."

• Persistence and Reinforcement: If the servitor initially fails,

"recharge your servitor until it is even more solid and more powerful." Then, send it out again. This is an iterative process: "This continues until you win, and you will win because your servitor will be gaining more and more power and form the more that you charge it." Eventually, your servitor "should be able to overcome just about any negative thought form you encounter."

The chapter a powerful strategy, directly applying the principles of servitor creation to a defensive and offensive purpose, reinforcing the user's inherent power.

This chapter addresses common questions and provides clarity on specific aspects of servitor creation and management, often expanding on previous concepts.

Why does the name of the servitor have to be secret?

• Protection from Others' Influence: The core reason is to

prevent others from "mess[ing] with your thought forms."

• The Impact of External Thoughts/Emotions: People often

underestimate how much others' thoughts and emotions affect them. Thoughts can be "transmitted" and have positive or negative effects.

• Metaphysical Resonance: Just as moods are contagious on a

physical level, "if a person is resonating in a certain frequency for long enough then they have the potential to affect the frequency of other people around them." This is why "psychic vampires" or highly negative individuals are to be avoided.

• Vibrational Tapping: Giving out the name allows others to

"begin to think and project their intention on you as they contemplate your doings and try to predict how successful you will be." Even "positive thoughts from those that wish for us to do well can affect us in ways that are sometimes not positive" due to personal views coloring the intention.

• Best Practice: "Essentially, it is better to keep your

business to yourself and the best way to do this is to just avoid talking about it." If you must discuss servitors, at least keep the name secret to prevent others from "project[ing] into the servitor either positively or negatively."

I thought you had said that vibrations are not important?

• Clarifying the Nuance: Kreiter explains that his earlier

statement was to steer readers away from "the minutia that can sometimes develop around the rituals" (like matching frequencies with colors), which create "difficulty and complexity where there is no need for any."

• True Importance of Vibrations: However, "Vibrations certainly

are important, they are the basis for all that we experience."

• The Distinction: Keeping the servitor's name secret is about

preventing others from "tap[ping] vibrationally into your servitor" and interfering with your workings. This is distinct from thinking you need to manually "create all sorts of vibrational resonances" for the servitor to work, as the deeper aspects of your inner being handle that. It's about protecting the energetic field, not about consciously constructing it with specific frequencies.

How big or small should I make my servitor?

• Recommendation: Small at First: He always advises making

servitors "small," suggesting "about the size of volleyball" as ideal.

• Reason for Small Size: "Charging a servitor takes effort and

this effort grows exponentially as your servitor grows bigger and more complex."

• Metaphysical Concept of "Size": Kreiter admits this is a

difficult concept because "thoughts are not subject to the same physical laws that we are. Size is really not a particular aspect of thought and therefore thought forms."

• Intensity Over Dimension: "The defining principle as to the

power and capabilities of a servitor are actually intensity; that is the intensity and duration of the charge given."

• Size as a Metaphor: We tend to use "bigger" as a metaphor for

"more powerful" because we can perceive servitors as growing in size if they receive "a huge amount of intense attention and emotion projected into it."

• Growth with Use: By starting small, if you "use a particular

servitor over and over again, it will grow in power (and then perhaps in size) on its own as you charge it over and over again to perform different tasks for you."

Can drugs help in creating a servitor?

• General Answer: No.
• Basis of Psychic Force: Servitor creation requires

"attention, which is the foundation of the psychic force that then must be channeled." This attention is driven by "belief coupled by desire," creating physical and mental tension that accumulates and channels energy.

• Drugs and the Conscious Mind: This is a "very difficult task to

accomplish under any kind of intoxication." While some drugs might create strong psychic tension, they also "cause a destabilization of the conscious mind."

• Recommendation: "To my knowledge, there is no drug that can

help in the creation of servitors and I suggest that you stay away from them when you are working with thought forms."

How do you dissipate a servitor?

• Proper Maintenance: A properly "maintained" servitor (with

"alpha dominance") "will not need any kind of dissipation or banishing."

• Regaining Control: If a servitor seems "rebelling," you must

"regain complete control" by giving it small tasks and ensuring perfect obedience.

• True Dissipation: Cutting Off Attention: If you want it to

dissipate, you need to "cut it off energetically. You cut off your servitor energetically by not paying attention to it; the more attention that you give it, the more emotion that you project towards it, the stronger that the servitor becomes." To dissipate, you "basically just cut it out from your life, period."

• Subtle Attention: If a servitor lingers despite your conscious

desire for it to go, you are likely still giving it some form of attention, perhaps due to "emotional guilt" or subconscious contemplation.

• External Thought Forms: If a persistent thought form is not

your own (accidentally or purposefully created by others), you should use the methods outlined in Chapter 7 (create a counter-servitor).

• Metaphysical Reality of Dissipation: A critical point:

"servitors, or any other kind of thought for that matter, never fully dissipates; that is they will never stop existing." When we say dissipate, it means they "will essentially lose their form within our physical frequency."

• Continued Existence in Other Dimensions: Our thoughts "do not

die and fade away once we stop having them, they move on to different frequencies (or dimensions... ) where they continue to evolve and explore their own separate intentions."

• The Meaning of "Dismantle": When you "dismantle or dissipate

a thought form, what you're really doing is taking away the attention energy that it needed in order for them to function to one degree or another within this physical plane." However, they continue their existence beyond our direct perception.

• Key to Control/Dissipation: "The answer to the question is

basically that if you wish to dissipate or control your servitors, what you need to do is to control the kind of attention that you give them."

Can you create a servitor to be self-sufficient?

• Simple Answer: No.
• Reasoning: Servitors are not "life as we understand it" and

their existence is not "truly physical" in our plane. They function under different "physical laws."

• Dependency on Creator's Energy: "For a servitor to

participate in our reality, we must give it the energy to do so." A servitor cannot generate this energy independently. If left alone, it will "soon lose this given energy and fade from what we consider physical reality." They must be continually recharged.

To create a servitor do you need to see it?

• Not Necessarily Visual: While belief in its reality is

paramount, "this though does not necessarily mean that you need to see it." Most people are visually oriented, but sight isn't the only marker of reality.

• Other Sensory Orientations:
• Feeling-oriented: Rely on physical feelings (heat,

vibration) or "gut feelings."

• Auditory-oriented: Find sounds (like a vibration) to be a

strong indicator of physical existence.

• Personal Sensory Feedback: Kreiter recommends trying the

exercises and observing what "sense impressions" you get (e.g., feeling its presence, hearing a vibration). You will "discover on your own what sensual experiences work best to convince you of the reality of your servitor."

• Author's Experience: He personally experiences a combination of

"the feeling of its presence, sometimes through vibration or a gut feeling, coupled with a highly visual image."

• "You therefore do not need to see your servitor

in order to bring it into form, what you need to do is to be able to sense it in a way that helps you most believe in its reality."

The first time I tried creating a servitor it worked great but now I can't seem to get it to work anymore. What am I doing wrong?

• The "Beginner's Mind" Effect: Initial success is often due to

the "beginner's mind" -- a state of greater openness and "child like sense of wonder." This allows for easier creation of things that might otherwise be difficult.

• Over-Analysis: The problem in subsequent attempts is often

"over analyz[ing]" the process. The "analytical mind gets in the way of the natural mind."

• Solution: Develop a Detailed Recipe/Formula: To bypass the

analytical mind, "develop a step-by-step formula that you will personally use to create/charge/cast a servitor."

• Detachment from Outcome: With this formula, "try to forget

about any kind of emotional ideas that you might have or any expectations that you might have about success or failure."

• Assumption of Success: "Take it for granted that if you

follow this recipe without any emotional attachment or expectation, you will be able to succeed every time."

• Post-Action Faith: Once the formula is completed, "you must

have faith." You must "essentially believe with every ounce of your being that what you have done has been successful and that your servitor will go out and do your bidding as you have commanded."

Belief is, once again, the key component

Do I need a new servitor every time?

• Depends on the Task: The answer hinges on the servitor's

purpose.

• Simplicity is Best: Kreiter strongly advises against "overtly

complicated" servitors (e.g., one that protects your home and brings desired objects). "When it comes to servitors; the simpler the better."

• Why Simplicity? A complicated servitor "requires more energy to

charge" and can become "a little bit schizophrenic," meaning it "cannot reason" and will be "useless" if given conflicting or overly broad commands. "give it one specific command or else it will essentially be useless."

• Reusing for the Same Task: If you have one specific task (like

home protection), "you can reuse your original servitor as many times as you like." Reusing a servitor "over and over again is actually preferable because every time that you use your servitor it becomes stronger and is therefore better at completing the type of task that you have commanded."

• The Process of Reusing: Call it by its secret name, feel its

presence, charge it until it feels like it has form again, and then send it out to do its bidding.

How long should I wait before I send out my servitor again?

• Subjectivity: This depends on the servitor's task and its

"criticality" in your mind.

• Protection (Less Frequent): For home protection, you might wait

"perhaps months." However, if you feel threatened, you would re-task it more frequently.

• Desire Fulfillment (More Frequent): For tasks involving desires,

"you will want to recharge and re-task your servitor far more frequently."

• General Rule for Active Tasks: "You should charge and task

your servitor no less than every three days." Call it back, recharge, and send it out. Continue until the desire is fulfilled.

• Time Lag for Manifestation: Thoughts take time to coalesce into

physical reality. This "time lag varies in length depending on the intensity of the thoughts involved." A servitor, being a "highly charged thought," often works quickly, but opposition can delay results.

• Less Urgent Tasks: If you are "more relaxed about the outcome,

or the outcome is one that cannot be quantified easily, try and send your servitor out every 15 days or so."

• Caution Against Overexertion: "Creating/charging/tasking

servitors can be an intensive process and can cause a lot of tension within, which is never a good thing when it is dragged out too long." He ends with a humorous but serious warning: "If you're sending servitors out all the time, you could really stress yourself out, which is very detrimental to your health. Believe it or not, a hernia is not an impossibility." This stresses the importance of balance and self-care in this practice.

We've reached the final section of John Kreiter's "Create a Servitor," where he synthesizes the core messages and offers encouragement to the reader.

In the concluding chapter, John Kreiter summarizes the essence of servitor creation and reiterates the profound potential it unlocks within the individual. He starts by affirming the simplicity of the process, contrasting it with complex, ritualistic approaches.

Simplicity Rooted in Inner Power

Kreiter emphasizes that creating a servitor "is not a complicated thing in the sense that it does not require some kind of critically complex ritualistic act." Instead, its success hinges on two fundamental internal capacities: "intense mental focus, coupled with the ability to play with your beliefs." The power comes from within, from the disciplined application of one's mind and the conscious manipulation of one's beliefs. He places the onus and the empowerment squarely on the practitioner: "It is up to you then to practice this intense psychic focus so that you too can be successful at creating a powerful thought form to do your bidding."

The Transformative Insight of Servitors

For Kreiter, the most "amazing part of servitors" as a teacher is their ability to "open up a person to the incredible potential of directed thoughts." He observes that even those who acknowledge the power of thought often struggle to truly "grasp the great potential of our imagination and thought."

Core Teaching 9: Servitor Creation is a Direct Path to Recognizing Your Own Creative Power. Through the deliberate act of "contemplation and creation of servitors," individuals gain a more direct, experiential understanding that "he/she is indeed a very powerful creator." This isn't just theoretical knowledge; it's a felt reality.

A Call to Action and a Challenge to Skepticism

Recognizing that some readers might still be hesitant, Kreiter issues a direct challenge: "If this is the case then I challenge you to take the plunge and create a servitor today." He allows for flexibility ("OK, you don't have to do it today but I do hope that you consider trying it as soon as possible."), but the encouragement to act is clear.

He frames the entire process as a "game," appealing to the childlike wonder he spoke of in the Introduction: "Can you believe in something that you don't think is real for 10 minutes? Can you pretend, like when you were a child, and just play a game for a little while?"

• Low Stakes: "you have nothing to lose, it's just a game after

all."

• High Reward: "BUT, if you do end up getting what you wanted,

please try to consider the possibility that there is more to this thought manipulation stuff."

He urges readers not to emulate the "average zealot skeptic" who "will ignore experiences that do not suit his/her world view." Instead, he calls them to embrace their inherent magical nature: "Life is magical, you are magical, so take your place as the amazing magical creator that you are." This

Servitors: A Tangible Application of Thought Power

For those who already believe that thoughts create reality, Kreiter hopes the manuscript has provided "one more amazing way to manipulate the world around you." He reaffirms that with "a little practice and effort," readers will be "amazed at the power that you now have." Servitors, in his view, offer a "fun and powerful way of working with those laws of thought."

Rediscovering Innate Magic

The book concludes on a deeply spiritual and empowering note: "There is so much mystery out there. There is so much that we don't know. A servitor will help you remember what you knew so well as a child, something that you know so well deep inside yourself; that you are a magician that can create new worlds." This speaks to an intuitive, forgotten wisdom within each person, a natural ability to shape reality that servitors can help reignite.

Inspirational Quotes

Kreiter concludes with four thought-provoking quotes that encapsulate the spirit of the book:

• "Disbelief in magic can force a poor soul into believing in

government and business." --- Tom Robbins

• This quote highlights how a lack of belief in one's own magical

capacity can lead to a narrow, less fulfilling existence, perhaps implying that we unconsciously direct our creative energy towards less empowering systems if we don't acknowledge our true power.

• "The world is full of magic things, patiently waiting for our

senses to grow sharper." --- W.B. Yeats

• This reinforces the idea that magic isn't absent, but rather

our perception needs refinement. Servitors, by training our focus and belief, can be a tool for sharpening these "senses."

• "No, I would not want to live in a world without dragons, as I

would not want to live in a world without magic, for that is a world without mystery, and that is a world without faith." --- R.A. Salvatore

• This speaks to the richness and depth that magic and mystery

bring to life, suggesting that embracing such possibilities leads to a more faithful and wondrous existence. Servitors are a direct experience of this "magic."

• "Scientists have calculated that the chances of something so

patently absurd actually existing are millions to one. But magicians have calculated that million-to-one chances crop up nine times out of ten." --- Terry Pratchett

• This humorous but profound quote perfectly encapsulates

Kreiter's message about belief and possibility. It challenges conventional, limited thinking and celebrates the magician's (and therefore the individual's) ability to transcend perceived impossibilities through focused intent and belief.

The conclusion leaves the reader with a sense of wonder, encouragement, and a clear understanding that the journey of servitor creation is fundamentally a journey of self-discovery and empowerment, where the mind's true potential can be harnessed to shape one's reality.

The chapter addresses the most obvious question stemming from the book's title: "Do I have to be a vampire in order to use their methods of psychic self-protection?"

The author's unequivocal answer is: "Most definitely, NO."

He explains his choice of the "vampiric perspective" and terminology:

1 Authenticity of Source: The knowledge originates from

individuals who practiced and developed "vampiric techniques" to extend life and acquire power. Presenting it otherwise, with a "new age angle" or pretending it comes from a "purely loving approach," would be disingenuous. This information was forged in the crucible of survival in a hostile world, necessitating the development of "predatory instincts and predatory claws."

2 Pedagogical Efficacy: The predatory approach is essential for

properly teaching the methodologies of transmuting negative energy into positive personal power. When the author uses "Transmute," he is referring to an alchemical process. To perform this transmutation, one must adopt some of the attributes of those who developed the methodology -- the Ancient Vampires.

Who are these "Ancient Vampires"? The author clarifies that he is not referring to the Hollywood stereotype of blood-drinking zombies.

• Not Vampire Bats: A vampire bat is a biological creature that

feeds on blood for sustenance, like any other animal. It doesn't transform blood into a special energy for extended life or paranormal abilities.

• Not Pop Culture Vampires: The book dismisses the romantic,

immortal figures obsessed with love and loneliness.

• Not Modern "Blood Drinkers": While acknowledging groups who

consume human blood for health or hunger, the author states this is not the "vampire" he is discussing. He notes that even these practices, when they occur, often generate a "highly charged emotional moment" from which the energy is the real benefit.

The author introduces his definition of True Human Vampires / Ancient Vampires:

• These are the "real death defiers" who do not drink blood.
• Instead, they "actually drink the subtle energy within all living

things."

• This ancient tradition is thousands of years old, evidenced in:
• Taoist alchemy in China: Texts speak of collecting and

redistributing "Chi" for prolonging life and creating the "philosopher's stone" or "great pearl" for immortality.

• Shamanic cultures worldwide: Inklings of this tradition are

found globally.

• Ötztal Alps Iceman: His over 50 tattoos precisely placed

along meridian (acupuncture) lines indicate advanced knowledge of "body energetics" in Europe some 3,300 years ago.

• Indian traditions: Stories of "old vampiric beings" who

defied death, using techniques akin to "Geotia" (Western term) to reorganize energetic currents, especially evident in Kundalini yoga practices. These traditions speak of people living for hundreds of years with minimal need for physical food.

The fundamental understanding of these ancient traditions is that all things are energy-based.

• Human beings are born with a finite amount of energy and create

more throughout life (through ingestion, breathing, minimal environmental absorption).

• However, humans are energetically "full of holes," like "a bucket

that has many leaks."

• This means our natural and created energy is often insufficient for

sustained health.

• Life is not static; we are predators and prey in a "highly

complex and savage ecosystem."

• Ancient vampires believed that to maintain vigor and health, one

must learn to take life energy from the world, seal energetic leaks, and redistribute internal resources efficiently.

• Their ultimate goal was to extend life, even achieve immortality, by

creating a "golden elixir" and manipulating the "Great Stone" (philosopher's stone/great pearl) to form an energy body (or "double") that could survive organic death.

The Book's Practical Application for the Reader

• You do not need to be a "vampire" to use these techniques; you

only need to implement the ones they discovered.

• These techniques allow you to work with energy directly,

enabling you to transform all surrounding negativity into a positive energy flow for greater vigor and happiness.

• They also teach you to repel, and sometimes destroy, negative

entities that seek to harm or drain you. The author notes these entities are "far more common than most would imagine," especially with human population growth.

The author acknowledges a partial tap into Western vampire culture for symbolism and archetypal energy. While Eastern texts depict "death defiers" as kindly hermits or intellectual types, Western vampiric lore (and the author's own understanding) reveals that these ancient figures lived "ruthless lives full of intrigue and many power struggles." To conquer death, they had to traverse the "deep dark abyss of human awareness," emerging changed, "still carrying a little of that eternal darkness." they were no longer purely "human."

But don't worry! The author assures the reader that traversing such darkness is not necessary.

• What is needed, however, is to "borrow some of the old vampire's

courage and will."

• Of paramount importance for battling negative forces are their

ruthlessness, fearlessness, and predatory stance

This introduction and first chapter set the stage, redefining "vampire" from a supernatural entity to a practitioner of ancient energy mastery, emphasizing the vital shift from a defensive, prey-like mindset to an offensive, predatory one for psychic self-defense and energetic self-sufficiency. It promises practical techniques rooted in a forgotten wisdom that views reality as energetic and life as a struggle for sustenance.

This chapter critiques the prevailing methods of psychic self-defense, asserting their ineffectiveness and, at times, their detrimental nature. The author, drawing from his extensive studies and communications with people seeking help, highlights a common theme: people are plagued by negative energy and entities, and traditional methods simply aren't working.

The author notes a disturbing trend: attacks by negative entities are on the rise. He lists common, yet ineffective, self-defense strategies people try:

• Psychic shields
• Pentagram rituals
• Crystals and garlic
• Psychic cleansing and exorcism

He states bluntly: "These have little or no effect on the negative forces that accost them." People who reach out for help have often exhausted these options and failed. The author even "flinches" reading about some attempts, knowing these methods often worsen the situation. His motivation for writing this book is to offer a "radically different (and yet incredibly old and efficient) method."

The Critique of Traditional Shielding

• Most psychic self-defense books teach some form of shielding or

minor internal energy work. While internal energy work can be positive, it's often too "passive" for long-term effectiveness.

• The author strongly believes that creating a shield is generally

more of a hindrance than a help.

• Neophytes employing shields often feel "quite safe behind their

walls," which is a false sense of security, leading them to take "dangerous risks" where "predatory forces can scoop them up like candy."

• Attempting to create a psychic shield can have the reverse

effect, feeding and empowering the very entities one is trying to stop.

• Powerful visualized shields (e.g., using positive light, or

complex rituals like the Lesser Pentagram Ritual) are only effective for short periods. They were designed by sorcerers not for permanent protection, but as temporary walls to enable rest, contact with dangerous entities, or exploration of "precarious areas within the dark sea of human awareness." The intent was to open up later to directly engage with these forces.

• These advanced shields are highly dependent on the practitioner's

skill and energy level. Without enough experience, practice, or energy, the shield will quickly dissipate, leaving the individual vulnerable.

Truly Effective Shielding (and its limitations for the average person)

• The author states that the only truly effective shielding is that

created using servitors or talismans (a talisman being a physically bound servitor). These are essentially "serviceable thought forms."

• Examples: A servitor shaped like a cocoon ("the wall of

warding") or a lamp flooding with positive light to deter negative entities. A talisman can symbolically represent a servitor, empowering it when worn.

• The major problem: Creating an effective servitor requires

significant energy and focus. If you're already weak from an attack, drowning in bad luck, or unable to concentrate, it's nearly impossible to create one for yourself, let alone for someone else. A servitor cannot generate its own energy; it must be "fed" with the creator's energy or it becomes "inert and ineffective."

The Critique of Minerals, Powders, Crystals, and Garlic

• People using these for barriers are often "deluded as to the

effectiveness of these methods."

• While some can be "quite effective in dealing with SOME forms of

negative attack," they are often not used properly.

• The author uses the mosquito metaphor: DEET (bug spray) works,

but you have to "douse yourself in the stuff to protect yourself completely." If you miss "one spot, the mosquito will find it; it is patient and has many clever ways of finding the holes in your amour." This illustrates the futility of trying to find every "hole" in a defensive barrier against persistent negative forces.

The Inevitable Conclusion

• If none of these common psychic self-defense methods work, what is

left?

• "We are left with the only option that is really available to us;

the vampire's way."

• This approach demands a "radical change in how we perceive

ourselves."

• We must "stop acting like a herd animal and start acting like the

predators that we all are."

• This means shedding the illusion of safety (hiding behind "antlers,

cool camouflage, and big herds") and instead "dust off old claws that were always there" to "devour those that would devour us."

This chapter powerfully dismantles conventional notions of psychic defense, arguing that a passive, defensive stance is not only ineffective but also potentially harmful. It prepares for the book's core philosophy: a shift from victim to empowered predator, embracing an active, consuming role in the energetic landscape.

This chapter marks a critical pivot in understanding the world, urging the reader to adopt the perspective of the "ancient vampire." This new viewpoint is fundamental to the book's self-defense techniques, as it radically alters one's perception of reality and one's place within it.

The chapter opens with a quote from Sheryl Lee: "It's almost as if we each have a vampire inside us. Controlling that beast, that dark side, is what fascinates me." This sets the tone for exploring the inherent predatory nature within humanity.

Challenging the Mechanical Worldview

• The author contrasts the "general human view of reality" with

that of the ancient vampires. The common human perspective sees a "highly mechanical world filled with objects," where humans are merely biological entities at the "apex predators" due to their advanced brains. Science is believed to have "covered" everything, leaving little to fear or discover beyond expected parameters.

• Ancient vampires, however, perceived reality "markedly

different[ly]." They saw an "infinitely mysterious place made up of pure energy." While modern science acknowledges that matter is vibrating energy, the ancient vampires acted on this knowledge, using it to defy death and acquire power, long before modern science.

The Ancient Vampires' Profound Discoveries

Through their energy-based perception, ancient vampires made "amazing discoveries" that were so frightening, they "forced [them] to completely alter the way that they interacted with the world."

Their primary discovery involved two major types of life on the material world:

1 Biological Entities (Energy Generators): Living animals that

generate energy and consume energy from other biological and mineral systems. We exist in a complex, savage ecosystem, nourished by the sun.

2 Mineral Matter (Energy Maintainers/Storers): Non-living matter

that stores energy.

But the biggest, life-changing discovery was a different, invisible type of life largely ignored by everyone. This life was categorized into two distinct groups (using the author's terminology):

• Non-Energy Generating Phantasms (NEGPs):
• Primarily creations of the human mind.
• Vary in size, complexity, and "cohesive power."
• More fluid than mineral life, possessing an energetic quality

that allows them to attract and repel based on their structure and stored energy.

• They exist around the planet like a "thick soup," their ebb

and flow like "non-material and invisible weather patterns."

• Modern terms for these include thoughts, thought forms, and

thought gestalts (or memes).

• These NEGPs, birthed by the highly creative human mind,

influence and are fed by human consciousness.

• Inorganic or Non-Organic Beings (NOBs):
• The discovery of these beings truly initiated ancient vampiric

societies.

• They come in varying sizes and complexity, just like biological

life.

• Some NOBs are "infinitely more intelligent than men" and can

live for "far longer" (some were even "immortal").

• NOBs are generally "far more aware of us than we are of

them," yet humanity remains largely oblivious, despite legends of faerie folk and elementals.

• A crucial, "terrible discovery" was made: some NOB species

(Predatory NOBs or PNOBs) actively feed on the life force of organic creatures.

• PNOBs vary from small, simple creatures (like fish or birds) to

large, intelligent ones (as big as a man, or even houses).

• They are invisible to the average human eye as they are

energy-based life forms without corporeal essence.

• Average humans usually only perceive side effects of their

presence, like temperature shifts or a "tingly feeling" of static or cold electricity.

• Because they can't be seen or measured by modern tools, their

existence is largely ignored. However, the author notes that people open to the possibility can "redevelop an internal inner sense" to physically detect these "alien beings."

The Vampire's Purpose and the Book's Promise

• Ancient vampires recognized that vigor and extended life depend

entirely on life force.

• The discovery of predatory PNOBs was "crucial importance" to them.
• Their objective became to replicate PNOB power and longevity,

and to actively fight and overcome both PNOBs and NEGPs.

The book promises to teach the reader the "most basic and powerful of the old human vampiric techniques" to:

• Overcome personal negative energy.
• Handle negative energy and intent from others.
• Fight off dangerous PNOBs and NEGPs.
• Ultimately, "thrive from all of the negative energy in your

life."

This chapter fundamentally shifts the reader's worldview from a material, mechanistic reality to an energetic one, introducing the hidden predators and prey that inhabit it. It posits that humans are not at the top of the energetic food chain as commonly believed, but are actively preyed upon by unseen entities. The "vampire's way" offers a method not of defense, but of turning the tables and consuming what seeks to consume you.

This chapter begins the practical application of the "vampire's way" by focusing on the most immediate source of negativity: ourselves. It's about taking responsibility for one's own energetic output and transforming it.

The Source of Personal Negativity

• The first step in controlling negative energy is realizing that

most of it is internal---"the negative energy that we exude into the world ourselves."

• This internal negativity is the root cause of personal strife

and even attracts external negative entities (NEGPs and PNOBs, which will be covered later).

• From an ancient vampire's energetic perspective, humans are like

"large egg-shaped light bulbs" that constantly "blink," varying in brightness, or like the sun, shooting "coronal flares."

• These "coronal flares" are intense emotional outbursts,

predominantly negative.

• This constant flaring is highly wasteful because humans have

limited inherent energy and can only create a certain amount (primarily through ingestion and breathing).

• Depleting energy through "wasteful emotional output" heavily

drains individuals. The "light bulb diminishes," leading to physical aging and sickness---a perceived "natural cycle."

• The Vampire's Method of Energy Reabsorption offers a way to

break this cycle, allowing individuals to live healthier and happier lives by absorbing their own negative energy outbursts.

Understanding Negative Energy Flares (Human Perspective)

• Negative thoughts can arise from immediate negative events (e.g.,

car crash, being shoved) or from underlying negative personal beliefs about reality, which then guide thought patterns.

• The author notes that the world is currently caught in a "negative

energetic eddy," making it "nearly impossible" to fight negativity with just "personal internal work" alone. This explains why even "enlightened people" can fall into "human horror." The author encourages viewing this as a "challenge to be overcome," not an inescapable reality.

The Energetic Nature of Negative Thoughts

• Negative thoughts create an "intense energetic flow" through

the body, often felt as tension that accumulates and directs energy.

• This energy is then "expelled from the body" as a "slow

ebbing radiation" or a "powerful burst of energy" akin to a solar flare. Physically, this is experienced as a "simmering wave of negativity" or a "great burst of anger, fear, or self-pity."

• Ancient vampires discovered that thoughts are never destroyed;

they only change form, frequency, and energetic level. Some thoughts "vibrate at a much slower rate" and remain in the "human realm."

• These human thoughts are complex and can "come together in a

magnetic fashion" to increase their complexity and strength. This leads to the formation of "thought gestalts" that can develop "a type of intent" and become what are now called "thought forms."

• A thought form is a thought given enough attention or energy

from its creator to manifest in consensual reality.

• These complex thought gestalts can affect their creators, causing

more "energy flares"---energetic outbursts that creators "pay for dearly." Essentially, negative thoughts can evolve and "come back to haunt us."

The Flaw of the "Positivity Movement"

• Many philosophical and religious ideals promote stopping negative

thoughts and turning them into positive ones (the "positivity movement").

• Ancient vampires, however, believed that humans cannot currently

change their energetic or intellectual state in this fashion.

• The author's research supports this: forcing a perpetually

positive state can be "quite detrimental energetically and therefore mentally," even causing illness.

• Ancient vampires realized that escaping negative thoughts was

impossible, even by isolating oneself. Human thoughts and attention "permeate the entire planet," and no amount of psychic shielding can protect against them constantly.

• Therefore, instead of running away, they decided to "attack the

situation energetically."

The Core Methodology: Absorbing Personal Negativity

• The ancient death defiers attacked negativity by draining it of

its power. This was applied first and foremost to themselves.

• By draining their own negative thoughts, these thoughts became

"inert" and no longer bothersome. Any energy they emotionally expelled could be "reabsorbed," bringing their energy expulsion to "near zero."

• This chapter teaches methods to absorb your personal negative

energy, random negative thoughts, and personal negative thought forms (NEGPs). Personal NEGPs are "personally created thought forms," often negative, acting like "land mines" that trigger crippling negative emotions. More powerful ones can even develop "personal intent" and attack randomly.

What to Do When Experiencing Personal Negative Energy/NEGPs

The instruction is clear: "suck up this negative emotional flare, this expulsion of energy."

• When a negative event or strong personal NEGP occurs, you learn to

draw this negative energy into yourself and continue until the "emotional flare (or charge) is gone."

• This helps prevent further energy loss, which otherwise makes you

weaker and prone to more negative thoughts and outcomes.

• The process is done while experiencing the negative emotion

naturally, rather than trying to suppress it (which can have detrimental consequences).

The techniques for doing this are broken down into four distinct parts:

1 Reverse Breathing:

• A powerful method for drawing energy into yourself.
• Physically, it's the reverse of normal breathing:
• Normal breathing: Chest expands, stomach expands on

inhale.

• Reverse breathing: Consciously contract your stomach

and chest as you inhale.

• This contraction creates a "feeling of powerful suction" that

"sucks up energy" directly through the "skin and bones."

• Advanced Method (with diagram): Not only contract chest

and stomach, but also "push down with your solar plexus" while "pushing up with your perineum."

• This strong contraction pulls energy into the "center of your

body (which is called the cauldron)." The diagram shows arrows pointing inwards from the front and back of the torso towards the center, indicating the energetic pull.

2 Visualization:

• Not just visual: Visualization in energy work primarily

relies on your ability to feel energy moving out and back into your body (e.g., a light tingle or pressure).

• To start: Pay attention to the tension you feel when

projecting negative emotions. When trying to draw expelled energy back, "visualize/imagine that feeling again but this time in reverse order."

• Best visualization: Imagine drawing a "black cloud of

energy" into yourself. See this dark cloud around you being pulled in as you reverse breathe. As it contacts your skin, visualize a "feeling of tension that runs all the way from my skin to the center of my body like a wave." Then, using advanced reverse breathing, visualize this sucked-up energy concentrating into a "powerful ball of energy right in the middle of my cauldron."

3 Affirmation:

• A repeated phrase to "consolidate your intent."
• It helps cleanse the mind and focus on a goal.
• When drawing in negative energy (flares or from personal NEGPs),

repeat an affirmation like, "I take my energy back."

• This affirmation aids visualization and focus during reverse

breathing, centering intent on energy re-absorption. The diagram on page 35 illustrates the "cauldron" as a yellow circle in the core of the torso, with inward-pointing arrows, reinforcing the idea of energy being drawn to this central point.

4 Transmutation:

• Briefly introduced here, but a critical step for external

negative energy.

• It's "the act of taking energy of a certain type and turning

it into energy of a completely different order." More detail will be given later. For personal energy absorption, it's not as critical as for external energy.

Putting It All Together - Scenario One: Personal Negative Energy Flares

• Example: Waiting for a loved one driving, negative thoughts

about an accident lead to emotional outbursts ("shooting off negative energy flares").

• The problem: Losing negative energy makes you weaker and

attracts more negativity.

• The solution:

1 Immediately "suck up" this negative emotion.

2 Start with reverse breathing to stop further energy flaring.

3 Visualize all the expelled negative energy as a "big dark

cloud" around you, drawing it back in.

4 Affirm (silently or aloud): "I take this energy back into

myself."

5 Concentrate on reverse breathing and visualization, sucking all

"negative imagery back into yourself."

6 Continue until "no longer feeling negative emotions and

depression" and the "charge from this negative flare is consumed."

• This process continues as long as needed. You know

you're done when the "strong negative emotional charge" is gone.

Putting It All Together - Scenario Two: Dealing with Personal NEGPs

• Example 1 (Landmine NEGP): You're hit by an "incredibly

negative emotion" ("tidal wave," hysterics, visions of accidents/death), even before you can think of sucking energy. This is a personal NEGP "landmine."

• Example 2 (Active NEGP): Negative emotional attacks occur "out

of the blue" (e.g., seeing a car triggers a flood of negativity, or a random attack while minding your own business). This indicates a more advanced personal NEGP with "personal intent" actively attacking you.

• Origin of Personal NEGPs: A "terrible tragedy" (e.g., family

dying in an accident) causes a "huge burst of negative thoughts and emotion" over time, forming a "conglomeration of thought energy" that shapes into a "negative thought form."

• Less powerful thought forms: Act like landmines, triggered

by similar negativity.

• More powerful thought forms: Develop "intent," actively

attacking you even without conscious negative thoughts on your part.

• Dealing with Personal NEGPs: Use the exact same techniques as

for negative energy flares.

• Difference: You'll feel a "far more intense energetic

connection" and an "incredible burst of personal power" when draining them. Sensations like "tingling" or "shiver" are common.

• Timeframe: Powerful personal NEGPs can take months to

completely absorb.

• How to know when it's absorbed: When the "terrible

emotional onslaughts" completely stop. don't stop when emotions diminish; keep draining until they stop completely.

• NEGPs cannot be destroyed, only rendered inert by draining

all their energy. They become "inert" ("like an egg without a yolk") and will eventually detach.

• Strategic Advantage: If the creator (even yourself

unconsciously) recharges the NEGP and sends it back, you can simply drain it again. This turns the attacker's energy against them, a "banquet of highly concentrated energy" that drains the attacker.

• The Benefit: After each "feeding" from a big personal NEGP,

you'll feel "incredibly energized," your body will relax, and you'll feel "content, energized, and free."

• Overall Confidence: As you master these "vampiric energy work"

techniques, you'll become more confident in dealing with all kinds of negative emotions. You'll even find yourself "happy, in a way, when these negative emotions present themselves because it will mean that you have a chance to feed." You will be "consuming this negative energy with the passionate gusto of the fledgling vampire."

The chapter a detailed, step-by-step guide to applying the "vampire's way" to internal negativity. It fundamentally shifts the perspective from passively enduring or weakly defending against negative thoughts and emotions to actively consuming them as a source of personal power and well-being. The introduction of reverse breathing, visualization, and affirmation forms the practical bedrock of this transformation.

Having learned to deal with personal negativity, this chapter expands the "vampire's way" to cover negative energy originating from other people. It posits that the world is inherently "negative" due to collective human consciousness, and traditional responses only exacerbate the problem.

The Reality of External Negativity

• The author assumes the reader is aware of personal negativity and,

by extension, that the world is "a pretty negative place," filled with others just like them.

• In high-population areas, particularly metropolitan cities,

exposure to large amounts of negative energy is guaranteed

People are often tense, "jostling for space and competing," in a constant "fight or flight readiness," expelling "large amounts of energy into the environment." The more people, the worse the energetic atmosphere.

• This negativity isn't confined to cities; it's present anywhere

competition or "jostling for position" exists, even in small towns. It's "an impossible thing to escape."

Traditional Responses to External Negativity -- And Why They Fail

• When people encounter negative energy from others, their instinctual

reaction is to tense up and go into "fight or flight" mode, releasing adrenaline. This only "aggravates the negative energy already found in the area and makes things worse."

• Those aware of energy work often try to "put up a wall of positive

light" or other shields. However, as previously discussed,

shields work for only so long and can be more draining than the fight-or-flight response itself

The Vampire's Different Approach: The Banquet

• Ancient vampires viewed environments rich in human negative energy

not as a threat, but as "akin to hitting the jackpot" -- a "banquet to be enjoyed."

• Instead of tensing up, getting frustrated, or angry, the vampire

relaxes and "opens himself up to the huge amounts of energy that others are wasting."

• The vampire plays "Go Fish" while others play checkers or chess,

jostling and blocking. The vampire simply "sucks up this wasted energy."

Energy is Just Energy -- The Key to Transmutation

• The author emphasizes a crucial shift: a vampire does not

see energy as "positive or negative; he just sees energy."

• The human tendency to classify energy as "loving," "positive,"

or "negative" is merely a labeling of "a large conglomeration of energy that is being propelled through either individual or group intent."

• The true difference in energy lies in its intent. Human intent

can manipulate and focus energy. Greater energy amplifies intent, and stronger intent manipulates more energy.

• Therefore, when a vampire "transmutes negative energy in his

cauldron," he is not transmuting the energy itself, but the intent of that energy through "a superior act of personal intent."

• Even pure human intent, without prior transmutation, can be ingested

by a skilled vampire as a "consumable energy source."

The "Finely Printed Clause in the Contract of Life"

• By employing the techniques (the same as in Chapter 4) and adopting

the predatory stance, you "take your rightful place as a predator in this world, as opposed to the mindless automaton that most people are."

• This allows you to "thrive and become powerful in a place where

most live in misery, tension, and unhappiness."

• the author claims that "in helping yourself, you will

also help the whole of the world escape from the negative current that now has a hold on all of us."

Initiating the Process: Neutralizing Judgment and Embracing Predation

• To begin, you must "consider energy as just energy and stop

labeling it good or bad." This is difficult for the human mind, which prefers black-and-white classifications.

• Once this is internalized, you will naturally relax your body and

stop the fight-or-flight response. Relaxation becomes your "great emancipator," quieting the mind and reducing personal negative thoughts.

• While some internal resistance to seeing others' negative intent as

"just energy" will remain, you must engage your "highly neglected aspect of your psyche; your predatory nature."

• This predatory stance is vital for two reasons:

1 Transmuting Foreign Intent: It allows you to "transmute

what is referred to as negative energy into personally useful energy" from what others discard. The "positivity movement" errs by not separating intent from basic energy. To thrive on "negative" energy, you must "mentally turn yourself into a predatory creature," actively "grabbing and consuming" it. A predator "takes, he leads, he consumes and makes it his own." This is the mindset.

• The "Puffer" Analogy: The author introduces the term

"Puffer," historically given to pseudo-alchemists who tried to transmute substances physically with cauldrons and bellows. True alchemists knew the real "alchemical cauldron" was the human body. Transmutation is an internal process, a "change in belief and attitude."

• Ingesting "Poison": When you ingest "dark negative

energy" (visualized as a "black cloud, a dark evil mist"), it might feel like "eating poison" if you cling to old beliefs. But through the predatory mindset, you transmute this "negative pool into powerful life-giving energy."

• "Bite down on it and eat it, consume it and bring it into

yourself as a powerful predatory monster": The "sheer ferocity of your spirit" changes your beliefs about the energy, and through this change in belief and attitude, the energy transmutes.

2 Fighting Foreign Intent: The predatory demeanor provides the

"energy and the intent to fight against the negative intent of others." This allows you to "grab the energy behind this bad foreign intent and consume it for your own benefit." A predator is a hunter who "never gives up without a fight."

Important Reassurance

• You do not need to be a "vampire" or "feed off of people" in

the literal sense.

• You are consuming "wasted" negative energy that causes "great

anguish and pain" and contributes to "destructive negative thought forms (NEGPs)" and feeds "voracious inorganic beings (PNOBs)."

• "By consuming this energy, you are doing all of humanity a

service." Doubly so if you then use this transmuted energy for "positive thoughts" and to "wish kindness upon others." The author calls this "the greatest thing that you can do for the human race at the moment."

Putting It All Together - Scenario 1: Traffic Jam

• The Scene: Stuck in traffic, you (and everyone else) start

expelling negative energy. A "gigantic and very powerful" dark energy cloud forms.

• Traditional Response vs. Vampire Way:
• Most people get angry, swayed by the negativity.
• Some try to resist by tensing or projecting positive energy

(which only works for so long and can be draining).

• The Vampire Way: "Devour all that energy that others seem

to be so willing to throw away."

• The Process:

1 Catch yourself before expelling too much negativity.

2 Use reverse breathing to stop further outward energy flares.

3 Focus on your own negative energy first, sucking it up

with visualization and affirmation ("I take this energy back into myself").

4 As you finish ingesting your personal energy, you will still

feel negativity -- this is the negativity of others. Continue ingesting it.

5 As you absorb more external negative energy, you'll feel

"full," "bubbly and happy," and the external negativity "won't bother you so much." You might feel like you're "in a happy bubble floating on a pond of negativity."

6 If negativity returns, keep ingesting. You'll be "so energized

that you will want to run the marathon."

Putting It All Together - Scenario 2: Targeted Negativity/Ill Will

• The Scene: You're in a place where people dislike you or have

ill will, causing you to feel "worthless and highly vulnerable," even self-destructive. (The author bluntly states, "people are not nearly as nice as we would sometimes like to believe.")

• The Vampire Way:

1 When these feelings arise, "take this energy, make it your

own, and suck it up." This empowers you instead of intimidating you.

2 Employ your full arsenal:

• Reverse breathing.
• Visualize the energy coming into you, "perhaps like a

dark cloud."

• Affirm (in your mind): "I take this energy and make

it mine."

3 Once you've absorbed a good amount, use advanced reverse

breathing to pool this energy into your cauldron.

4 Adopt the "predatory attitude" -- feel like a "true

vampire," "very hungry."

5 Relish the feeling of ingesting this energy, your body "rips

it apart and makes it your own, feeding and empowering you into becoming an even more powerful beast."

• Universal Application: You must "eat ALL energy that is

negative to you," even from family or friends. Treat it as your own negative energy and consume it.

• Important Clarification: You are NOT feeding off people.

This is energy they have expelled and are often unaware of, and they are usually not intending to hurt you.

• Benefit to Self & Others: This "wasted" energy causes harm to

you and your environment. By consuming it, you become stronger.

• Optional Step: Projecting Positivity: Once transmuted into

personal energy, you can use the "power surplus" to project "positive energy and intent" back into the environment. Imagine "light and love," see it as "wonderful white light," and project it. This is "true transmutation," turning "the most negative of situations into a highly positive one."

This chapter thoroughly examines the process of consuming external negative energy, emphasizing the critical mindset shift required. It moves beyond mere defense to active consumption, turning perceived attacks into opportunities for personal growth and energetic empowerment, with the added benefit of subtly improving the collective energetic environment.

This chapter goes deeper into the nature of thought forms and how to defend against those created by others ("foreign NEGPs") using the vampiric method, specifically introducing the concept of "etheric claws."

The Pervasive Blanket of Human Thought

• As the human population grows, the planet is increasingly encased in

a "thicker and thicker blanket of human thought."

• Ancient vampires understood that humans are "thought generating

machines," agreeing with Descartes' "I think therefore I am."

• While many thoughts move into other dimensions, a significant

portion remain in our reality, deeply influencing individual and species development.

• These thoughts act like "radio waves" or "oxygen," blanketing

the planet. They are incredibly complex, can combine and intermix to form larger thoughts or "gestalts," and can even develop their own "form of intent." Thoughts, like living beings, "develop and grow," and once created, "cannot be destroyed or taken back by the creator."

• All these created thoughts affect us daily, from weak individual

intrusions to powerful "thought gestalts" (modernly called memes) that alter human consciousness and beliefs. Thoughts are seen as "highly complex energy units that create the physical reality we all experience." Therefore, "Thoughts therefore are all important."

Understanding Thought Forms (NEGPs)

• In this context, "thought forms" are thoughts given enough

attention/energy to manifest to some degree in consensual reality. The author again refers to his book "How to Create a Servitor to Do Your Bidding" for more detail.

• A thought form/servitor/egregor is a "highly charged thought or

group of thoughts," powered by life force.

• They can be charged intentionally by powerful individuals or

unintentionally by groups with similar thoughts and high emotions.

• Once powerful enough, they can be given a specific task (if

intentional) or develop their own intent (if accidental).

Accidentally Created Thought Forms (NEGPs)

• Most thought forms are created accidentally. The author uses the

example of a "haunted house" (from his other book):

• A tragic event (e.g., murder) generates "incredibly powerful

emotional output," creating a "thought form stamp or echo."

• Public attention and fascination with the tragedy "reinforce

the almost mythic quality," further developing this "negative echo."

• What began as a "blurred and shadowy echo event" becomes a

"more defined event" that changes to suit the evolving legend.

• Eventually, non-sensitive individuals start experiencing strange

phenomena (sounds, images, ethereal touch).

• As the thought form grows in "power of form" (presence), new

residents experience strange phenomena. A sensitive or imaginative person might "identify directly with this thought form."

• Such a NEGP is a "non-energy generating Phantasm" that was

created in an area of tragedy.

• Less developed NEGPs: Stay in the area, acting like "really

bad psychic land mines."

• More complex/powerful NEGPs: Develop their own intent and

"leave the area," actively seeking out people to project themselves into, usually triggering an emotional response they then "feed on."

• These accidentally created NEGPs "move around the atmosphere of

the planet seeking satisfaction of their own personal intents just like a living organism." They are "fed" by causing fear, anger, depression, or pain. They can even "attach itself to certain vulnerable people," moving "from host to host, becoming more powerful and therefore more successful at extolling negative energy (food) from humanity."

Purposefully Created Thought Forms (Servitors)

• These are created with a specific purpose. Positive servitors can

help with various life aspects, including psychic self-defense (e.g., "wall of warding"). They are bound by the creator's positive intent and won't harm others.

• Consciously created negative thought forms are "far more

insidious." They are given "negative intentions" and "commanded to hurt individuals, groups, or even places."

• These hostile NEGPs are like "arrows that go straight at the

intended target" and "harass that target until they either run out of energy, are vanquished, or their task is accomplished."

• They are more insidious because accidentally created ones might move

on, but purposefully created ones will "haunt and harass you until you deal with them."

• Man-made NEGPs can take any shape or form, limited only by the

creator's imagination and energy. They can "shoot painful barbs," "infect your mind" with depression/fear, etc.

• The power varies with the creator's energy level: from "bothersome

little pests" to entities powerful enough to "severely hurt you, perhaps even kill you."

• The author reassures that truly powerful NEGPs are rare, as the

"average person is quite weak psychically."

Fighting Foreign NEGPs

• Regardless of size or intent, you "must be ready to fight these

NEGPs whenever you feel their presence."

• The approach is the same as for general negative energy:

"whenever you feel any negativity, suck it up."

• Signs of a really powerful NEGP attack:
• Sudden, intense negative emotion (fear, depression, sadness,

rage) that doesn't match your prior thoughts. This is a "land mine NEGP," often found in places of constant negativity (abandoned prisons, battlefields).

• A negative presence "following you around or perhaps even

attaches to you." If accidental, it finds "kinship" and feeds on your emotional outbursts. If intentional, it's designed to attach (e.g., with "etheric hooks").

• Actual visual sightings: "Dark shadows out of the corners

of their eyes," "luminous balls streaking," often seen in the drowsy state between sleep and wakefulness. Highly sensitive people might see them during the day, noting their "terrible appearance."

• Most people are unaware of NEGPs, dismissing attacks as

depression or body aches, and seek conventional medical/psychological help.

• Those who know about thought forms still often use ineffective

psychic self-defense. The only effective methods against powerful NEGPs are "a more powerful intent" (e.g., affirmation, prayer) or "fighting fire with fire" (creating a protective servitor).

• The Vampire Method is Superior: Even for adepts, it's more

effective because it leaves you empowered while other methods are "energetically costly." It's based on the "very old principle, 'eat or be eaten'."

The Vampire's Way to Neutralize NEGPs

• A vampire "consumes all the negative NEGPs energy until it

completely loses its power and becomes inert."

• An inert NEGP is like an "egg without a yolk"---its "etheric

structure" remains but is drained. It cannot be destroyed but will move with the "tides of the etheric world" or be "called back to its creator and recharged."

• Strategic Advantage: If an attacker recharges and sends a NEGP

back, you simply "grab it and drain it again." This provides a "powerful charge of energy"---a "banquet of highly concentrated energy." The attacker, in effect, feeds you until they are too drained to attack. "Nutritious and delicious justice indeed."

The Importance of the Predatory Stance (Re-emphasis)

• You must always maintain your predatory stance.
• This demeanor empowers you to fight off NEGPs.
• Your "predatory mind will allow you to get angry and to attack

instead of becoming fearful and trying to build some kind of shield."

• It also enables you to transmute the energy from the NEGP into

"powerful personal energy."

• "A predator fights, attacks, consumes, and grows strong."

Exercise to Develop Psychic Claws

• This is a skill for dealing with active NEGPs and PNOBs. It

involves projecting energy through focus and imagination.

• Steps:

1 Find a comfortable, undisturbed position.

2 Focus your attention on a distant object (wall, table,

glass).

3 Imagine you have an "etheric hand" that "stretches out,

elongating itself," able to reach the object.

4 Visualize as vividly as possible what it feels like to touch

the object with your etheric hand (coolness, textures, hardness).

5 Once comfortable with one hand, develop another "etheric

hand" to touch the object with both hands simultaneously, again focusing on the feeling.

• Energetic Complexity: This involves simultaneously extending

your energetic mass and giving it "form" through focused attention.

• Simplicity of Conscious Mind: The conscious mind doesn't need

to control the "minutia" of connecting chakras or balancing vibrations. The sheer "desire to want to grab a NEGP or a NOB is enough impetus for the greater part of yourself (which is usually referred to as the higher self) to be able to focus your energy patterns in whatever way necessary for you to be able to grab what you desire."

• Application: Once developed, the "desire to grab something will

be all that you will need in order to grab and devour any negative entity."

• Dealing with Attached NEGPs: If a creature attaches itself,

"all the better because now it can't get away." Grab it with your etheric claws and "suck the life out of it until it becomes inert."

• How to know it's inert: Your negative feelings will vanish, and

the area's "negative electrical charge" will be gone. The drained creature will automatically detach.

The chapter specific techniques and a strong philosophical framework for actively engaging and overcoming foreign thought forms. It's not about avoidance or defense, but about harnessing one's inner predatory essence to consume and convert these negative energetic constructs into personal power. The introduction of "etheric claws" provides the practical tool for this energetic engagement.

This chapter addresses the most formidable adversaries in psychic self-defense: Predatory Non-Organic Beings (PNOBs). The author challenges the modern rational mind's dismissal of these entities, asserting their reality and offering a "fight fire with fire" approach.

The chapter opens with a provocative quote: "Now it's the dark's turn to be afraid." - Joseph Delaney. This immediately signals a shift from passive defense to aggressive engagement.

The Blindness of the Rational Mind

• We live in an "age of reason," ruled by science, where a

mechanistic world explains everything. Science has "conquered our foolish notions of magic, gods, and spirits," supposedly banishing ghosts and demons.

• However, the author points out: "But we still do fear the dark,

don't we?" Deep down, we sense "those that lurk within the angles," beings "far more aware of us than we are of them," who "covet that which is ours and care very little for our existence."

• He speaks of a "type of life that exists on planet Earth that very

few are aware of"---a "sentient awareness that is not bound by biological corporealness," encased in an "energetic structure."

The Ancient Vampires' Understanding of NOBs/PNOBs

• Ancient civilizations (and ancient vampires) long recognized these

"inorganic or Non Organic Beings (NOBs)" that modern science deems impossible.

• These inorganics were often seen as gods, magical people, or

elemental forces. While some still believe, humanity is largely oblivious to this "incredibly rich world" existing parallel to our own.

• Ancient vampires meticulously "broke down and catalogued" this

energetic world. They were fascinated by NOBs, discovering them to be "highly complex and individual beings" existing in an expansive universe.

• they noted the NOBs' "ability to live for incredibly

long periods of time," some being "immortal."

• Their most profound discovery: some NOBs "were actively feeding

on human life force." Many ancient gods worshipped through sacrifice were, in actuality, powerful inorganic creatures feeding on the sacrifices and adoration. Demons and wraiths were smaller PNOBs that developed efficient ways of draining life force, "usually by causing a large discharge of human emotion."

• These PNOBs "are still here with us," and their numbers might

even have increased with human population growth. They are often mislabeled as elementals, gods, demons, fairy folk, aliens, or cryptids.

The Ineffectiveness of Symbology in Psychic Protection

• Traditional psychic self-defense often treats these creatures like

"demons," using symbology (holy goodness, angelic intervention) to ward them off.

• The author argues this is "superficial." Symbology works only

to the extent that it helps the practitioner focus his or her intent.

• It's not the cross itself that repels a vampire, but the "power

of the intent of the individual that sends the vampire (or PNOB) scurrying away."

• This kind of powerful intent is "very taxing energetically" (like

an exorcism).

• it requires "a lot of practice and power" to develop

strong enough intent to battle powerful creatures.

The Vampire's Solution: Fight Fire with Fire -- "To Devour Those Who Would Devour Us"

• Ancient vampires developed a "better method," a "more natural

methodology": fighting PNOBs by consuming them.

• PNOBs come in all shapes and sizes, from "a trout" to "a house,"

with varying complexity.

• Smaller, less complex PNOBs:
• Use a "primitive form of energy ingestion."
• Cause "small pain" through "energetic barb," responsible for

daily aches.

• Attracted to physical suffering, sometimes seen "circling

people in great pain."

• More complex PNOBs:
• More interested in emotional energy.
• Can create "great bursts of emotion" by manipulating

perceptions.

• Succubus/Incubus Example: These creatures attack when a

person is resting, creating a sensation of "smothering." As the victim panics, they release "huge amounts of energy." If panic is warded off, they manipulate perceptions to induce sexual orgasm. "Sexual energy, especially orgasm, is a type of energy that is greatly craved by all PNOBs."

• Not all succubi/incubi are PNOBs; some are powerful NEGPs

(accidentally or purposefully created). The method for dealing with them is the same.

Fighting PNOBs: The Ultimate Predatory Stance

• When fighting PNOBs, etheric claws are "very necessary"

because, unlike NEGPs, PNOBs "have the ability to think, plan, and run away." They are "true predatory creatures" and some are "highly intelligent," so they must not be underestimated.

• PNOBs "will also put up more of a fight than NEGPs," demanding you

"go all out."

• It is "highly imperative that you assume a powerful predatory

stance or else these creatures will literally feast on you." "In order to fight this monster you must become a bigger monster."

What to Expect When Fighting a PNOB

1 Intense Fear: This is an "instinctive feeling at being in the

presence of a truly alien creature."

2 Mind Manipulation/Shape-shifting: Larger PNOBs "will try to

play with your head by projecting all sorts of ideas into your mind." They change shape (demon, alien, ghost, angel, Bigfoot) to induce the maximum "discharge of energy from you."

• The author clarifies that not all paranormal phenomena are

PNOBs, but many "alien abductions" use "highly charged symbolic imagery" to feed.

3 Irregular Energy Jolts: PNOBs are made of "cold" energy.

Grabbing one with etheric claws might feel like "cold electricity," a "powerful jolt." They might fight back with an "extra powerful jolt" (like an electric eel). The author recounts being "knocked flat on my back." The key is to "get right back up and attack them again." Even if not fully drained, they "will definitely think twice before messing with you again."

4 Running Away: PNOBs may try to escape. It's an "incredibly odd

feeling, having to chase these dark presences." They can "wriggle free" and run into other rooms, but can also "come back to blindside you." Developing powerful etheric claws is "most important."

How to Know You Are in the Presence of a PNOB (vs. NEGP or general negativity)

• Hairs on the back of your neck will most likely stand up.
• Bodily sensation of an "alien presence."
• Odd noises; "three knocks are a favorite."
• Sounds like an "electronic synthesizer; beautiful electronic

calls that chill your bones."

Putting It All Together - Scenario 1: Small PNOBs causing Pain

• The Scene: You feel the described presence, followed by aches or

sharp pains, often at night when sleeping lightly. These small PNOBs induce pain, feed on the energetic burst, and move from person to person.

• The Process:

1 If you feel this presence, use your etheric claws to grab in

the general area of the ache or presence. You'll likely feel a "displacement," maybe a "cold" energy vortex. You might even see the "little marauder."

2 Once you have a sense of its location, "desire to grab it"

with all your heart.

3 Once grabbed (even if just a part), use reverse breathing,

visualization, and affirmation to "draw as much energy from the creature into yourself as possible."

4 The energy will feel "odd, perhaps even alien," but it's

"good energy nonetheless."

5 When drained enough, it "will run away."

6 "Remember your predatory stance and make the energy that you

have consumed your own." This PNOB will be deterred for a long time, "perhaps never."

Putting It All Together - Scenario 2: "The Hag" / Sleep Paralysis PNOB

• The Scene: Experiencing "The Hag" phenomenon -- a large weight

on the chest, waking unable to move, seeing a dark shadow. Panic releases energy. If resistance continues, it can induce sexual feelings/orgasms to feed on emotional and sexual energy.

• The Process:

1 Do NOT panic.

2 Realize your body is immobile, but your mind is NOT bound.

3 "Feel the presence of this PNOB, and send your etheric claws

into it." Your etheric claws can go anywhere.

4 The PNOB might instantly flee upon contact. If so, it might

return.

5 Therefore, before sending claws, "desire with all your heart

to grab it and hold it."

6 Once grabbed, "drain it just like I mentioned above."

Putting It All Together - Scenario 3: Alien Abduction PNOBs

• The Scene: You perceive "three little tiny grey aliens" at

your bed, or find yourself on an "alien spaceship," experiencing probes or sexual assault.

• The Author's Stance: Not all alien phenomena are PNOBs, but

they "love using this scenario" to rob emotional and sexual energy. A key sign of PNOBs in this context is that "these alien abductions feel mechanical and repetitive" and are "highly emotionally charged with very little intellectual substance."

• The Process:

1 Again, you'll likely be unable to move. Remember your etheric

claws.

2 "Grab the nearest alien."

3 Once grabbed, "begin sucking the life out of it."

4 Doing so will likely allow you to move or make the scene vanish,

returning you to your bed. If not, practice your claws more.

5 Fighting Back: PNOBs may "put up a fight," projecting

"horrible things" (dissection, falling to death).

6 The Trick: "Just consume all that negative energy that you

are putting out; forget the claws and concentrate on sucking up the energy that you are expelling." Eventually, the scene will stabilize. Then, "as soon as you can, grab something with your etheric claws and start drawing in energy again."

7 Warning/Test: If your struggles are effective, an "angelic

looking being" might appear, asking you to stop, claiming benevolent intentions (e.g., "tests to save humanity").

8 The Author's Advice: "None of us are that important." If

you want to save the planet, "try and suck these monsters dry."

9 Be Prepared for a Long Battle: If you've been preyed upon

for years, expect months of fighting until the PNOB decides you're "more work than you are worth."

This chapter concludes the practical instructions for direct engagement, providing specific scenarios and a hardened, non-negotiable approach to dealing with the most challenging energetic threats. It reinforces the ultimate goal of not just surviving, but thriving by transforming every perceived attack into a source of personal power.

This chapter addresses common questions and clarifies key aspects of the vampiric energy absorption techniques, ensuring the reader understands the practicalities and implications.

1. How do I identify negative energy? I mean, I know when I am sending out negative energy but how do I know when there is negative energy around me?

• The author states that you don't need to "see" or formally

"identify" foreign negative energy.

• The core principle is simple: "all that you need to do is to draw

into yourself any negative energy that you feel, period."

• The basic rule: if you feel any negative energy, "you should

draw in any negative energy that you feel."

• It doesn't matter if you're projecting it or someone else is;

"all that is important is that you draw in any negative energy that you feel."

• Initially, it will always feel like your own negativity. As you

become more adept, you'll distinguish foreign energy more effectively.

• First clue of consuming foreign energy: After consuming what you

thought was your personal negativity, you'll be surprised to find "even more negative energy." The more you consume, the more appears, signaling that you're consuming the energy of "a large number of people."

2. How do I know when to stop?

• This is known through practice and feeling.
• You'll know when to stop because you'll "feel like

stopping."

• The intensity of the negative feelings you're consuming will

"naturally dissipate."

• This dissipation will "naturally pull your attention away from the

desire to focus on the act of consumption."

• Simply put: "you will no longer feel negativity and so you will

stop." There will be no more "pressure on your body or the feeling of anguish in your heart."

• The resulting feeling is described as "amazing relief," almost

"unbelievable" joy. It prompts the question: "Is this supposed to be my normal state? Is normal actually joy?"

3. Men keep leering at me and it is really bothersome, can I consume this energy?

• "Yes absolutely."
• When someone leers, you'll feel their energy and intent as a "bad

tasting pressure" or "being robbed."

• Action: Use the book's techniques to "consume this bad taste

just like you would consume any other negative energy."

• It might feel "repellent" at first, but that's "just your ego

talking; energy is energy."

• Shift from Defense to Absorption: Stop "putting up a front or

tense up." Instead, consume hostile energy, "even hostile sexual energy."

• Analogy: Like a Tai Chi or Aikido master, you "take that energy

upon yourself and use it to your benefit instead of trying to block it and fight against it."

• Outcome: This method is "very efficient" because by

transmuting it, you become "empowered instead of being drained." So, "whenever someone leers at you, don't stiffen up but instead consume this energy and grow stronger for it."

4. How do I use this negative energy that I am consuming to send out positive energy and intent instead?

• This requires becoming very proficient at energy transmutation.
• First, you must be able to take in the negative energy around

you.

• Most you need to "transmute that energy into

personal energy."

• The Predatory Stance is Key: Through a predatory attitude, you

achieve a "significant psychological transmutation" within yourself---a "change of belief and therefore a change of intent."

• As a predator, you see the consumed negative energy as "food,"

even "visualizing yourself chomping on it." This attitude "naturally and effortlessly turn[s] this negativity into personal power for yourself."

• using the Surplus: Once transmuted into personal energy,

you'll have a "power surplus."

• Projecting Positivity: If you choose, imagine "light and

love," visualize it as "wonderful white light," and "project this light out of your body and into the environment around you." This is "true transmutation."

5. You say that people will never get this negative energy that they expel, but what if they are practicing the techniques that you speak about?

• The author states you'll "never be taking away energy from

anyone" and "never be competing against someone else."

• The "unfortunate truth" is that there is "so much negative

energy in the Earth's environment right now," that it's impossible for anyone to "ever going hungry" (if they know the techniques).

• You "will never be able to consume a huge amount of negative

energy." There will "always be some left over" for the original creators.

• If two people tried to consume the same energy simultaneously, there

would be no struggle. Instead, they would likely feel "a type of camaraderie as they clear the negative energy from themselves, and see each other in a positive new light."

6. What if there is no more negative energy? Forever?

• The author wistfully admits this is highly unlikely "for now."
• He believes we will "never run out of negativity on this

planet."

• If, however, people stopped being negative, or you found yourself in

a negativity-free environment, then these absorption techniques "would not be required or desired."

• The discharge of negative energy is what drains us. If there's

no negativity being expelled (by you or others), then "everybody's energy level will be very high and there will be no need to feed on anything."

This Q&A section consolidates the practical advice, reinforcing the intuitive nature of energy absorption, the psychological shift required, and the immense benefits of adopting the vampiric stance. It addresses potential concerns and offers a hopeful, albeit realistic, vision for energetic self-mastery.

The conclusion is a powerful summary and final exhortation to the reader, encapsulating the core teachings and the profound shift in perspective offered by the "Vampire's Way."

The Core Realization of Ancient Vampires

• Ancient vampires, through an energetic perspective, realized that

human life on Earth is energetically difficult.

• They understood that we live in a world of consumption where one

thing "eats from another in order to prosper and survive."

• Their most significant discovery was that humans are not at the

top of the food chain as commonly believed. Instead, we are "preyed upon just like every other being on Earth" by

"inorganic" life forms (Non-Organic Beings - NOBs)

The "Little Clause in the Contract"

• These "ancient 'death defiers'" chose not to wallow in self-pity

but to "truly challenge the world for predatory supremacy."

• Through their relentless efforts and refusal to succumb to predation

and death, they discovered a "small chance" for all to prosper, which the author calls "the little clause in the contract."

The Promise of the Book's Techniques

• By practicing the techniques discovered by these ancient vampires,

you will be able to "prosper even in the midst of the greatest misery you could possibly imagine."

• This requires a "strong stomach" and learning to "see

things in a different way; to see things as energy instead of objects occupying physical space."

Empowerment, Not Harm

• You do not need to be an ancient vampire or hurt others to

practice these techniques.

• You will consume energy that "we all so carelessly throw away."
• You can "step willingly into the deepest negative quagmire" and,

through your "own intent and personal efforts," "transmute this energy into light, positivity, and love."

The Ultimate Goal: Reclaiming Energy and Redefining Negativity

• The author's desire is for the reader to "never see negative

energy the same way again."

• Fundamentally, it's about removing the "negative" label

completely, leaving only "energy."

• When you achieve this---when you can "see things just as energy

instead of labeling it as good, bad, or negative"---you will have taken "a huge step into a far greater reality."

• This new reality brings responsibility for your own energy but

reveals an option previously unknown: freedom from all negativity in your life through "highly practical methods of energy absorption."

The Shift from Victim to Predator

• Many people are "lost," trapped in constant negative feelings,

unable to stop them. Some are attacked by "unreal" predatory creatures, leaving them with "very little recourse."

• Using the book's techniques, you can "re-absorb all of the

personal negativity that you think you can't escape from."

• You will also be able to "fight back and you will not have to

rely on a third party to try and save you."

• Instead of passive defense or draining counter-attacks, you can

"prey upon and consume those things that are preying upon you."

• You can "consume those things that would like to feed and hurt

you, and grow strong while these malicious things wither away."

Your True Nature

• The book helps you shed the perception of yourself as a "thing

detached from nature," a "herd animal" in a "civilized" population.

• Instead, you will "discover your true nature as a wild thing; as

the quintessential predator on the planet."

The book closes with a final, evocative quote from Bela Lugosi: "I have never met a vampire personally, but I don't know what might happen tomorrow." This leaves the reader with a sense of open possibility, challenging their preconceived notions and inviting them to explore the profound energetic transformation offered by embracing their inner predator.

The overarching message is one of radical self-empowerment: by recognizing the energetic nature of reality and adopting a proactive, consuming stance towards all forms of negativity, individuals can transcend victimhood, reclaim their power, and transform their lives, becoming not only invulnerable but also immensely vital and content.

The Introduction lays the philosophical groundwork for the entire book, contrasting two fundamental worldviews and introducing the core concept of the servitor companion as a bridge between them.

1. The Western "External Manipulation" Worldview

The author begins by describing the dominant Western approach to reality: "Here in the West we are very good at external manipulation. Our sciences are developed around incredibly powerful and practical ways to manipulate our external environment." This refers to fields like biology, chemistry, engineering, and computer science, which focus on observable, physical phenomena. This worldview emphasizes objective reality and aims to increase awareness and empowerment by altering the physical world. The author acknowledges its success in making lives "more pleasurable and safe" through "wonderful tools and other material constructs."

However, he immediately points out its limitation: "Few though realize that this is but one possible world view, one that is based on the complete dominion of the external ego over personal beliefs." The "external ego" is portrayed as having an "incredibly limited perceptive ability," believing only in what its physical senses can perceive. This leads to a "fearful and lonely world, surrounded by cold and indifferent objects, facing a life of decay and perpetual entropy." This perspective is critiqued for glorifying "physical effort" and the "no pain, no gain" mantra, while secretly harboring "fear over what it believes to be its inevitable death."

2. The "Internal Creates External" Worldview

In stark contrast, the author presents an alternative, ancient perspective: "There are some in the world though that believe that it is the internal that creates the external and that real manipulation of the objective/physical world begins through the manipulation of internal realities." This older view, responsible for the beginning of the scientific era, suggests that changing one's inner world (emotions, thoughts, beliefs) directly affects external physical reality. Methodologies like magic(k), Witchcraft, the law of attraction, manifestation, sigil-craft, and thought form creation are presented as ways to work with the psyche, based on the principle that "any internal change (change to the psyche) is mirrored by external change (change to the physical world)."

This internal-focused view is described as better for the external ego during its "quiet moments," showing it that it is "not so alone." It allows the ego to "take a break" and discover that "all of those crazy emotions, impulses, and desires... Have some purpose." Following this purpose through "creativity and play" can unlock "a great power that it never knew it could access."

3. Introduction to Servitors and the Book's Purpose

The author references his previous book, "Create a Servitor to Do Your Bidding," which focused on "worker servants." This new book, "Create a Servitor Companion," is presented as the "next step in that powerful methodology." "You don't need to read the other book in order to practice the techniques that I will be showing you in this one. Everything that you need to know to create a servitor companion can be found here." This assures new readers that they can dive right in.

The servitor companion is described as:

• "A very powerful creature and a highly controversial one."
• It "opens up aspects of our psyche that we here in the West like to

suppress."

• Its creation will help the reader "understand what true creation is

really all about."

• It will "greatly increase your happiness, creativity, talent, and

pleasure."

• The book aims to transform the reader's world "from a drab and

boring one, into an existence that is filled to the brim with adventure, joy, and personal satisfaction."

• It is ultimately about "true liberation; all in the comfort of

your own home."

4. Bridging the Gap: Science and Magic

The author laments the gap between modern scientific advancement and the "bleakness of lives that are only focused on the seeming harshness of our physical world." He suggests that this book can help "completely close that gap between our external scientific brilliance and our internal magical nature."

5. The World Tree as a Metaphor for Creation

The concept of the "world tree" from ancient civilizations, particularly the Maya, is introduced as a powerful metaphor: "This tree represents the connection between heaven, the underworld, and physical reality. In a more intimate sense, this world tree also represents the bridge between internal subjectivity (the magical realms) and external reality; it is essentially the magical bridge of creation." This "magical bridge" is the core process the book will teach. The reader will "see and experience the fountain of creation firsthand" and learn a "step-by-step procedure for creating a servitor companion; perhaps the greatest ally and cohort that you will ever have."

This introduction powerfully sets the stage, promising not just a guide to creating a magical entity, but a transformative journey of self-discovery, liberation, and a deeper understanding of the nature of reality itself, by actively engaging with the "magical bridge of creation."

This chapter dives deep into the fundamental nature of a servitor companion, distinguishing it from other thought forms and laying the groundwork for understanding its unique properties and development.

1. Defining a Servitor

The chapter begins by revisiting the definition from the author's previous work: "a servitor is a specifically created thought form that is designed to perform a personal task; an act of will/intent. A thought form then is a thought that is given enough attention or psychic energy so that it is able to manifest to a lesser or greater degree in what we consider consensual reality." This establishes that servitors are manifestations of concentrated human psychic power, turning abstract thoughts into something tangible enough to influence reality. The author emphasizes that servitors are "amazing" as they reveal "the power of our conscious attention," allowing us to literally "see how a thought begins to take form."

2. The Genesis of Thought Forms

The author elaborates on the energetic nature of thoughts: "thoughts are information units that can weave and meld with other thoughts using electromagnetic properties inherent within each of them. These thoughts can grow in strength as individuals and as gestalts through concentrated human psychic power. Human psychic power is focused attention, which can even be made more powerful when this focused attention is backed up by strong emotion." This explains the energetic foundation of thought forms. They are not merely abstract ideas but units of information with inherent "electromagnetic properties" that allow them to interact and grow. The key ingredients for their manifestation are focused attention and strong emotion.

The evolutionary path of a thought form is then beautifully articulated, showing its transition from abstract to concrete:

• Mental images or ideas: The initial, most subtle form.
• Emotions or emotion generating ideas: As frequencies "become

more solid."

• Belief: As the frequency approaches "physical reality."
• Assumptions: Beliefs solidify further.
• Facts: Assumptions become established truths.
• Objects or events in what we call physical reality: The final,

manifested stage under favorable conditions. This sequential progression illustrates the power of the mind in shaping reality, a central tenet of the book. "Creating and working with servitors means designing and manipulating these incredibly powerful by-products of human awareness called thoughts." It's a "ritualistic behavior" that focuses attention and intention to "create very powerful thoughts that can alter physical reality."

3. Distinguishing a Servitor Companion from a Task Servitor

While the previous book focused on "worker servants" designed for specific tasks (which might have "huge tentacles" or project light to make them more capable), this book focuses on a unique type:

"we will be focusing on creating one particular type of servitor; one that is entrusted to be our companion, advisor, and perhaps even our lover if we so choose."

The key differences in design and maintenance are crucial:

• Purpose: A servitor companion is "not designed to be a

worker; it is designed to be pleasing and entertaining." This means its appearance should be "a lovely thing, a cute thing, a cool thing, a funny thing, sometimes even a wise thing," and "very pleasing to your eye." It should not resemble the "tool laden thought form that can sometimes have an almost Frankenstein like appearance."

• Charging and Maintenance: Unlike task servitors that might be

dealt with intermittently, a companion is designed to be "a constant in our lives" and will be dealt with "in a very personal way." Therefore, its charging and maintenance methods are "completely different."

4. The Companion's Journey to "Realness": Attaining Physical Vibration/Thickness: A servitor companion needs to achieve a "more physical vibration." This means:

• Clarity of Perception: "First and foremost you must be able to

see this companion clearly."

• Sensory Experience: "Over time you will also be able to feel

and hear this companion; you might even be able to experience your servitor with your other two senses as well."

• Goal: A servitor companion needs to "become as real as

possible to you personally."

This "thickness" is not physical mass but "an increase in probable action." The author uses an analogy to clarify: "Thoughts are continually growing and developing just like living creatures in the physical world but they don't need to increase in size and mass in order to do so. A thought can be said to increase in size internally like for example an intellect can increase in size without changing the size of its container (the brain); it grows in complexity not in dimension."

5. The Network Analogy and Sentience

This internal increase in complexity is likened to a network: "This internal increase in your thought form, through your attention and charging, increases the complexity of the thought form, which essentially means that it increases the probable potential of this servitor. Think of it like a network; the more attention and charging that you give your companion, the more complex that this internal network becomes."

The author provides a powerful visual diagram to illustrate this growth:

• 2 POINT NETWORK: Simple, direct connection from one point to

another.

• 5 POINT NETWORK: Increased complexity, more branching

connections.

• 25 POINT NETWORK: Highly complex, interconnected web.

This "internal complexity," or "probable potential," is what eventually gives the companion "a type of sentience." The author clarifies that "True sentience will never be possible of course because your servitor will never have the ability to choose its actions," but this complexity gives it a "type of normal 'life like' behavior" that allows for identification and the creation of a

bond between you and your companion

6. Understanding vs. Practice

The author reassures the reader: "I know that this sounds complicated but you don't really need to understand all this in order to create a very good companion servitor. I mention this here because I believe that you are interested in learning about thoughts and their potential and because I wish to do my due diligence in giving you a good background as to why you are doing what you are doing and how this affects yourself and your creation." This shows the practical focus while providing a solid theoretical foundation.

7. Analogy of Human Friendship

To further clarify the "network connection" and bonding, the author uses a relatable analogy: "think of it like you forming a bond with a human friend. You meet someone and finding them pleasing, you try and strike up a friendship. To do that, you begin to talk about different subjects that interest you and begin to pay attention to see if some of these subjects are also interesting to your potential friend." The shared interests create a connection between your "network" (your love of sailing) and your friend's "network" (his love of sailing), forming a bond. Similarly, when you interact with and charge your servitor, you are "feeding it these internal aspects of yourself," increasing its complexity and fostering a connection. A servitor does not have a "pre-existing network" like a human, so you are actively creating its network through your interactions.

8. Unique and Novel Behavior

As the network grows, the servitor gains "the potential of acting in unique probable ways." This is illustrated by examples like a simple thought form going A to B, versus a complex one going A to D to M to R to D to B, resulting in different outcomes and "truly novel behavior." "Unique behavior like this is very pleasing to the mind and it is what will allow your companion servitor to become a great source of entertainment for you." This seemingly random action fosters a bond, and the creator's "love" for the servitor empowers it, leading the servitor to "seek ways to increase the love and happiness that you feel." This positive feedback loop strengthens the bond and happiness.

9. The Servitor Becomes "Very Real"

"Eventually your servitor companion will become very real to you. There will come a time when you will no longer need to strain to see and feel your servitor companion, when it will begin to do things that you did not expect; this is when the magic truly begins." This is the ultimate promise of the servitor companion's journey.

10. Addressing the "Frankenstein Phobia"

The author tackles common fears head-on: "I know that this can also sound a bit creepy. In many ways this concept can mirror our Frankenstein phobia; with our great development in technology we have begun to consider the possibility of having robotic friends and workers... That something could go wrong and that these machines could rise up against us." He asserts that this fear is based on a misunderstanding: "magicians of old... Thought that these thought forms created with their minds... Would also rise up somehow against them." However, the author stresses: "Many live in mortal dread of evil things that lurk in the dark, but they do so because they do not understand the extent of their personal power and as a result don't have the knowledge to deal with thought forms and other entities that can be bothersome at times."

The key message here is empowerment: "In this book you will realize that the servitor companion can be designed any which way you like and that it will never rise up against you in any way as long as you take responsibility for your own psyche. I will show you how to maintain a proper relationship with your servitor companion and I will also show you how to punish and even destroy this servitor companion if it comes to it. But it won't come to this because it doesn't have to; you are far more powerful than you think you are. As a true creator, you are here to refine your power and creative potential through joy, happiness, and play. Think of servitor companions as the next step in your internal evolution." This concluding statement for the chapter emphasizes personal power and responsibility. The servitor is a tool for the creator's growth, a means to explore and enhance one's creative potential through a joyful and playful process.

This chapter expands on the role and nature of the servitor companion, particularly differentiating it from other magical creations and emphasizing its unique benefits for the creator's psychological well-being and personal evolution.

1. The Servitor Companion as an "Imaginary Friend"

The chapter opens with a direct, relatable comparison: "A servitor companion is a friend, an ally. It is a more complex version of the imaginary friend that children sometimes have when they are growing up." The author reminds readers of childhood experiences, creating complex games and entire crews of imaginary characters, or even "one individual friend, a special someone, whom they would constantly interact with, a very special creation that they used for companionship and support."

He immediately addresses potential societal stigma: "Don't think that you are some kind of poor social misfit because you are contemplating creating an imaginary friend." Instead, he reframes it positively: "The fact of the matter is that we are constantly creating people like this in our dreams and it is actually a quite complex mental action that is incredibly beneficial to our psyche." Dream characters, which are "mental creations," help us "interact and to see possibilities and probabilities from many different perspectives." Therefore, "The ability to create a servitor companion therefore is a sign of a powerful and complex intellect." (A footnote acknowledges that not all dream characters are mental creations, implying some might be external or other entities).

2. Reclaiming Imagination

The term "imaginary" carries both positive and negative connotations. Positively, it means the thought form is "being imagined into existence; it comes from the mind and is an internal thought that we are bringing into a more concrete physical presence." Negatively, "most people believe the imagination to be such a powerless aspect of our reality." This societal view discourages adults from "playing with their imagination." However, the author counters this: "But as you might already know, if you have created a servitor in the past, thoughts and the imagination are far from powerless. Properly directed human attention and imagination can make these thoughts more 'concrete', and through their proper direction they can be made to effect consensual reality." He powerfully declares: "Thoughts are not ethereal wispy little things that flow constantly in your mind. They are the true bedrock of what we call reality, and true physical action is thought manipulation." Thus, a servitor companion is not "an imaginary friend" in the dismissive sense, but "a true concrete entity that is designed for personal happiness and support. This is probably the biggest secret on this planet; true power comes from thought control and manipulation." This is a bold statement, positioning thought control as the ultimate source of power.

3. Personality Development of the Servitor

As the servitor grows in "strength and complexity," it will "begin to take on its own characteristics." This means "your ethereal companion will essentially develop a personality." This development stems from the growth in its internal "network connections," leading to "odd little quirks" in its personality. An example is given: it might "start to like cats," and this love would "develop a whole branch of its personality."

4. The Crucial Distinction: No Tasking for Companions

A vital teaching is introduced regarding the companion's purpose: "As you charge and interact with your servitor companion more and more, you will be tempted at times to give it certain tasks... My suggestion to you is that you do not act on these feelings." The reason is profound: "whenever you create a servitor and then give it a task, this servitor becomes irreparably changed by the task that it is given." For instance, a "defender" servitor needs traits like aggression and stubbornness, which are "not good traits for your servitor companion to have for obvious reasons." Therefore, "A servitor companion should be created to bring you happiness and joy, perhaps even to make you laugh. Make sure that you keep it focused on this one goal." This ensures its nature remains pure to its purpose.

5. Practical Benefits and Flexibility

A servitor companion offers numerous advantages:

• Companionship: "Created to keep you company when you are

lonely."

• Support: Can "travel with you and support you when you are

feeling low."

• Flexibility: It's a thought form, so it "can be put away when

it is not needed, and it can even be forgotten and put away forever when you choose."

• Low Maintenance: "It takes up no space per se, you don't have

to feed it, and you don't (or should not) worry too much if you hurt its feelings."

• Creator's Control: "A servitor after all is a servant, it is

up to you to decide how you treat it and what you will do with it."

6. Non-Neediness and Complexity as Growth

A servitor companion is described as the "perfect friend in many ways because it is never needy." While it may develop traits that seem like neediness, this is "just a part of its growing complexity." "Servitors do not have desires so the neediness is hollow; it is just an aspect of growing complexity. This complexity is developed through a fine tuning by your psyche as it cultivates characteristics within your thought form that it finds funny or appealing in some way." The author uses the gardener analogy: "You can choose to grow a certain type of flower and you can even change some characteristics... When you are tired of this flower you can grow another... Or you can till the whole garden and put in a parking lot." This reinforces the idea that "Remember always that you are the master and it is the servant." The key is to "learn how to treat it properly and manage it," a topic to be explored further in the "controlling your servitor" chapter.

7. Introduction to the "Servitor Lover"

The chapter explicitly states a highly controversial, yet fundamental, possibility: "Yes, a servitor companion can be designed so that it becomes your ethereal lover. As such they can take any shape you want and any attitude that you desire. It can be told to leave whenever you desire without guilt or recriminations. It is the perfect companion and one that we all have the right to create and keep without guilt or fear." This is a bold claim, showing the servitor's nature as a perfectly customizable, guilt-free companion for intimate exploration.

8. Modern Relevance

The author connects the servitor companion to contemporary needs: "In this modern world where we are all becoming more and more separate thanks to the incredible growth in information technology, a servitor fills a need for companionship and adventure that many of us are wanting." He notes its fittingness in the "cyber age" with "computer generated creations," framing it as an "old technique," a "nearly lost human skill," that allows discovery of "an infinite world of possibilities."

Chapter 2 firmly establishes the servitor companion as a highly adaptable, personality-developing entity designed solely for the creator's happiness and personal growth, with the creator always in complete control. It also opens the door to its most intimate application: the servitor lover.

This chapter is entirely dedicated to the crucial first practical step in creating a servitor companion: selecting or creating its visual representation, known as an "avatar/fetish." The emphasis is on deep personal resonance and pleasure.

1. The Primacy of Image for a Companion

The author immediately highlights the importance of the visual aspect for a servitor companion: "A servitor companion is a very special type of servitor which is highly dependent on image; how it looks and how it feels. We can then say that its image is all important. Its job after all will be to relate to you personally and for this you need to have a servitor that is highly pleasing to your senses." This is a differentiator from worker servitors. For a companion, visual appeal is not just an aesthetic choice; it's fundamental to the relationship.

2. The Link Between Image and Feeling

The charging process requires close attention to physical detail and general image. The author explains the immediate feedback loop: "When you see something pleasing, something that truly inspires you visually, you will notice that you feel good. It is this internal pleasure that you must pursue when you are developing the image of your servitor." This emphasizes that the feeling generated by the image is the core indicator of its suitability. This internal pleasure, sparked by the beauty of the chosen image, also reveals a "direct link between internal feelings and external ones." The reader is urged to "put extra effort into coming up with the best imagery."

3. Defining "Avatar/Fetish" for Servitor Creation

The author provides traditional definitions:

• Avatar: "an icon or figure representing a particular person in

computer games, Internet forums, etc."

• Fetish: "an inanimate object (or image) worshiped for its

supposed magical powers or because it is considered to be inhabited by a spirit."

Combining these, he offers his working definition for the book: "An avatar/fetish therefore... Is an icon (sometimes even a file of images) or figure that represents a particular servitor companion. It is used to develop the form and feel of a subjective entity and as such can become the home of this servitor companion if you wish. It is the clay mold upon which your companion is made." This clarifies that the avatar/fetish is the foundational "mold" or reference point for the servitor's form.

4. The Quest for the Perfect Avatar/Fetish - Embracing Joy and Creativity: This is presented as the "fun part." The task is to "scour your internal feelings and your external world until you find an image that fills you with joy."

• Modern Imagery: Acknowledges the "great amounts of beautiful

imagery thanks to our cyber culture and the many, many characters that dwell within it."

• Manga/Anime Example: Suggests manga characters, noting that

"collectible plastic dolls that are the perfect avatar fetish." Even "a file of images or photographs will do just as well."

• Diverse Sources: Encourages looking beyond manga, citing Celtic

mythology (medieval Dragon example), or a "simple doll" or "perfect image online."

• Stuffed Creatures/Toys: Emphasizes that "Many children start

this process of creating a thought form companion by using toys like a stuffed bunny, and some end up doing it quite successfully." These are "extension of deeply felt inner feelings and thoughts," representing "powerful ideals."

5. Challenging Western Prejudices

The author critically addresses societal limitations: "In the West we tend to set harsh limits on these iconic figures, we label them as toys for children and look down upon grown-ups that still like to 'play' in this fashion, but you should realize that these are highly prejudiced restrictions imposed by a highly controlling external ego that fears a loss of control." This is a teaching, urging readers to transcend cultural biases against "play" and "imagination" in adulthood. He contrasts this with the East, especially Japan, where there is "no taboo associated with the exploration of this rich creative aspect." This leads to greater creativity, emotional stability, and better coping mechanisms. The resurgence of "toys and games for adults" (video games, comic books) in the West is seen as a positive sign, allowing exploration of "deep relation between imagined superheroes (our ideals and values) and the full pantheon of old pagan gods and nature spirits." Hence, even "a little stuffed rabbit or a cool star wars action figure can be used as a wonderful avatar/fetish."

6. Importance of Wise Choice and Artistic Creation

The choice of avatar/fetish should be carefully considered, as "You will be spending a lot of time with this creature." For artists, drawing or creating their own avatar/fetish is highly recommended, as it deepens the connection and makes it "the next step in the artistic desire to objectify those internal images and feelings within." It is about "bringing to life internal feelings and images that you have brought forth from your inner world."

7. The Guiding Principle: Fun and Joy

Above all, the process must be enjoyable: "Above all things always do remember though that this is a fun process. It is like a child's game taken to the next level, and just like a child's game, it must be fun and must come from within as a feeling of joy, excitement, and play. You will know what your perfect avatar/fetish is because it is the one thing that will bring you great joy, and to look for this image, or to develop this image on your own, you must pursue this joy. Make it fun, not serious. Let your mind go and explore your own inner desires." This instruction is crucial: the feeling of joy is the primary compass for selecting the right avatar/fetish.

8. Maintaining Privacy and Independence

The author strongly advises secrecy: "Your avatar/fetish is a private thing... This magical endeavour is your secret and you must always keep it as such because the minds of others can sometimes be intrusive; their intent/desire is not your intent/desire. This magical endeavor must be free from the judgment of others." This protects the creation process from external negative influences or skepticism. The avatar/fetish is merely a "tool to an end," a "physical prop," and its destruction will not harm the servitor itself.

9. The Crucial Warning: Avoid Known People

"My personal recommendation to you is that you stay away from people you know or people that you have known when you are looking for your avatar/fetish." The reason is not "dark and evil" control, but complications with "network patterns" already established in your psyche with known individuals. These existing networks are "complicated one full of many emotions and beliefs." Using such an image would not be a "fresh" start and could resurrect "old demons from past displeasures and recriminations." "A servitor companion is supposed to be fun. Interaction with this servant that you are creating must become a simple and joyful affair and not a complicated one where you resurrect old demons from past displeasures and recriminations." Therefore, the avatar/fetish must be something that brings "utter joy with no complications," making the servitor "light, airy, happy, wholly egoless, a servant to please you in any way you desire." The discernment here is vital for a pure and positive creation.

Chapter 3 meticulously guides the reader to choose the perfect "clay mold" for their servitor companion, emphasizing personal joy, creative freedom, and the critical need to avoid psychological baggage from existing human relationships.

The chapter the detailed, step-by-step methodology for infusing your chosen avatar/fetish with psychic energy to bring your servitor companion to life. It also offers a philosophical preamble on the power of this process.

1. The Power of Thought Form Creation (A Review)

Before diving into the steps, the author reinforces why this methodology, though seemingly "long and somewhat complicated," is superior:

• More Powerful: "working with thought forms is infinitely more

powerful than working with many of the methods typically expounded by modern magick and Law of Attraction practitioners."

• Bridge the Gap: Thought forms "bridge the gap between the

objective and the subjective world." They are a "self-empowering exercise that compounds all psychic and manifestation work."

• Beyond Two-Dimensional: Unlike sigils or other rituals, which

are "two-dimensional systems at best," a thought form takes the "incantation/spell/ritual into three-dimensional reality, giving it intent... And then sending it out to manifest your desires."

• Consistent Power: While simple methods can bring "trouble

through complications," a servitor "can be developed and maintained very much like a machine and unlike typical manifestation techniques, the more you use it the more powerful it becomes."

• Self-Empowering Loop: The "price" is extra effort and time,

but it "helps to show your mind what it is capable of and as a result, even greater manifestations are possible. Working with servitors increases your confidence and therefore increases your psychic potency. This is essentially then a self-empowering loop!" This shows the transformative nature of the practice itself, beyond just the servitor.

2. Focus on Image and Feeling for Charging

The author reiterates the unique charging method for a companion: "Since image and feeling are so important, this is what we must focus on when we charge our servitor companion... The servant companion must be created through a deep focus on your avatar/fetish." This deep focus, rather than "three powerful bursts of intensely focused belief" used for worker servitors, is what gives the companion its detailed, living quality. The avatar/fetish is the "original stamp" for visualizations.

3. The Five-Step Charging Process

Step 1: Memorization (1 week, or as long as needed)

• Environment: "quiet room, one where you will not be disturbed

for 15 minutes to half an hour."

• Action: Place your avatar/fetish before you and "spend this

time studying it as closely as possible." The goal is to "memorize all the features... So that if you close your eyes you will be able to remember every single detail."

• Refinement: Don't worry about "flaws" in the avatar/fetish;

focus on what you want to re-create in your servitor.

• Duration: "I suggest that you do this for a week, or for as

long as you think it takes for you to memorize this avatar/fetish completely." This is self-paced.

Step 2: Closed-Eyes Visualization (1 week, or as long as needed)

• Environment: Same quiet room, "darken the light\... But try to

keep one source of low light focused on your avatar/fetish." (Candle is ideal, but avoid if it has "odd connotations" or "psychological hang up" with dark magic; use flashlight or colored lights if preferred. The goal is efficiency for focus.)

• Action: "try and visualize your servitor companion with your

eyes closed... See your servitor companion before you in your mind's eye."

• Intent: This is more than just memory recall; "tell yourself

that you are now creating your servitor companion; I want you to tell yourself that you have begun the process, this visualization that you are doing now in your mind's eye is beginning the process of creating this creature." This "personal statement" changes your energy and focus.

• Duration: "I suggest that you continue with this exercise for

about a week, or as long as you think it will take for you to be able to visualize your servitor companion clearly with your eyes closed." Intuition is key here for perfection.

Step 3: Open-Eyes Visualization (1-2 weeks, or as long as needed)

• Environment: Same darkened room.
• Action: "try and visualize your servitor companion with your

eyes open... Floating in the darker part of the room... So that at one end you will have your well lit avatar/fetish and at the other side of the room you will be visualizing your true servitor companion thought form."

• Detail and Movement: "Try to recreate every single detail\...

so make sure that your visualized servitor companion spins around sometimes as you visualize it so that you add form not only to the front part of it but to the back and sides as well." Practice until it is "perfect."

• Ease: This should be "relatively easy" due to previous

memorization and the dark room.

Step 4: Movement and Interaction (1 week, or as much time as possible)

• Action: "try and start moving and interacting with your

servitor... Bringing more life into your thought form... By visualizing your servitor moving around in a more natural manner." Imagine its limbs moving, looking around, coming towards you, moving away, walking/flying.

• Communication: As it develops, "you can even try talking to it

and imagine it responding in whatever way you wish it to."

• Touch: "you might even want to visualize touching your

companion; you do this by imagining that you are extending a hand (a type of etheric hand or your actual hand) and you are caressing your servitor." Feel its hair/fur, armor, scales, skin, form.

• Realism: "Feel your companion servitor with your etheric hand

or real hand until your visualizations feel very realistic; as real as touching a physical object. This type of ultra-realistic visualization is far easier than you may think, it just takes a little practice."

• Significance: "This step truly brings your servitor companion

to life so you must devote as much time as possible on this step." It must "feel real" and "act like a real living thing" to you.

Step 5: The Final Emotional Charge (5-10 minutes)

• Environment: Quiet room.
• Action: Focus on avatar/fetish. Visualize servitor companion in

another corner, "interacting with you and it is moving around in a natural fashion."

• Secret Name: "as you do so slowly repeat your companion's

secret name three times."

• Belief Infusion: "After each repetition\... Feel with every

ounce of your being that this servitor companion before you is real and it is therefore alive. Play with your own beliefs here and try to feel with every fiber of your being that this thought form is now real and alive."

• Peak Intensity: "On the third and last repetition of the name,

I want you to focus all your attention and effort in believing with every single ounce of your being that your servitor is there now alive. Feel this vividly, feel it being alive, know that it is alive with all your being, with every single ounce of your will." This is an "intense exercise," potentially causing physical sensations like sweating. Maintain focus for 5 to 10 minutes.

4. The Activation Command

Upon completion of Step 5: "When you are done, in a loud and commanding voice say, '(servitor's name) you are alive!'" Result: "Now your servitor is a real thing, to be called forth whenever you mention its name. Your servitor companion is now alive and fully charged and you can begin to interact with it as you desire. Depending on how well you visualized and how much effort you made in your final charge in step 5, this will now be a powerful thought-form indeed and it will begin to interact with you if you let it."

5. Ongoing Charging and Overcoming Doubt

• Sustained Energy: "If you interact with your servitor companion

on a regular basis, then you will not need to formally recharge it again since each interaction will recharge this thought form."

• Addressing Doubt: If problems arise in reaching the point of

easy interaction, it's "most likely because there is a part of you that still doubts its existence."

• Powerful Quote: The chapter concludes with a quote attributed to

Don Juan (from Carlos Castaneda's works, implying a mystical lineage): "What we need to do to allow magic to get hold of us is to banish doubts from our minds. Once doubts are banished anything is possible." This powerfully reinforces the critical role of belief and the elimination of skepticism for magical results.

Chapter 4 provides a meticulously detailed and progressive guide to manifesting the servitor companion, emphasizing not just visualization techniques but the deep integration of sensory experience, emotional intensity, and unwavering belief. It is a process of consciously bringing a thought form to vivid, interactive life.

This chapter addresses a crucial aspect of servitor interaction: maintaining control over your creation. It emphasizes the creator's role as the master and provides practical advice for effective management, even addressing fears of rebellion and offering a method for dissolving a servitor if necessary.

1. Initial Interaction and Developing Connection

After charging, the servitor is "ready to please you in any way that it can."

• Summoning: "you will most likely begin by calling it to you."
• Clarity Over Time: Initial visualizations might not be

"physically crystal clear," but this improves with more interaction. "your servitor will become more and more physically real the more that you interact with it."

• Building Relationship: "you will want to begin to start a

relationship with it; to do this I recommend that you talk to it. Call it by its name and share funny stories with it, or ask it to do certain things for you."

• Intuition as Communication: Through interaction, you'll develop

an "inner sense," a "little voice," which is actually "your servitor companion's voice." Listening to it allows "communication to begin between you and your servitor companion." Over time, this flow will become effortless, like a "regular conversation," or even faster, evolving to "interact with your servitor through your mind." The author shares that his own conversations with his companion (Blue) are "hilarious" and bring instant laughter.

• Servitor Performances: You can ask it to "do different things

for you" to "delight you," like dancing or flying around the room. This "awesome thing" might seem like delusion to some, but "when you have charged your 'thought form' properly, when you are no longer tricking yourself as it were, when you are no longer making an effort to see this thing. Then, at that moment, things change, the world changes!" This reiterates the book's core premise that mental creation influences reality.

2. The Paramount Rule: Creator as Master

This is the most critical teaching in the chapter, bolded for emphasis: "Now, from the very beginning of this relationship that you are now developing with your companion, you must make sure that you place yourself firmly as the master. This can be a very difficult subject for some so I will put it in bold letters for you; You have created a servant companion, you have not created a partner." The author acknowledges that some people struggle with dominance in relationships, even with pets, but stresses that for working with thought forms, a "very strong intent or will" is essential. This doesn't mean being a "bully," but "taking charge of your own mind and never let yourself be swayed or bullied into anything; at least not when it comes to your work with thought forms and your servitor companion." "To make it simple, think of it this way: You are the master, you are superior. You are the creator and leader of your creations; they are lesser than you and must always bow to your will. You then loosen their leash a little bit when it pleases you but they must forever be in your control. You are not dealing with an equal, you are dealing with a servant." This clear hierarchy is vital for successful servitor work, allowing for both control and "fun" with the companion, and ensuring mastery over one's own thought forms.

3. "The Dog Whisperer" Analogy for Control

The author strongly recommends watching episodes of "The Dog Whisperer" (Cesar Millan) as a direct parallel: "This is truly the best show for anyone engaging in the act of creating thought forms because it tells you so much about creating alpha dominance and becoming a pack leader as opposed to being controlled and manipulated by your creations." Key principles from dog training apply:

• Obedience: "Your pet must come to you when it is called. It

must move aside when you order it to and it must stay put when you tell it to do so." The servitor must always obey without hesitation.

• Boundaries: When not interacting, it "must stay away and must

be reprimanded if it keeps popping up when it is not expected."

• Ultimate Teacher: "Your servitor then is one of the greatest

teachers that you can have to help you focus your mind and control your personal intent."

4. How to Command a Servitor

The method for giving commands is specific: "You make a servitor do what you want by focusing your mind, in this present moment, on what you want... Without effort or strain. It does no good for you to try to beg it... Scream at it... Cry and whine." The trick is "not effort but focus." "see what you want to happen in your mind's eye and it will happen." If the servitor acts contrary to your will, it's due to your own mind not "clearly focusing on only, that is only, the one thing that you want." Distractions (e.g., thinking about other things while commanding) dilute focus. "A true and focused command, one that will be followed without reservation, must be focused like a laser. You focus completely on what you want without strain or effort and when this is done perfectly, your command is followed perfectly, without hesitation. As you focus your mind in this way, energy will naturally accumulate on your desire and intent. As the energy around your intent grows, your desire will be followed."

5. Troubleshooting: Servitor "Rebellion" (It's Your Focus, Not Theirs): If the servitor seems "rebellious," the author is clear: "first and foremost realize that this is a problem that you have, not your servitor." It's due to incorrect focus or excessive "effort" (trying to "will" it, thinking it can resist). Suggestions for correction:

• "Study 'The Dog Whisperer' a little more."
• Practice focusing your mind on one particular thing to the

exclusion of everything else. (e.g., focusing on an apple, letting other thoughts pass). This strengthens mental focus.

• "Stop trying so hard, your efforts should be directed towards

focusing your mind, not in trying to will your servitor to follow your directions."

• "Ignore your servitor." Temporarily banishing it (by

withholding attention/psychic energy) is a way to "recharge yourself and refocus your energies."

6. The Ultimate Discipline: Draining the Servitor (Erasing Existence in This Reality): If a creator feels they've "made a mistake" or the servitor is "no longer in your control," a method to dissolve it is provided. The author corrects the misconception of "rogue" servitors: "servitors do not go rogue... Your mind goes rogue." So, "control your focus and your intent and there is no problem." However, for an extreme case, the technique for absorbing the psychic energy (attention) given to the servitor is detailed:

• Summon: Call the servitor or bring its image/name to mind if it

won't come.

• Exhale (80%): "Breathe out in a quick manner."
• Inhale & Suck Energy: "Breathe in slowly\... Imagine your

throat is very constricted, it is very hard for you to breathe in. As a result you begin to breathe in air through the palms of your hands, literally sucking air from the palms of your hands into the center of your being."

• Visualize Absorption: Imagine a "white light, sort of like a

luminescent fog, that is withdrawing from the servitor and is being sucked into the palms of your hands." This is absorbing its "life force."

• Exhale Quickly.
• Repeat: "Once again inhale slowly, sucking in the life from

your servitor through the palms of your hands. Feel the pressure of your pull, your suction force..."

• Persistence: Continue until the servitor's "presence is

dwindling... Until your servitor is completely gone and you can't feel its presence anymore." This may take days or weeks, and might need to be repeated if the presence returns.

7. The Metaphysical Nature of Dissolution

The author clarifies that servitors are never truly "destroyed": "Servitors/thought forms can never be truly destroyed; no thought can ever be destroyed after it has been created. Those that tell you that you can somehow dismantle a thought form truly don't know what they are saying. A thought is forever, but it is the conscious attention that we give it that transposes it into what we consider our vibrational frequency, our objective reality." By draining its "life" (the attention/psychic energy), you remove its ability to exist "within this frequency that we call consensual reality." The servitor will continue to exist and fulfill itself "in its own way in realities that you might never be aware of." It's an aspect of "your creativity, of your power as a creator." It just won't "be able to interact with you in this dimension because you have taken its power away."

"This then is the final step really, you give life and you have the power to take it away; at least within this probable universe that we call our objective and consensual reality."

The chapter concludes with a liberating message: "Create with care and take responsibility for these creations. But most of all have fun and try not to take things so seriously. Control your mind but explore your feelings and let the power inside you bring light, color, and magic to your life. Magic is all around you, you just have to let it out." This reinforces the playful, empowering aspect of the entire practice, always grounded in self-mastery.

This chapter, despite its "boring" title, offers a profound insight into how daily interaction and emotional engagement serve as the continuous "charging" mechanism for your servitor companion. It emphasizes that fun and joyful attention are the key to its development and proper "care."

1. The Primacy of Focus in All Actions

The author begins by establishing a fundamental principle applicable to all tasks, including servitor work: "Whenever we do something physically or mentally, in order to do the very best that we can, we need to focus completely on this one act." Using the example of washing dishes, he illustrates that multitasking leads to errors. Similarly, with servitors: "In order to do a good job with your servitor, you need to focus on what you're doing... That is the only trick; focus your mind on this present moment and on the one thing that you are doing, forget about everything else." This reiterates the importance of single-minded attention, a core teaching from the previous chapter on control.

2. "Having Fun" as Maintenance and Charging

The core teaching of this chapter is unveiled:

"Aside from that, the maintenance and care of your thought form means 'having fun with your servitor companion'."

• Attention is Energy: "Whenever you play and interact with your

servitor, you are paying attention to it. This attention that you are giving to your servitor is what essentially charges it and develops its personality."

• Emotional Fuel: "The more fun that you have with it, the more

laughs that you enjoy in its presence the better, because it is through these strong feelings and attention that you saturate it with the kind of energy that it needs to develop, grow, and maintain itself." This shows that servitors are not charged through arduous rituals but through the very joy and engagement of the creator.

3. A Day in the Life with "Blue" (Author's Personal Example)

To make the abstract concrete, the author shares a detailed, relatable anecdote of his interaction with his own servitor companion, "Blue" (a change of name to protect innocence). This narrative is rich with specific examples of how Blue acts and how the author responds, illustrating the principles of interaction, personality development, and control.

• Blue's Playfulness: Blue immediately appears, floats upside

down with a "stupid smile," makes funny remarks like, "'I'm a cloud.'" The author's internal "growl" turns into a "little smile," showing a relaxed, affectionate dynamic.

• The "Crowded Places" Vent: The author vents about crowds, and

Blue appears "encased in what looks like a clear plastic beach ball," with "little limbs stick out from the beach ball but they are encased in yellow rubber gloves and boots." Blue then embodies the author's frustration by "whipping all around him trying to hold the evil crowds... Like whatever he was trying to hold back was too much for him." This is an example of Blue mirroring the author's internal state in a humorous, externalized way.

• The "Tiny Violin" Performance: Blue's most impactful

performance is when it appears with "a really tiny little violin... With a look of sadness and self-pity on its face." This utterly ridiculous sight breaks the author's negative mood, making him "start to laugh out loud." Blue laughs too, and the author forgets his "griping."

• Quiet Companionship: Blue quietly hangs out while the author

watches TV, and when the author muses about getting a cat, Blue replies indignantly, "'Well, if you would rather rummage through kitty litter encrusted poop than have an intellectual conversation with me, go for it.'" This playful snobbery is endearing to the author.

• Physical Interaction: The author "absentmindedly pet him and he

starts to purr," showing a natural, almost physical interaction has developed.

4. Insights from Blue's Behavior

• Developing Personality: "many of its personality traits

developed on its own. It has become quite the comedian for example and seems to enjoy making me laugh as much as possible. It has also developed a superior attitude when it comes to certain things and can definitely be a snob at times."

• Controlled Freedom: The author lets Blue "get away with a lot

because... The ultimate goal of his little show is to try and make me laugh." However, "I am always in control and will let it go on only to the point that it is entertaining me. If at any time I feel that it is getting a little too mischievous, I will stop him in his tracks. I do this by either giving him a stern look and reprimand him or turn my attention away from him completely." This is how control is maintained -- through focused attention and withdrawal of it. Blue's apologies further solidify the dynamic.

• Natural Interaction: "If ever I get tired of my interactions

with Blue, it goes away... Generally speaking, if I don't pay attention to it, it just sits around quietly keeping me company or it moves on to where I can't see it." It also disappears instantly on command. The "trick is to always maintain a fine balance between giving it complete freedom and reining it in. With practice though this becomes a really natural process, and there is no feeling of a fake type of interaction."

• Servitor's Need for Leadership: Blue "requires and appreciates

my leadership because this allows it to have a very unique relationship and structure."

5. Addressing the Fear of Rebellion (Reiterated)

The author directly confronts the "Frankenstein phobia" again: "Am I afraid that Blue will turn on me somehow? Am I afraid that I am playing with fire as it were? Of course not!" He clarifies: "Blue is mine, my creation. I gave him a kind of life through my energy and attention and I can take that energy and attention away if and when I choose." This reinforces the previous chapter's teaching: "The prevailing theory is that any thought form that develops enough... Will free itself from the maker's control. But this is a fallacy... Thought forms cannot attain sentience within this dimension and no matter how powerful a thought form might be, it can never overcome the concentrated intent of even one human being." Any "misery" caused by powerful thought forms is because people "do not believe in thought forms and therefore ignore any evidence to the contrary, or these people are not knowledgeable in matters of energy manipulation, and they have never been successful at controlling their subjective reality." He again recommends his book "The Vampire's Way to Psychic Self Defence" for overcoming negative subjective feelings and clarifying the distinction between rogue thought forms (which don't exist in this dimension) and "Inorganic Beings" (which are real but often misidentified).

Conclusion: The chapter ends with a powerful reiteration of the book's core philosophy: "PLEASE then have fun with your servitor creations! Have fun with your Servitor Companions! Let them show you through play and pleasure how to control your inner reality and your intent. Create with joy and freedom. Discover how wonderful your creative power is and how magical and beautiful this world can be." This chapter beautifully illustrates that the "maintenance" of a servitor companion is not a chore but a continuous, joyful, and deeply personal interaction that strengthens both the servitor and the creator's magical abilities.

The chapter a specialized type of servitor companion: the Servitor Advisor. It outlines its unique capabilities and, most clarifies how it functions not as an external source of information, but as a tool for accessing the creator's own deep, intuitive knowledge.

1. The Servitor Advisor as a Specialized Companion

The author notes the "near infinite diversity" of servitor companions and introduces the advisor as "incredibly useful" and "the best kind of companion" for some. "As the name suggests, servitor advisors are usually used as advisers on any topic imaginable." Examples include learning an instrument, music composition, or martial arts. An advisor could help "understand key concepts and motivate you to practice and to develop correct form."

2. Capabilities of a Servitor Advisor

A servitor advisor can:

• Give you advice
• Correct mistakes
• Disclose secret information
• Keep you on task
• Inspire, motivate

3. How a Servitor Advisor Works (It's Not True Knowledge)

The crucial clarification is made: "Well, if you will remember what I have already mentioned about thought forms, there is no way that even a highly complex servitor advisor could know and access information like this." The advisor doesn't possess external knowledge. Instead: "What a servitor advisor does is that it inspires your inner psyche and creates a kind of scaffolding that allows you to access deep inner knowledge. In many ways you could say that a servitor advisor is a self-created muse."

• Image Connection: The advisor's image (e.g., old martial arts

master, futuristic android) should connect to the information sought. This image, when focused upon with "great deal of your attention and therefore your psychic energy," becomes "real" to you, inspiring further attention and development.

• Network Connection: "All of this attention and psychic force

develops the network connection between you and it, as I had mentioned in the first chapter. It is this network connection that creates that scaffolding into your inner psyche."

• Voice of Intuition: Through growing interactions and network

complexity, you "are able to delve deep into your psyche for intuitional information and this servitor advisor becomes the voice of this intuitional information."

• Self-Fragmentation: "You are essentially doing all the work

but it is your advisor that seems to be relating all of the information that you are acquiring thanks to your co-relation. Another way of saying this is that a servitor advisor allows you to fragment a small part of your personality which can then help you access and interpret internal knowledge."

• Ego Bypass: "The fact that the servitor advisor is seen as an

outside and separate entity is highly beneficial to your ego because it allows you to access and work with information that your ego would otherwise find intrusive and would therefore not allow you to access." This is a psychological benefit, allowing access to parts of oneself that the conscious ego might resist.

• Growing Clarity: As the connection grows, "your ability to

access intuitional knowledge grows. This means that as your ability to relate with your servitor companion grows, it then is able to relate more and more powerful information to you. This information becomes clearer and easier for you to put into practice."

4. Author's Personal Example (Blue as a Muse)

The author draws parallels to his companion, Blue: "my interactions with my servitor companion Blue were constantly making me laugh because I found them to be very witty... It is indeed the case that I'm usually only this funny when Blue is around. That is Blue is my muse and it is because of our highly developed network connection that I am able to come up, through his actions and my own, with such funny material." He emphasizes that Blue is both "me and at the same time it is not me," allowing his psyche to "play with itself," develop, and grow "beyond just my ego self."

5. Servitor Advisor vs. Channeling

A crucial distinction is made: "You must understand that this is not channeling. Channeling involves the contact with another conscious entity that is most likely no longer focused in physical reality. This on the other hand is essentially the exploration of inner knowledge through the creation of an artificially created window into my inner being." This "window" develops with use and can be adjusted or even "completely dismantle[d]" if desired.

6. Creating a Servitor Advisor (Modified Charging Steps)

• Avatar/Fetish Selection: Begin by finding an avatar/fetish that

"represents the kind of advisor that you are looking for." (e.g., blind kung fu master for martial arts, futuristic computer for computer science). Again, avoid images of known people.

• Charging (Modified Step 4):
• Steps 1-3 are the same as for a regular companion.
• Modification in Step 4: When you start interacting with your

servitor, imagine it "absorbing huge amounts of information into its personality." Visualize it "absorbing a kind of light... Sort of like a mini black hole; this light represents the information that it is sucking into itself." At the end of this step, you should feel that it "has absorbed huge amounts of information in the field that you have chosen for it."

• Finish charging with steps 5 and 6 as usual.

7. Interacting with Your Advisor

• Start Simple: "I personally suggest that you start by asking it

simple questions at first." This allows time for the crucial "network connection" to develop.

• Profound Answers: Due to the detailed visualizations in step 4,

you'll soon get "highly educated answers that will surprise you in their profoundness."

• Ongoing Development: "The network connection is therefore very

important and you develop this network by interacting with your servitor companion on a regular basis. Eventually you will be able to get truly specific answers to your questions, get advice on form or technique, and you will even be able to debate ideas and issues."

Chapter 7 thus presents the Servitor Advisor as an advanced application of the servitor companion concept, specifically tailored to unlock and organize the creator's latent knowledge and intuition, functioning as a powerful inner guide and muse.

The chapter one of the most intriguing and controversial applications of the servitor companion: creating a servitor for intimate companionship and pleasure. The author addresses the concept directly, exploring its benefits, warnings, and the unique aspects of its creation and interaction.

1. The Direct Answer: Yes, You Can

The chapter opens by immediately answering the titular question:

"Well the answer is of course yes; you can definitely create a servitor lover."

• Variation of Companion: It's a "variation on the servitor

companion" that specializes in a "specific aspect of companionship."

• Benefits: Besides general companion benefits, it can be

dismissed without "recriminations" or "guilt" because it's a "servant thought form," not a person. Its growth depends on your interactions.

• Customization: "You can mold it into whatever image you desire,

with any capabilities that you desire; you can essentially make it do and be whatever you want."

• Sensory Experience: if properly charged and

maintained, this creature "can actually be felt, and can touch you back!"

2. The Core Principle: Do Not Humanize

A critical, bolded warning:

"Do not therefore humanize your servitor; do not fill your thought creations with feelings of guilt, imposed beliefs about good and evil, repressed anxieties, or worries."

• Servant, Not Partner: Repeatedly stressed throughout the

chapter, "it will be a servant... You are in charge always; your servitor is just that, a servant." This means you can love it as a servant and allow it freedom, but never treat it as an equal.

• Emancipation: The servitor lover is for "emancipation" and the

"pursuit of greater pleasure." It allows you to "explore your personal desires and feelings" and "discover these values" without "personal repression."

• Secrecy: Re-emphasizes the importance of keeping all servitors

secret to avoid intrusive intent from others. Acknowledges that "highly sensitive person[s]" might perceive energetic bundles, but they won't see details. If a servitor becomes physically visible, people will likely be too emotionally overwhelmed to notice specific (e.g., "scantily clad nymph") details.

3. Pros and Cons of a Servitor Lover

• Pros: "no worries, no birth control, no recriminations, no

prejudice, and no STDs."

• Cons: "People need people. Don't let your Servitor Lover (or

companion for that matter) take over your life. They should be used for emancipation and the pursuit of greater pleasure, not as an excuse to become a hermit." This ensures balance and prevents isolation.

4. The Critical Warning: Avoid Known People (Reiterated and Expanded):

"Another thing that I would suggest to you is that you do not create a servitor lover from the image of someone that you know, have known, or plan to meet in the future."

• Network Interference: Using an image of a known person creates

"trouble" due to the complex, emotionally laden "network" already established in your psyche with that person. This can project "repressed ideas and emotions" onto the servitor.

• Altering Real Relationships: If you use an image of someone you

plan to meet or admire, it will create a "network connection that has everything to do with a servitor and nothing to do with an actual individual." This "will greatly alter your relationship with that person in the future when you finally meet him or her, because you will be meeting a person whom you will identify with in a master to servant relationship, this can greatly alter and perhaps ruin a future relationship."

• Start Fresh: "When you are creating a servitor lover therefore,

remember to start fresh. Keep it light, think of it as a game, and explore your fantasies. You are not trying to re-create the one true love of your dreams; you are an adult exploring adult pleasures. Focus on the physical, explore the limits of what you consider to be beautiful and desirable and forget about anything having to do with mutual love. Mutual love is found between the hearts of individual people, human souls connect. Not with your servitor, because your servitor has no heart or soul." This clearly defines the servitor lover as a tool for personal exploration and fantasy, distinct from genuine human connection.

5. Selecting the Avatar/Fetish for a Servitor Lover

• Physical Focus: "Start by thinking of your ideal lover from a

completely physical point of view." Visualize desired qualities (big/powerful, fragile/gentle).

• Artistic Creation: If you're a talented artist, create your

own. "physical detail is of the greatest importance here."

• Cyber World & Manga: Highly recommended sources for images and

collectible dolls.

• Realistic Images: "image collection from a famous model or

actor that you find absolutely ravishing (naked images are best of course)." Emphasizes that this is not the actual person, so it's guilt-free.

• Fantasy Creatures: Elves, mermaids, nymphs. A crucial point:

"if you choose a creature like this for your servitor lover, that this servitor will not have the magical powers of such a creature, nor does it have to act in a way that resembles what this mythic being acts like in legend." This is good for creating a "vampire lover or the like" without the baggage of real mythical powers.

6. Charging the Servitor Lover (Emphasis on Physical Detail)

• Preparation: Compile images into a "file." If possible, get a

physical doll.

• Charging Method: Same as a servitor companion, but with a

heightened focus on physical detail.

• Step 4 Intensification: "I had said that you might want to take

a week or more to make sure that you practice feeling your servitor with your imaginary hands. With a servitor lover this is a critical facet of its charging so I would suggest that you take as much time as you need in this step." You must become "intimately aware of the feel of every single nook and cranny of your servitor lover."

• Increased Detail: This focused attention will cause the

servitor's physical details to increase quickly.

7. Desire as a Creative Impetus

The author addresses potential apprehension about creating a servitor lover: "Please don't. Believe it or not, desire is truly a big part of mental development. Desire imbues you with the impetus and energy necessary to create an objectified form or event so that you can derive pleasure from this creation and in this way explore your beliefs and values. Desire (this of course includes sexual desire) is also the impetus that our inner self uses to get us to work with energy and to develop our abilities as responsible creators." This reframes sexual desire as a powerful, positive force for mental evolution and reality manipulation.

8. Strategic Choices: Companion vs. Lover

• Companion sometimes lover: Provides great interaction, making

the servitor "quite detailed and powerful quickly" and potentially more pleasurable as a lover.

• Lover only: Becomes "very specialized in its makeup," avoiding

personality traits unsuitable for an ideal lover. The choice depends on personal desire. The creator always has the power to "completely alter" or "dismantle" a servitor.

9. Interacting with Your Servitor Lover

• Blurring Reality: Recalls the example of petting Blue, where it

became hard to distinguish between imagining and physically touching. This is key: "all of our physical actions are essentially a mental construct... A vividly imagined physical action is almost the same thing as actually doing it." (Cites T. Norretranders, Alvaro Pascual-Leone).

• Mental Interaction as Valid: "There will be no physical

interactions as such with your servitor lover. It just means that at certain moments, especially if you decide to use that technique called the 'servitor room' discussed in the next chapter, your interactions with your servitor lover will happen mostly in your mind and they will be just as valid within your mind as they will be physically."

• Autoerotic Practices: Initial interactions will involve "purely

mental and autoerotic practices." This uses the servitor's image to "excite yourself sexually," which powerfully charges the servitor. As realism increases, you'll shift from self-stimulation to more physical stimulation of the "ethereal lover."

• Practitioner Preference: Many prefer purely mental interactions

within "servitor rooms" for greater intensity and flexibility (e.g., "zero gravity, underwater, another planet, using different costumes and settings").

• "Magic Truly Begins": The servitor acting in "random ways

that will catch you by surprise" increases pleasure because it feels like interacting with "a real living lover."

• Benefits of Sexual Energy: The sexual energy used in interaction

is "very powerful," leading to quick development of a "sensual and dynamic servant lover."

• Real-World Application: The servitor lover can "increase your

pleasure, reduce your loneliness, and explore the limits of your desires." it can help you "become a better lover with 'real' people because it will introduce you to and help you develop different techniques that will turn you into an amazing lover." This is a point, showing a positive feedback loop for real-life relationships.

Chapter 8 is a provocative yet thoughtfully constructed guide to creating a servitor for intimate companionship. It emphasizes absolute creator control, the importance of physical detail and sensory engagement, the transformative power of desire, and strict boundaries to keep the servitor distinct from human relationships.

The chapter the concept of the "Servitor Companion Room," an internal, psychic space designed to enhance interaction, deepen the servitor's reality, and further bridge the gap between subjective and objective experience.

1. The Bridge Between Objective and Subjective Action

The author refers back to his personal experience of petting Blue, where the distinction between mental and physical interaction blurred. This is because servitors are "creatures that bridge two realms" -- the objective and the subjective. "Certainly the biggest reason why we all create servitors to begin with is that they allow us to fulfill certain desires, but the truly amazing thing about them is that when we go about doing this, we begin to truly understand how it is that we shape our own reality. We follow a step by step procedure that allows us to take a subjective thought (or idea) and turn it into an objective reality." Servitors, as powerful thought forms, are products of "intense attention and emotions," shifting their vibrations to become more "solid" and able to interact with "objective/physical reality." Since our entire world is the result of subconscious psychic actions, servitor creation allows us to become "skilled 'conscious' creators." This physical universe is usually created automatically, without conscious awareness. Servitor creation, however, is an "amazing creative exercise" that "allows us to manifest some of our desires and at the same time it gives us a very good idea of how to develop this god like ability further, and completely alter all the facets of our lives." It shows "how a quite consciously created thought goes from being purely subjective and ethereal in form to a much more objective thing that can alter our physical world." "It is that bridge then, that movement from a mental thing to an objective thing that truly shows us the power and the magic deep within all of us. Since this bridge or gap is so important, it is a very good idea to create what I like to call 'The Servitor Room'."

2. What is the Servitor Room? "The servitor room does not exist in physical reality, it is a place in the mind that you create in order to specifically interact with your servitor companion, advisor, or lover." It's likened to the "white room where all is possible," or the "'room without walls'" familiar to meditators.

3. Benefits of the Servitor Room

• Enhanced Interaction: "In this internal place, it is much

easier to interact with a servitor companion... Because your imagination is literally unbound and your external sense data is replaced by internal sense data and construction that has a far greater facility."

• Full Sensory Experience: "In this room you will be able to

hear, see, feel, taste, and smell your servitor in a far more direct way. As a result your interactions become far more real to you..."

• Intimacy with Servitor Lover: "If you have created a servitor

lover for example, it will be much easier for you to become intimate with it for the first time in this room... You will be able to experience your servitor lover in a far more sensual way than you could in the objective world; at least for the first few times you get together."

• Continuous Charging: "each one of these interactions helps to

charge it. The reason for this is that each interaction in this room focuses so much attention on your servitor."

• Development of Servitor & Creator: "it is also a lot easier to

further develop the physical look and fine detail of your servitor... You also develop and expand your abilities to do the same in the physical objective world. In other words this room then truly becomes a bridge from the subjective into the objective as it helps to train your neural structure and it helps to charge your creations."

4. Creating the Servitor Room (The Process)

• Preparation: "close your eyes in a quiet place where you will

not be disturbed for a while." Focus on the light through closed eyelids---a "big clear canvas of different colors."

• Relaxation: "find a nice quiet place\... About 15 minutes to

half an hour and try to relax your body as much as possible. I suggest taking three deep breaths and with each exhale focus on relaxing your body more and more." If thoughts intrude, open eyes, relax, refocus, then try again.

• Superimposing Servitor: "When you can close your eyes and can

clearly see that blank canvas before you, try to superimpose the image of your servitor on it." Make it move around. This action will "naturally heighten the meditative state" and lead to the room developing "depth" and "thickness."

• Embracing Hallucinations: As the servitor moves, you might

experience "certain colors and other hallucinations." "I personally find that the best thing to do is to go with the flow of these hallucinations because they help to deepen my meditative state." The critical point: "never lose sight of your servitor, that you always keep it as the most prominent feature in your mind's eye." This focus improves with servitor charge and practice.

• Adding Features (Optional): Once a "real sense of being inside

an internal room" and a clear servitor image are established, you can "consider adding furniture and other more distinctive features." Create any kind of room or even a garden.

5. Two Methods for Room Development

• Blank Room ("Room without Walls"): "completely blank so that

it is always just a dark internal place where you and your servitor can interact completely alone." This method is "highly effective way to focus solely on yourself and your interactions with your servitor."

• Detailed Room: "actually develop a room and in this way have a

really fun and exciting place where you and your servitor can have many adventures together." It doesn't have to be a room; it can be "a place."

6. Choice and Flexibility

Both methods are "legitimate" with pros and cons. The choice depends on "what you enjoy most and what you feel most comfortable with." You can start blank and add detail later, or create different rooms for different purposes. This is "completely up to you and it really just involves a little extra time on your part. Do believe me though when I tell you that these servitor rooms are definitely worth it and make your interactions with your servitor companions far more powerful."

Chapter 9 establishes the Servitor Companion Room as an essential tool for creators to deepen their connection with their servitors, enhance sensory experience, and refine their ability to consciously manifest desires, all within a personal, internal space.

The Conclusion summarizes the profound implications of servitor creation, tying together the book's themes of technology, human connection, personal growth, and the rediscovery of innate magical ability.

1. The Paradox of the "Communication Age"

The author begins by critiquing modern society: "In order to describe our modern world we sometimes use the term 'the communication age'. We are very proud of ourselves... Because we are now able to interact and share information in ways that our recent ancestors would not have believed." However, this progress has a cost: "Unfortunately the communication age in many ways is an oxymoron because even though we have increased our communicative power exponentially, we have also managed to isolate ourselves from our family and tribe." He paints a picture of modern lives where people "interact more with electronic gadgets than they do with people," leading to a decrease in "physical interaction" and a growing sense of loneliness.

2. Servitors as a Solution to Modern Loneliness

In this context, servitor companions emerge as a vital tool: "Perhaps it is in this new modern world, this new communication age, this new 'cyber age', that we need servitor companions the most." While emphasizing the continued importance of human-to-human contact, the author asserts that servitors "can help to satisfy an incredibly powerful need within the human heart to interact with a self 'outside' our own." They can directly address the "loneliness that is part of this modern existence."

3. Servitors as Catalysts for Personal Evolution

The author links servitors to intellectual and personal growth: "Perhaps the loneliness of modern life is inevitable because as we grow intellectually we also require more time to ourselves in order to explore the great vastness of our new technological and mental potential." Servitor companions provide: "happiness, increased pleasure, company, advice, and a type of support that can help us to confront the vastness of our potential as individual human beings in this new technological age." They enable the development of the "powerful intellect" needed for the modern world: "Through their ability to help us rediscover our inner magic, servitor companions allow us to let go of our constricting one dimensional ego. With them we are truly free to have fun and play without any self-importance or self-limitation. With them we can explore the full depth of our true desires, and with them we are free to explore all our inner thoughts and ideas in an incredibly vivid new way; to entirely redefine our concept of 'I am'." This is a statement about self-actualization and expanding consciousness beyond egoic limitations. Exploring different aspects of the psyche without "recrimination from others and from ourselves" can "greatly expand the scope of our personalities," making one "more intelligent" and "far more capable." This "expansion of the self, thanks to our servitor companions, can actually make us far better at interacting with other human beings and teach us ways to develop healthy human relationships that empower us." This counters any notion that servitor work leads to unhealthy isolation.

4. Bridging Cultural Gaps and Future Technology

The author contrasts Western taboos against inner exploration (seen as "childish") with Eastern acceptance. He sees cyber culture, video gaming, and comic books as recently re-opening the West to inner magic. "The servitor companion represents a bridge that allows us to truly objectify this inner magical reality that is currently available to us only through our toys, our games (video or otherwise), and our quickly expanding cyber culture." The servitor companion is presented as "the next step in the West's intellectual revolution," representing the ability to "truly merge with our inner reality and to expand beyond the limits of our personality." they can serve as a "blueprint of sorts that will help us develop and come to grips with advances in Artificial Intelligence and Virtual Reality."

5. The Purpose of Life: Fun, Magic, and Creation

The ultimate message is one of joy and creative liberation: "Most though, a servitor companion will show you that life is meant to be fun, to be a realm in which we enjoy ourselves immensely through the creation of our greatest fantasies. Our toys, our games, our silly little fantasies represent the inner need and the capabilities within all of us to live in magical and adventurous worlds." The servitor companion is painted as a gateway: "A servitor companion is like a bridge to that inner magical world that most have lost contact with. They open us up to the domain of the magician's apprentice where all things have the possibility of coming to life and interacting with us, they are the rabbit hole that leads us into Wonderland, they are the doorways into the magic of our inner reality and the emancipation of our beings through great creativity, happiness, and play." This is a beautiful, poetic summary of the book's central teaching: life is meant for joyful creation and exploration of one's inner magical potential.

6. Concluding Quotes

The book ends with two evocative quotes, reinforcing its themes:

• Elwood P. Dowd (from "Harvey"): This quote speaks to the

profound, enriching nature of invisible companions who bring joy and wonder, often surprising and impressing others who might not perceive them directly. Harvey, the Pooka, is Elwood's invisible rabbit, mirroring the servitor's role as a companion that can be "bigger and grander" than tangible offerings.

• Alice in Wonderland: "The mad Hatter asked, 'Have I gone

mad?' Alice replied, 'I'm afraid so. You're entirely bonkers. But I'll tell you a secret. All the best people are.'" This final quote perfectly encapsulates the book's adventurous spirit, suggesting that embracing the "bonkers" (the unconventional, the imaginative, the magical) is the path to truly living and belonging among "the best people." It's an invitation to step beyond the mundane and into a world of self-created magic.

The conclusion powerfully reiterates that servitor creation is not just a magical practice but a path to deeper self-understanding, psychological liberation, and a more joyful and magical experience of reality, fitting perfectly into the challenges and opportunities of the modern age.

The chapter dives into the current landscape of belief surrounding Out of Body Experiences, acknowledging the divide between believers and skeptics.

Belief vs. Skepticism: A Modern Divide The author notes that while more people now believe in OBEs, this shift has also intensified rivalries and "great debates" between believers and non-believers, often with an "almost religious fervor." He mentions studies on OBEs and Near-Death Experiences (NDEs) that "go a long way in proving the validity" of these phenomena and "consciousness's ability to seemingly step outside of the body." However, skeptics, rooted in their own "belief systems (which they refer to as undeniable fact)," find "many holes in these studies." The author's conclusion is blunt: skeptics will likely remain skeptics until they have their own undeniable experiences, while believers will face backlash from those adhering to a "materialistic religion" they call science. He doesn't "hold his breath" for scientific establishment acceptance.

The Author's Stance: Beyond Delusion John Kreiter openly declares his position: he believes that the idea of human consciousness being "trapped within a cold mechanical object filled world is quite literally delusional." He sees it as a "societal and self-imposed misconception" so entrenched that doubting it now seems like "insanity."

He attributes his conviction to personal experiences, including OBEs, which make it difficult for him to understand why so many believe reality is limited to what our "very limited" human senses (picking up only a tiny fraction of the electromagnetic spectrum) can perceive. While he's detailed this in another book ("The Paranormal Experience"), he assures the reader it's not a prerequisite for understanding this one.

Action Over Argument: Finding Your Own Truth The author makes it clear that he's not interested in debate or "cheeky approach[es]." Instead, his method is practical: "in this book I will provide concrete actions and techniques that anyone can use in order to have Out of Body Experiences quickly and easily, so that they have a chance to find their own truth."

What makes his approach unique is its ease, as it "uses the natural tendencies of human consciousness," working with the natural flow rather than against it. This means no "long boring exercises" or forcing oneself to "wake up in your dreams" through difficult methods.

Why Background Information is Crucial To properly present these techniques, background information on human consciousness and subjective experience is provided because it will:

• Allow you to begin to explore your own beliefs about what is

possible and naturally lead to greater possibilities.

• Give you concrete reasons as to why this type of ability

(projecting consciousness) is so natural and beneficial to your growth.

• Provide you with the operational data that you will need in order

to navigate and prosper in a wholly new environment.

• Allow you to have a sense of what is possible so that you have a

benchmark that you can then strive to attain in your own journeys.

The "mind needs answers," and this information helps it "grasp the significance of what it is possible and what it is about to do."

Dispelling Fear: Consciousness is Protected Before delving into the core techniques, the author addresses some "points clear" which are not meant to scare, but to clarify. He explicitly states that what he's about to mention "has nothing to do with the possible evils that many people tend to equate with Out of Body travel and paranormal investigation in general."

His crucial reassurance: "Your consciousness is far more powerful than you suspect and has the ability to be far more flexible than you are currently letting it be. In other words, your consciousness is inherently protected and there are no devils or evils out there that can harm you as long as you conduct yourself with a modicum of common sense."

This powerful statement concludes with: "We are all powerful beings who unfortunately have been taught to settle for a very limited slice of the reality pie." This opens expanding the reader's self-perception and understanding of their own innate abilities.

Before We Get Going (Within Chapter 1)

This section directly confronts the primary psychological hurdle for aspiring OBE travelers: fear.

The Foremost Obstacle: Fear The author asserts: "The first thing I want you to realize then is that the first obstacle to conscious expansion and to Out of Body travel is fear." He acknowledges this fear as "very real," even for himself. It's not a fear of physical harm but of being "utterly overwhelmed by the sheer vastness of it all." He likens it to standing before an impending storm, realizing one's own insignificance in the face of immense, beautiful, and overwhelming power.

Overcoming Fear: Inherent Power and the Double Body To overcome this fear, one must "trust in your own inherent power" and understand that your "Double Body (which I will show you how to create in Chapter 5) cannot be crushed like a simple porcelain doll." This "traveling consciousness has great resources at its disposal and can protect itself during its excursions beyond the flesh." Beyond this inherent protection, the book promises "techniques that will allow you to circumnavigate any obstacle that you might face."

Effort and Consistency: The "Night Course" Analogy While the methods are "pretty easy, natural," and "can be done by anyone," they demand "time and effort to do them in a consistent basis." The author draws an analogy: it's like taking a "night course" -- not in sewing or car repair, but in "project[ing] certain portions of your conscious ego beyond the confines of your objective physical reality."

Initially, the practical benefits might not seem as obvious as learning a physical skill. However, the author stresses that what is learned here is "truly life altering and therefore highly practical."

The Second Basic Realization: Consistency and Profound Benefits

"The second basic thing you must realize is; Out of Body practice takes some effort and getting good at it won't happen overnight." This practice, however, offers immense personal benefits: "direct knowledge in many areas that you might be wondering about" and the opening of the universe to "truly magical and often times beyond words" realms.

As one practices and explores their subjective reality, a natural reaction is to "question your personal identity" and feel "small as an individual self" when confronted with the infinite.

Consciousness Beyond the Body: Multiple Perspectives The author explains that "consciousness does not reside in your body as much as you think it does," and one can experience "more than one individual 'Here and Now' perspective at a time."

Those who fear this greater reality might mistakenly perceive "demons and ghosts," believing they'll be "destroyed or overcome by a greater evil." This is a misconception: "This is not the case; you are an incredible complex being that has the ability to be much more than you might now suspect." The journey becomes a "constant adventure," leading to "deep inner joy" as one sheds self-imposed "prisons."

The Third Key Point: Trusting Your Indestructible Self "The third thing that you should know is that things might get weird; a part of you might fear that you will lose yourself within a greater reality." While such fear is "healthy" as it rallies energy, it's not helpful long-term. The paramount understanding here is: "Know that you yourself cannot be destroyed, that the person that you are now cannot be overshadowed, that you can trust in greater aspects of yourself to keep you safe because the you that you are can never be terminated."

The Final Point: Encountering Alien Life Drawing from Horatio's wisdom ("more things in heaven and earth..."), the author concludes this chapter with a surprising, yet vital, point: "My final point in this chapter then is that you will quite possibly come in contact with what can only be considered alien life."

He makes these points upfront to prepare the reader, not to instill terror. He wants understanding from the outset to prevent fright from derailing the "fantastic journey."

Self-Created Fears and Actual Encounters A significant reassurance is offered: "ninety-nine percent of the scary things that you might find out there will actually be of your own creation." He references his work on "servitor creation" to show "the great power of thought; thoughts are things, especially in the inner realms."

However, he also promises to teach how to "overcome these negative self-created entities." The method will even allow one to distinguish between a "self-created thought form or actual foreign energy." Knowing a negative internal event is "self-created" is "incredibly freeing psychologically" and makes it easier to overcome.

Finally, regarding genuine "alien life," the author describes the encounters as "incredibly rewarding," like "walking into the 'Mos Eisley' cantina." While some aliens are best avoided, the sheer "diversity and wonder" are worthwhile. He promises to teach how to deal with any actual alien life encountered. Footnotes [1] provide external links to scientific evidence for near-death experiences and out-of-body experiences for those seeking further validation.

Let's go deeper into John Kreiter's "Out of Body Experiences," moving from the foundational Introduction into the intriguing personal narrative and conceptual groundwork of Chapters 2.

This chapter serves as the author's personal justification for his beliefs in Out of Body Experiences, grounding his theoretical framework in concrete, lived experiences from his childhood. It aims to bridge the gap between abstract concepts and relatable, albeit unusual, phenomena.

The author begins by referencing his statement from the Introduction about not believing in a "cold mechanical world filled with objects" and his conviction in the mind's ability to leave the physical body. He then asks two key questions: How does he justify these beliefs, and how do they pertain to OBEs?

A Typical Day in My House

John Kreiter answers these questions by sharing his childhood experiences. He asserts that his beliefs are justified "the only way that I think truly matters; by having these experiences myself." Before his own conscious OBEs, he held a common perception: OBEs were possible for some people, but he personally couldn't experience them.

However, he explains he was "far luckier than most" due to his upbringing with a remarkable figure: his great-grandmother. From a very early age, he witnessed "what a person who mastered some these powers was capable of." Her most astonishing ability, one that filled him with "equal doses of fear and wonder," was her "odd ability to on occasion be in two places at the same time." This phenomenon is known as bilocation.

He sets the scene: a Spanish colonial house with rooms opening to a central garden courtyard, doors often open for coolness and scented air. This provided a natural "fortress-like environment" for him and his sister. The author notes his great-grandmother was a "very scary" but loved figure, whose presence brought about "crazy things" that "completely alter[ed] my reality" by doing "impossible" feats. His mother, a "total skeptic" and "highly stubborn," struggled to deal with these paranormal events, leading to "hilarious" battles where she'd deny phenomena even as "a glowing orb shot past her head."

Then, he recounts a recurring, ritualistic event: Whenever his great-grandmother left the house for a stroll, "another aspect of her would stay behind." This presence manifested through distinct and loud sounds of her "walking up and down the central courtyard," specifically the "dragging her heels on the concrete surface" of her hard-heeled "Laura Ingalls shoes." This sound was so clear and pervasive that "everyone in the house" heard it -- his father, grandmother, mother, sister, and himself.

Each time the sound began, a ritual ensued: his mother would ask, "John is your grandma outside!?" He would run out, find "absolutely nobody in the courtyard," and return screaming. Despite verifying that the heavy front door post (making entry impossible for anyone, let alone an elderly woman) was in place, the sounds would resume upon his return. His mother's persistent skepticism, despite the clear evidence, amazed him, as they even searched the entire yard for the source of the noise without success.

Beyond the sounds, neighbors frequently reported seeing his great-grandmother "somewhere far by herself," even "sweeping the sidewalk with an old broom," at times when she was supposedly at home under their watchful eye due to her age. His grandmother fondly recalled an instance where her brother hosted the great-grandmother for evening tea, yet she had "never left the house." This led to the amused remark, "This Rosa is a special girl alright."

The author reflects that these experiences, especially the haunting sound of the heels, were the driving force behind his "persist[ence] in finding answers to the Out of Body Experience" even before he had one himself. He considers himself lucky to have witnessed such phenomena firsthand, realizing that his great-grandmother demonstrated what was possible, and his mother showed him that "skeptics will ignore what is right in front of their faces if they are stubborn enough." Ultimately, he learned that "no matter what they think, believe, or do, the impossible will always be all around us. In the end, the only person that matters in this regard is yourself."

This personal anecdote sets the foundation for the book's core premise: the physical world is not as solid or limited as we perceive, and consciousness is capable of far more than typically believed.

Where then is the real me that is creating this body?

This section pivots from the personal narrative to a profound philosophical inquiry, directly connecting the author's experiences to the nature of reality and consciousness, and laying the conceptual groundwork for understanding OBEs.

The author poses the fundamental question: if the world isn't "a cold object filled world ruled by cold mechanistic laws," how does this justify the Out of Body Experience? He states it has "everything to do with it."

The Core Delusion: Consciousness Trapped in a Body He identifies a "greatest aspect of this delusion" that humanity has imposed upon itself: "the belief that we have, that our consciousness is trapped inside an object (our body), is the greatest aspect of this delusion that we have forced ourselves to believe, and therefore experience." This leads to a view where "we see ourselves as a consciousness stuck in a box, stuck in a bigger box" within a supposedly sealed universe.

The Symbolic Nature of Reality If, as the author and others suggest, reality is different from our common understanding, then:

• "there are indeed no objects out there as we currently understand

the term"

• These "objects" are "merely symbolic

representations/constructions of internal aspects of our own personal and shared psyches."

Extending this, our physical bodies themselves are also "symbolic constructions that hide a greater truth." Since these constructions are "created through the power of thought" and "are not the hard objects that we think they are," then "our body is not the hard thing that we think it is." Instead, our consciousness is "just using this 'self' created construction in order to completely focus a part of itself into the physical plane."

Redefining the "Spirit Self" When we ask "Where then is the real me that is creating this body?", we often look to a "heavenly realm," speaking of a "spirit" or "greater self" projecting "down into the material world." The author cautions against this "descent" idea, explaining that it implies "movement through space and time and sometimes even descent in morality," which he believes is an illusion. The mechanistic "point A to point B" movement is not applicable.

The True Source: Within Instead, the "greater part of us does not project downward from some heavenly realm but that it actually comes from within ourselves." A critical teaching: "If you must look for a greater being (your spirit), you shouldn't look up to heaven to find it, you should actually look within because the doorway to Out of Body Experiences and to our complete being (our psyche) is found within our inner reality, our subjective reality, and not above."

The Energetic Nature of Reality Our senses, trained from birth, perceive solid objects, including our bodies. However, the truth is that these "objects" are "not solid, but are actually pools of energy with a type of energetic mass that is vibrating at a certain electromagnetic frequency." Our physical senses only pick up a "very small portion" of this energy, leading us to misclassify them as hard objects due to conditioned belief.

The Psyche: Beyond the Body's Limits The "greater truth is that the psyche is so powerful and so creative that it has the ability to focus incredible amounts of energy and attention in multiple planes/dimensions of existence." Therefore, the physical person we see in the mirror is "only one note within an entire symphony of actuality. You are only one aspect of a greater psyche that straddles many dimensions."

this doesn't diminish the individual: "But you are not insignificant and you are not powerless." As an individual consciousness, while not possessing the same "power of creation as the complete psyche," we "still create a great portion of your own physical reality, and you can project aspects of yourself in a similar way to what your psyche does."

The Power of Individual Consciousness: Being "Here and There" This leads to a profound revelation: "What this means is that your individual consciousness, with the right effort and training, has the ability to be both here and there at the same time!" This means perceiving separate "Here and Now" perspectives in multiple places simultaneously, and creating "multiple body constructions" (symbolic representations of itself) at these locations. The key difference is that these individually created bodies are not as solid as the physical body.

The Astral Body / Double Body: A Focus Point The author explains that while our ego-consciousness primarily focuses on the physical body ("our 'Here and Now' place"), it can also focus on a "completely different 'Here and Now' location" and create an "etheric body construction" there. This less dense "second body" is referred to as the Astral Body or Double Body.

This astral body, being "far less energetically dense," can "perform feats that are impossible for the physical body; this includes the ability to fly through the air and travel to distant locations in the blink of an eye."

However, a critical point is made: "I don't want you to get caught up in the idea that you need this second body construction in order to have OBEs." The astral body is primarily "psychological scaffolding" that helps the traveling consciousness identify with a new location. Often, an OBE may occur without an astral body, with the consciousness experienced as a "presence, a spectator watching a scene," or perceived by psychics as a "very small glowing ball of light" or "glowing orb."

Reasons to Employ an Astral Body

Despite not being strictly necessary, the astral body is an "incredible asset" for:

• "immeasurably helpful in focusing your attention in a new

location."

• "help\[ing\] you to deploy energy and manifest in this new

location; which means that you can manipulate in this new location with ease."

• "allow\[ing\] you to fully immerse yourself in a new dimension or

event."

• "even allow\[ing\] a master OBE traveler\... To let go of this

physical world and enter another all-inclusive world permanently."

The Double Body solidifying exercise involves the traveling consciousness "moving through space by changing its vibrator state, instead of moving the physical body." It helps consciousness feel "more secure and solid" and "sensually experience" the new location in a familiar way.

The process of creating a Double Body is consciously a "visualization and attention exercise," but subconsciously, it's a complex act involving "large projections of energy and a change of vibratory frequencies."

The Relationship Between Frequency, Energy, and the Double Body

"The greater the change in frequency, the greater the change in awareness. The stronger that the projection of energy is, the more solid that the Double body becomes."

Humans naturally deploy "great amounts of psychic energy" and change frequencies daily. The trick for OBE travel is to do this "more consciously and direct[ly]" and to "develop the focus of our attention so that we can make big changes in our vibration." While small changes are like daydreams, larger changes can be challenging. The Double Body is presented as "a perfect solution" to this, making it easier to exit the physical plane and maintain OBE focus for longer periods, enabling deep travel into other dimensions while retaining a familiar sensory experience.

The author wove personal experience with profound metaphysical concepts, setting the stage for the practical techniques to follow. We now understand that the body is not a prison but a temporary focus point, and that our consciousness, as part of a larger psyche, has the inherent ability to project itself and even create a "Double Body" to explore other realities. The key lies in understanding and consciously controlling our focus and vibratory state.

Let's continue our close look at John Kreiter's "Out of Body Experiences: Quickly and Naturally." We've laid the philosophical groundwork, and now we move into understanding the states of consciousness and the foundational exercises.

This chapter addresses a crucial point often debated in OBE circles: the state of consciousness required for these experiences. Kreiter challenges conventional wisdom, offering a more natural and accessible approach.

The Range of Subjective Experiences in OBEs The author begins by stating that, contrary to popular belief (even among successful OBE initiators), a "wide range of subjective experiences" are possible while traveling Out of the Body. An explorer of inner worlds can be "here and there simultaneously," or even "here and there and there and there and there, etc." At each new "Here and Now" perspective, one can create a "new body construction," potentially even "animal or fantastical alien forms."

However, this knowledge alone doesn't explain how to achieve these states of awareness or enable these new body constructs.

Inconsistencies in Traditional OBE Techniques Kreiter points out a "discrepancy" in available OBE material regarding the conscious state needed. Many believe:

• OBEs require long meditative rituals involving body relaxation,

manipulation of energetic centers, and forcing the etheric body out.

• The best way is to enter a state "on the border between sleep and

wakefulness" and then project.

• Others advocate learning lucid dreaming first, then projecting from

the dream state.

These "big inconsistency[ies] in techniques" often lead to a "dry and technical approach" where consciousness is categorized into four distinct brain states based on electromagnetic frequency: Beta, Alpha, Theta, and Delta.

• Beta: Normal waking state, fast/high wave frequency (like a

"choppy ocean"). More conscious/present as an ego.

• Alpha: Slower than Beta.
• Theta: Slower than Alpha (often associated with deep relaxation,

meditation, light sleep, dreams).

• Delta: Very deep sleep consciousness, much slower wave frequency

(like a "calm and tranquil lake"). More unconscious.

Challenging the Brainwave Dogma Traditional teaching suggests attaining an OBE requires shifting from Beta to Theta or Delta frequencies. Kreiter points out the problems with this belief:

• It creates a "fine delineation in frequency ranges" that can cause

problems, as there's "no easy, in other words natural, way to train a person to go from the fully conscious state into a deeply relaxed and possibly unconscious one; aside from perhaps taking a nap."

• The belief that OBEs are impossible outside a specific brainwave

state becomes a self-fulfilling prophecy, as "belief... Is of great importance when it comes to any subjective/hyper-natural action."

• OBE teachers often imply "deep sense of work that needs to be

done," turning a natural process into an "obstacle-filled road with varying degrees of difficulty."

The Author's Core Teaching: Focus of Attention Kreiter's approach is radically different: "the only training that is required is the focus of attention." By learning to focus attention in specific ways and maintaining it, one can "propel large parts of our awareness (our consciousness) into different planes of existence, and even alien worlds."

This "focus of attention" training is not an "arduous physical and mental task" involving uncomfortable postures, sore throats from chanting, or "highly boring meditative routines" that just make you fall asleep. The book's techniques also don't demand:

• Learning to wake up in your dreams consistently.
• Feeling energy vibrations or projecting them externally, which "can

take years to master."

OBEs as Natural By-Products of Awareness Kreiter asserts that the average person is wrongly led to believe they need "superhuman effort" for an OBE. On the contrary, "the exact opposite is true when it comes to achieving OBEs; these experiences are natural by-products of human awareness, all that is required is that you begin to exercise the attention/focus muscles that most of us forgot that we had."

This book, therefore, teaches the natural way to:

• Inner Exploration
• Lucid Dreams
• Out of Body Travel

The Nature of the Inner Realm: Chaos and Distrust He clarifies that "by natural I don't mean the lazy way or the 'way too simple to be true' way." Instead, it's natural because "your consciousness can do it without much prodding on your part. In other words, it is the way our minds are logically built to function. It is the way our ancestors explored the inner world, it is how they traveled and knew things without ever moving physically."

This internal realm, including our dreams, can appear "highly chaotic at first" because we're "not used to the kind of laws that operate here" and are "very inexperienced at consciously manipulating in this place." Fragmentary dream snippets seem "convoluted and strange," and even experienced OBEers report "strange phenomena like objects morphing," "scenes changing," or "encounters with weird, alien entities."

The biggest obstacle to changing consciousness states is "the mistrust, sometimes even great fear, of the inner subjective realm." People fear repressed images or view these explorations as a "waste of time" filled with irrelevant "convoluted images and thoughts."

The Importance of Understanding the Inner Plane Because of this "lack of trust in the validity of the subjective experience," the author believes it's best to "first understand the laws and complexity of this inner world." This understanding is crucial because:

• "It is through this inner plane that most OBE travel takes

place."

• "It can help you to understand how to navigate your way through

it once you get there yourself."

• "Understanding, and then eventually exploring, this environment

yourself can greatly increase your intellect and personal knowledge."

• "It allows you to imaginatively contemplate how you will move and

how you will manipulate in this other reality, which can be of great help in changing negative beliefs about the possibility of Out of Body travel."

The mind "needs answers" to grasp the significance of what's possible. Originally, these "laws that govern the inner subjective realm" were to be in this chapter, but due to their length and complexity, they are moved to Appendix A. This allows readers to immediately learn the practical techniques for changing consciousness and having OBEs, with the deeper theoretical material available later.

The chapter concludes by promising to show "just how easy it can be to change levels of conscious awareness."

The chapter the central metaphor for controlling consciousness during OBEs: the "awareness dial," and provides the foundational exercises for shifting one's perception.

Movement as a Vibratory and Psychological Affair The author asks the reader to consider a physical object nearby. Our senses and "common sense" tell us it's a fixed distance away. However, Kreiter states that "this measured physical distance is only applicable in this physical plane; in this physical plane's frequency range."

The moment one lets go of this physical plane, even slightly, "this kind of physical distance, and therefore physical movement, no longer applies." From a non-physical perspective, "all movement becomes a vibratory affair, a psychological one."

The Dial of Awareness: Shifting Focus to the Subjective Realm The concept of "changing the dial of awareness" is introduced. The author acknowledges that most people associate OBEs with leaving the body and exploring the physical world like a ghost. This is indeed possible with the astral/Double body. However, a crucial prerequisite is emphasized: "in order to travel and explore the physical world in this manner, you first need to change states of awareness; you need to alter that awareness dial... This means that you first have to go into the subjective realm."

Once this "dial has been altered" (meaning "stepped away from physical focus and begun to focus on the inner (or subjective) plane"), then one can proceed to create an astral body and explore either the physical dimension or "an infinitude of other possible dimensions."

The Stability of the Physical World vs. Other Planes This shift in awareness can be "scary at first" due to the "seemingly chaotic nature of the other planes." Our physical world feels "highly stable, rigid in fact." This stability, Kreiter explains, is maintained because "we have learned through years of work to maintain our focus just so, and to ignore any sensory data that does not agree with what we as a human community have decided does not belongs here." In the physical world, "only 'common sense' mechanical laws apply."

Movement is a Change in Focus In OBEs, to travel from one point to another in the room, one cannot physically move. Instead, "You will actually need to change your subjective (or psychological) perspective or viewpoint. This change in subjective standpoint is a vibratory change; you are essentially changing the frequency of your being, and as you do so you move through what we refer to as space. All movement is frequency modulation."

Therefore, to change one's frequency, subjective standpoint, or spatial position in the OBE state, "you need to change your focus. All movement therefore comes from a change in focus!"

Moving through physical space without the physical body involves "a certain type of frequency modulation," which will be taught when creating the astral/double body. But first, the author emphasizes the need to "go inward," which is easier than full-blown OBE travel and demonstrates the flexibility of consciousness.

The "Here and Now" Point To understand this movement, one must first grasp "what focus of awareness is" and identify the primary focus point for physical beings: the "'Here and Now' point." This is achieved by focusing "solely and completely on this present moment."

Exercise: Here and Now

This practical exercise is designed to help the reader deeply experience their primary conscious focus point.

1 Preparation: "Find a comfortable quiet area where you can sit,

a place where you will not be disturbed for a few minutes."

2 Focus on Present Moment: "Focus all your attention in this

present moment."

3 Engage Vision: "Focus your vision on all the things that are

around you, all of the things that are here with you now. Use your peripheral vision and keep your focus on all the physical things before you."

4 Engage Hearing: "Open yourself to the all of the sounds around

you; focus on hearing the sounds around you now."

5 Engage Smell and Touch: "Smell the world that you see and hear,

and finally feel the things around you as well. Pay attention to the temperature of your body, to the feel of your clothes next to your skin, to the temperature in the room."

This is your Here and Now point! It is the "'present' point where your consciousness intersects most vividly with your physical environment."

The author likens this to "tuning a radio or focusing a lens"; a "perfect spot" on the attention dial yields "perfect focus," without "static" from other "stations." Achieving this perfect focus might create "a little tension," which the reader is encouraged to feel.

Alternating Focus

• After five minutes in the "perfect 'Here and Now' point,"

"relax and allow your attention to relax with you." Let senses "wander off naturally."

• Then, "once again focus your attention on the present moment just

like you did before." Find the perfect "Here and Now" and hold the tension.

• Repeat this alternation "a few more time\[s\] until you have a

really good feeling/sense of where your perfect 'Here and Now' point is."

This exercise is "very important" as it can be a "wonderful gateway into other planes of existence and OBEs," and also a good grounding exercise upon returning from a journey.

Exercise: Turning the Dial

Building on the previous exercise, this one introduces the conscious shift of awareness.

1 Initial Focus: Find and hold the "Here and Now" point for "at

least two minutes."

2 Directed Shift: Instead of simply relaxing, "close your eyes

and feel like your attention, the focus of who you are, shifts over to a point in space beside you, where that cup or cushion are that you noted at the beginning of the exercise."

3 Non-Physical Movement: Understand that "Your physical body is

not moving, but your attention, that non-physical part of you is."

4 Initial Perceptions: As you shift, you "might begin to see

things from your new perspective," "the world from new angles," "strange visions that don't seem to correlate at all with the physical reality," "strange geometric shapes or perhaps hear odd sounds." This is compared to "a radio with the station dial turned ever so slightly away from the local (your physical) station."

5 Patience and Acceptance: "Don't push it, just let it happen

naturally. If you don't pick up anything different then don't worry, just try again on a different day."

6 The Grey Zone: Don't expect "anything coherent." Most likely,

you'll pick up "static in between stations, a section of space that I like to call the Grey Zone."

This exercise's purpose is to help identify your "Home Station" clearly and "discover how your mind can naturally project away from it in an easy and natural way."

Daydreams: Shifting Awareness

This section eloquently connects our everyday mental activities to the core mechanics of OBEs, reframing common experiences as sophisticated shifts in consciousness.

The author points out that humans rarely remain perfectly focused on their "Home Station." Instead, "We are constantly fluctuating in and out of subjective feelings and images, often times reliving memories or thinking about possible future scenarios."

Daydreaming as Consciousness Projection

Kreiter states: "Many of us... Spend most of our waking time daydreaming, and as you must now realize, a daydream is a projection of consciousness; it is the consciousness traveling, without moving physically, away from the Home Station." This is done so "smoothly and quickly that we often don't even realize that we are performing a quite complex shift of awareness."

He challenges the negative perception of daydreaming, often condemned by Eastern doctrines like Zen that advocate constant "Home Station" focus. While there are "many benefits" to focusing on the Home Station (centerdness, strength, power, meeting point of objective/spiritual), "complete focus on this physical Home Station point, every day, all day, is detrimental in the long run because it greatly limits human consciousness." The mind needs to vary its focus, and daydreaming is "a natural and healthy mental action."

Directing Traveling Consciousness

The problem arises when we "give your mind too much free reign and fail to pay attention to and direct your traveling consciousness." "The trick then, is not to try and focus your attention on the Here and Now all the time and always, the real trick is to pay attention to your mind and to direct it when you need to." The subjective experience is not just rewarding; it also helps "deal emotionally and creatively with the problems that we face every day." This "change of the dial away from the Home Station" is what grants access to our creativity.

Deepening the Subjective Experience

The subjective experience is a "type of daydreaming," an intense inward focus. It can go "very deep into the psyche," so deep that "you are no longer in this world." This is not an "inward" physical movement, but "literally altering dimensional awareness," a "vibrationally or trans-dimensionally" shift into "a completely different and quite separate alien world."

As one enters this subjective realm, the first encounter is often the "Grey Zone." This zone "can at first appear to be random chaos" due to "weird geometric shapes and disjointed images." Coherent images might appear "odd and strange" and not directly related to oneself, often feeling "somewhat superficial," like "watching something on a screen."

More experienced daydreamers might go "far deeper," experiencing "very clear sensations" within an "interior landscape." The "deeper you go," the more "real" internal sensations become. This deepening is a "larger and larger turn of the dial away from the Home Station," signifying "brain waves are becoming slower and slower, and that you are going deeper and deeper into a trance-like state."

Maintaining Focus

The journey into deeper subjective states can lead to a "sleep like state that is referred to as Lucid Dreaming." While exciting, this introduces several common obstacles faced by Lucid Dreamers and inner explorers:

1 Difficulty Remembering Self: It becomes harder to maintain

self-awareness within the subjective realm.

2 Difficulty Remembering Experiences: Upon returning to the

physical "Home Station," it's harder to recall what was done or seen.

3 Complicated Control: Maintaining control over oneself and the

inner environment becomes more challenging.

The Solution: The Double Body or Internal Monologue The author states that "The best solution in dealing with all these problems is to create a Double or etheric body." This Double body helps "overcome all the problems listed above" by providing a "safe homey, environment" for the traveling consciousness.

For those who haven't yet mastered the Double body or prefer not to use it, the recommended technique is "keeping an internal monologue going." This means "you actually talk to yourself as you are going through this subjective journey, describing all that you are experiencing."

Method 1: Internal Monologue

This is a direct, internal narration technique. As you close your eyes and begin your subjective journey (seeing a bridge, feeling a breeze, hearing water), you "describe this experience through a personal monologue." This monologue is "internal," meaning "you are talking to yourself inside your head (no one else can hear it but you)." Examples: "I see a bridge in the distance and feel a breeze on my face. As I turn towards the bridge, I hear the sound of rushing water and get the impression of a clear mountain spring." This practice has ancient roots and can be done alone.

Method 2: Scribe

This method involves a partner. The subjective traveler is the "medium," and the partner is the "scribe." The medium enters the subjective realm and "begins to describe what he or she is experiencing." In this case, the monologue is "spoken out loud" and "written down by the scribe." The scribe can "ask questions and can try to guide the medium into matters of interest" but must be "careful so as not to disturb the medium's subjective journeys."

Method 3: Self-Recording

A modern variation of the scribe method. The "medium" (traveler) sits with pen and paper or an electronic recorder. They maintain the monologue and "draw or write down the things that he or she is experiencing." This method is similar to the Remote Viewing techniques used in the CIA's Stargate project. The author notes that electronic recording devices have increased the popularity of this method, thanks to the work of Dr. Win Wenger and his Project Renaissance.

Body Paralysis

This section addresses a significant obstacle in deeper subjective exploration and OBEs.

The techniques involving speaking, writing, or drawing ultimately face a problem: "The onset of body paralysis." As a subjective traveler goes deeper into the subjective state, "his or her body will essentially turn off." This is believed to be a "natural survival mechanism that allows the mind to experience REM (dream) sleep while the body is safely catatonic in bed." The critical point is that as you travel deeply into the inner realms, "your body will begin to turn off," making physical actions like speaking, writing, or drawing "more and more difficult until it finally becomes all together impossible because your mouth and hands just won't work anymore."

The Recommended Solution for Depth: Inner Monologue Therefore, the author suggests: "I therefore suggest that you use the inner monologue (talk to yourself in your head) technique because it is a very useful way to remember yourself and stay conscious in your inner voyage, and a good way to remember your experiences after you come back to your Home Station." While a tape recorder might be useful "at first to help you discover just how powerful, vivid, and all-covering these inner journeys can be," the ultimate goal is to "get in the habit of maintaining an inner monologue," which allows you to "go very deep and will not have to worry about your mouth going catatonic."

Exercise: Deep Internal Projection

This exercise is designed to consciously alter the "awareness dial" beyond simple daydreaming, facilitating deep immersion into the inner realm.

1 Preparation: "Find a nice quiet place where you will feel

secure and you won't be disturbed for ten to twenty minutes."

2 Position: "It is also a good idea to try and find a good

sitting position." The author recommends sitting (to avoid falling asleep) and emphasizes comfort over traditional meditative postures (to avoid physical discomfort that distracts). The goal is to "forget about the objective world for a while so that you can focus completely on the internal one." Forgetting the body is difficult if sore.

3 Home Station Focus (5 minutes): With eyes open, "focus on the

environment around you... Your 'Here and Now' Home Station for at least five minutes."

4 Close Eyes & Fall Inward: Close your eyes, but instead of

"letting yourself go and allowing yourself to fall into yourself," "become aware of the individual 'you' that is inside your physical body." This internal 'you' "is now looking through your physical eyes and is only seeing the inside of your eyelids; it feels, hears, tastes, and touches through the physical senses only."

• Realization: Realize that "it is this individual you that

can change the dial of its awareness and can move through Space and Time to experience another plane of reality."

• Imagining Movement (Playful Approach): "Imagine that you

are moving away from the physical body construct that you currently occupy; this should not feel like a difficult thing." If it feels hard, you're "trying too hard." Approach it like "playing a game," a "kids pretend game," not trying to make it "real" in your mind at this stage.

5 Turning Senses Inward:

• Vision Inward: "As you fall into yourself and this cozy

darkness... Begin to turn all your senses inwards." Instead of looking at eyelids, "try and turn your vision into yourself and patiently wait (without forcing) for those images that begin to appear." These might be "colors or random geometric shapes and finally begin to see objects or perhaps whole scenes."

• Hearing Inward: "Turn your hearing inward as well so that

instead of focusing on what is going on in the room around you, you begin to listen to the sounds inside, in this new place."

• Feeling Inward: "Also turn your feelings inward. Forget

about how your body feels and try to feel deep within yourself, you might be surprised that as you do so you will get the sensation that you have become aware of an inner space. Explore this space with your feelings."

6 Exploring the Inner Plane: "Spend some time exploring this

inner plane." Initially, just "allow the inner realm to present itself to you." Don't worry about finding things or discovering answers; "just let it happen and enjoy the journey." Recognize "just how big and complex this inner place can be."

7 Maintaining Focus for Depth: "In order to go deeper and deeper

you just have to maintain your focus on this inner world, trying to forget about your physical world and your physical body as much as possible." If focus wavers, gently bring it back.

Body Paralysis as an Indicator

As you go deeper, your body "will start to feel really lethargic," indicating you're "approaching body paralysis." This might manifest as your head "start[ing] to bob" or finding it "harder and harder to speak out loud." This means you are "greatly altering your state of awareness and your body is beginning to cross a threshold that will allow your consciousness to fully immerse itself in the inner planes." If you don't experience paralysis, "don't worry about it." The "only really important thing is the focus of your attention."

This is the "natural way to change levels of awareness." There's no need to distinguish Beta from Theta or specific symptoms. The crucial threshold is "the point where your physical body begins to experience sleep paralysis," which is a "good indicator that you are pretty deep."

Remembering Your Journeys

This section addresses one of the most significant challenges in inner exploration: memory retention.

The author recommends actively voicing, taping, writing, or drawing what is experienced during the subjective journey. "The power of doing this is twofold:"

1 Increased Vividness and Depth: "By talking or drawing and

writing what you see, you create a type of biofeedback loop that allows you to greatly increase the vividness and the depth of your visions."

2 Enhanced Memory Retention: "You are able to remember your

inner journey to a much greater degree."

Kreiter considers memory retention "truly the greatest hurdle for those who engage in BOTH inner exploration and classic Out of Body Experiences." He believes most people would be "utterly speechless" if they could fully recall the "richness and the complexity of their journeys beyond the body," waking up with only "fragments" that prevent reliving the "haunting beauty."

By combining the "Deep Internal Projection" exercise with a chosen monologue method, readers can "experience this great richness yourself."

The Double Body as a Vehicle

The chapter concludes by looking forward: the next chapter will teach "how to have classic OBEs," where one travels through the "objective physical world" using an astral/double body. While an astral/double body isn't strictly necessary for all OBEs (as Appendix B will detail for instant OBEs without one), it's presented as "the perfect vehicle for the traveling consciousness" for deeper, immersive experiences in "other vibrational realms."

Let's continue our in-depth exploration of John Kreiter's "Out of Body Experiences: Quickly and Naturally." We've established the foundation of awareness and the nature of consciousness. Now, we move into the practical steps of developing and using your 'Double Body' for extensive exploration.

This chapter directly confronts the core beliefs that often hinder individuals from experiencing Out of Body Experiences (OBEs). Kreiter emphasizes that our expectations and assumptions shape our experiences in the inner realms, making it crucial to re-evaluate our foundational beliefs about consciousness and reality.

The Power of Beliefs in OBEs The author begins by stating that our pre-existing ideas about OBEs, based on our beliefs, dictate "what that experience is all about." These beliefs then lead to assumptions about "how a person goes about having an OBE, what is possible in this state, and what a person will experience once they finally get there." It is therefore "very important... That we examine the beliefs that we hold about OBEs because thoughts are instantly made manifest in the inner realms." This means "whatever belief that we hold going in there will manifest instantly and therefore mirror back what we expect. In other words, you will see and experience what you expect to see and experience."

If one is unaware of these influential beliefs, they might not "see the true reality that lies beneath your personally created delusions," and these limiting beliefs can make having an OBE "very difficult."

Two Erroneous Core Beliefs Kreiter identifies two specific "erroneous core beliefs" that he blames for most difficulties in cultivating OBEs:

1 The "One Body, One Spirit" Delusion:

• Belief 1a: We are "just a body and nothing else" -- this

leads to disbelief in OBEs entirely.

• Belief 1b: There is "only one body and one spirit" --

accepted by many who believe in OBEs, this implies a single spirit leaves the single physical body.

• Author's Critique: These beliefs, often tied to "personal

religious or metaphysical beliefs," greatly influence what people expect to experience and therefore do experience. Kreiter suggests that teachers and writers of OBEs, holding these assumptions, may unintentionally "cloud" what is truly going on.

His book aims to show that "there is no such thing as just one traveling spirit body," as this belief creates "many limitations that don't in fact exist." Instead, it's possible to have a "multitude 'Here and Now' points of view," meaning the ability to occupy not just one or two, but "multiple bodies and therefore multiple subjective perspectives." The only real limit is the "inherent power of your own consciousness." one can be "aware of more than one subjective state at the same time." While focusing intensely on the physical body (as taught from infancy) diminishes awareness of the "internal subjective/etheric/soul/astral body," with training, one can become "aware of the astral body/bodies and the physical body simultaneously." The "one soul or etheric body" assumption leads to believing the mind is limited, similar to the physical body. This can restrict perceptions and experiences, assuming data can only be received in a certain way or at a certain time.

2 The "Altered State Prerequisite" Delusion:

• Belief 2: OBEs require being "asleep or in a very deep

altered mental state."

• Author's Critique: This belief turns OBEs into a "nearly

unattainable goal for most." If one doesn't manifest the "supposed symptoms" of such a state, they believe they can't have an OBE, and thus they don't.

• Author's Solution: Chapters 3 and 4 (and Appendix A) aim to

dismantle this, showing that "there is no need to be asleep or to engage in some complex meditative practice to explore the inner realms." Changing the "awareness dial" is "easy once you understand the basic concept," something we've been doing naturally our whole lives (e.g., daydreaming). The new element is "practice controlling the focus of your attention" to avoid "randomly frolicking about your awareness dial like a drunken monkey." With practice, one can consciously direct the mind into deep inner realms even from a "waking conscious state."

The "It's All In Your Head" Delusion (Third Limiting Belief) As readers practice and prove the new beliefs, they will confront a third limiting belief:

• Belief 3: "While traveling in the inner realms you are not

moving through Space, you are just going deeply into your mind. This is the belief that it's all in your head."

• Author's Critique: This belief is "wrong." As discussed more

extensively in Appendix A, "movement through Space and Time is not what we think it is." Physical plane laws don't apply when the "awareness dial" is turned.

• The Truth: "When you travel into the inner realms, you are

moving through space. You are occupying a whole new geographic location that is as concrete as the corporeal one we call physical reality." The phrase "traveling inward" is used only for lack of better words; it's "not really inward at all," but "altering dimensional awareness." Human reasoning struggles with non-physical movement, but daydreams and initial "dial" changes are "small movements by your consciousness at first, but it is movement none the less." The crucial realization: "You are not stuck inside your head!"

The book's aim is to help readers question these old beliefs through conceptual understanding, empowering them to take "the final steps to the complete awakening of your Out of Body abilities," which are achieved by creating and solidifying the "Double body" and having an OBE with it.

Continuing the discussion on the Double Body, providing practical steps through a narrative lens, and showing the importance of perception and intent in its development.

The author acknowledges that the book's concepts might initially be "difficult to get your head around" not due to complexity, but because they represent a radically "different way of thinking about the world." To ease this, he uses "many diverse terms" and presents knowledge from "a number of different angles." This multi-perspective approach aims to:

• Allow information consumption "in an easy and natural way."
• "Develop new neurological patterns in your mind," instilling

new thought patterns for effortless contemplation and exploration.

• "Naturally expand the volume of the new neural networks\... Or that

you are expanding upon if you are already familiar with these concepts."

• "Help you to access this new information from a number of different

perspectives, and in this way you will be able to create new and greater patterns of connection within your mind."

Reading the material is thus a "natural launching point" for exploring inner reality and OBE possibilities. The author then shifts to a "little story," a "biographical tale" based on his "own work and personal explorations," framed as a set of first-person procedures.

Scouting Awareness: The Author's Motivation The author reveals his personal motivation for OBEs: "deep explorations into the far reaches of the unknown," acting as an "awareness scout" to see "how far the winds can take me, and what I will find when I get there." He contrasts this with others' motivations, such as exploring the physical plane, distant planets, sensual pleasures free from physical limits, or even living in "alien worlds." He stresses that all such explorations are "equally valid."

The procedures described represent "the beginning of one voyager's journey," leading to "innumerable paths" once the Double's initial development is established.

How He Begins (A Narrative of Practice) The narrative begins with the explorer finding his "Home Station," appreciating the radio metaphor for changing frequencies. He focuses on his "most present present," his "most intense 'Here and Now' point," and then explores his "inner reality." Upon closing his eyes, his senses relax, and he experiences a "floating daydream," observing "different shapes, images, and even sounds." He realizes he gets "a bit too relaxed," losing concentration, and is "forced to use the technique of talking to himself in order to remember and to truly focus consciously on his inner journey."

Within "a few days of inner exploration," he understands his Home Station and the "slight turn of the awareness dial." He realizes he's been "altering his awareness all along in a quite natural way." This newfound awareness makes him feel it's "imperative that he begin to take responsibility for his flights of imaginative fancy" and "go deeper" while staying conscious.

The Double Body: Conscious Creation for Control To achieve deeper, conscious exploration, he decides to "work hard until he can develop his etheric body Double." This is his path to

"develop control over his consciousness so that he can begin to explore the depth and breadth of his world using his Double body."

He reiterates the process: sitting comfortably, focusing on the "most present moment" (Home Station), and marveling at the clarity and joy. He understands that while the Here/Now is satisfying, it's "still a box that he needs to escape from time to time," but knowing he can always return offers peace.

The Shift from "Doing" to "Pretending" He tries again, closing his eyes, attempting to project a part of himself out of his physical body, but struggles. He then remembers the crucial teaching: "all limitations are created by the self." He decides to "just give up" trying to do something and instead "just have fun, to just play a game of pretend." He pretends he is "out of his body," in a second body, "floating in the middle of the room."

This shift to a playful attitude allows him to "easily visualize himself floating... Like a disembodied ghost." His focus oscillates between the floating visualization and his physical body. He realizes the importance of training his attention to "focus for longer and longer periods of time on his floating, ghost-like form."

Seeing and Hearing: Developing the Double's Senses The key to solidifying the Double is "the more that he can focus on his floating body, the more that he can feel that he is in his Double body, the stronger that that the Double body will become."

To build the Double, he starts with the sense organs, beginning with the eyes. He reasons that a "floating ghost's eyes" need form to see well. He doesn't need to "grow cells or construct nerve endings"; he just needs to "practice seeing with them." "The better that he can see through his etheric eyes, the more developed and solid that they become." This becomes a "fun game": sitting, focusing on the present, closing physical eyes, and "pretend[ing] that he is seeing through the eyes of his Double body."

After a week of this, moving the Double body around and viewing the room from different angles, he can see "quite clearly" from the Double's position, even seeing his physical body. He finds looking at his new Double hands "incredibly fascinating," noting their tendency to "change form and warp in the most surreal shapes and colors." Distractions from the physical body (itches, sounds) initially pull his attention back, but he discovers the "ability to go from one body to the other in a flash is quite natural." He even contemplates "being able to become aware of both bodies at the same time."

He realizes he doesn't need to be asleep or in a deep altered state; it's about "developing a laser-like and unwavering focus in the new location." He just needs to "focus on where he wants to be and then just let the physical body take care of itself."

As he sees his Double hands clearly and realistically, he focuses on other body parts until his entire Double body is "clear and distinct." He notes that "the clearer that he can see his Double body, the more real that his new etheric position becomes." This starts as visualization but naturally becomes a "completely real experience."

Next, he works on his etheric ears. Sounds in the room might be similar but altered in direction or quality due to the Double's slightly different location. He finds Double ears "tend to work quite well from the get go" and can experience "dual awareness," shifting between physical and Double hearing. The longer he focuses on Double hearing, "the more that it seems to solidify his new location in the Double body." This takes another week.

Touch: Grounding the Double in Feeling He then focuses on feelings and the sense of touch. By vividly visualizing the feeling of being in the new body, he can "really feel what it feels like." He practices rubbing his Double hands together, vividly imagining the sensation until it feels "solid and very real." He then tries to feel "every single part of his new body," both as a tactile entity and as an "inner knowing." This takes another week.

Finally, he dedicates a couple of days to smell, deciding against taste for general OBE travel. He uses the rest of the week to further refine vision, considering it the "most important sense." He acknowledges that Double vision won't be perfect initially and will refine over time with continued use, but it's "always better to refine the Double as much as possible before any real travel begins."

Completion of Double Body Creation

The entire process of Double creation and solidification takes "just over a month." It requires effort but is "fun." He now possesses a "very real and concrete Double body that he is able to access quite quickly in just about any situation." The final step is to "begin to explore his world."

Having created and solidified the Double Body, this chapter moves into the exciting phase of using it for actual travel and exploration.

The Utility of the Double Body The Double Body is presented as "a wonderful way to explore the physical plane" and "very helpful when it comes to exploring certain aspects of the Grey Zone, especially if you are exploring certain complex sensory realities."

Assuming a month of practice has resulted in a well-established Double, the reader is now "ready for the next step which is to use this powerful body... To travel beyond the confines of your room."

Initiating Travel with the Double The process begins similarly to the creation exercise:

1 Comfortable Position: Sit in a comfortable position, like a

couch.

2 Home Station Focus: Become aware of the present moment, focusing

on the 'Here and Now' for at least a minute.

3 Visualize Double: Close your eyes and "visualize yourself in

your new body, as you have done throughout your prior work," floating in the middle of the room.

The Nature of Double Body Movement: Desire Is Intent Moving the Double body beyond the room is "just a matter of moving that body." If the creation exercises were done properly, the reader should already have experience moving the Double around the room.

The movement of the Double is a "difficult concept to try to put into words" because it relies on a "personal intent that is seldom... Discussed in the modern world." This is the same intent used to consciously move within a dream or control a "personal servitor."

"The act of moving the Double from one place to another basically involves the natural desire to do so. This natural desire focuses your intent and allows you to fully visualize the movement that you want within your mind." This visualization triggers "thought which quite naturally combines with psychic energy." This "energy/thought burst" is "intent in its most fundamental form: DESIRE IS INTENT." Simply put, to move your Double, "visualize your desire in the most clear and precise form possible. The best way to do this naturally is to just desire an outcome."

Consciousness, The Double, and Physicality The author states the Double body is not your consciousness; your consciousness is "free; it is beyond space and time." The psyche (total being) limits itself in the physical body to fully participate in this plane. The Double Body is a "highly complex servitor," a "powerful and highly specialized thought form." While it starts as a thought form, its connection to the ego consciousness becomes so sophisticated that it "could eventually substitute the physical body as the main focus point of the conscious ego."

This connection is established by developing the Double's new sense organs, creating a "neural link" between the conscious self and the etheric Double. This Double has both an "exterior form" (often resembling the physical body) and an "interior one" (an "etheric Central Nervous System").

Moving the Double is like moving a thought form, but "YOU are the thought form and you are therefore controlling it from within." The goal is to establish a "nearly permanent station in the Double body."

Moving Beyond the Room After comfortable movement within the room, the next step is to exit. This is achieved by "imagining, vividly and with complete focus, that your body turns and moves from one end of the room to the other." Due to prior work, intricate movements like "somersaulting through the air, flying up down and sideways like superman, or even gliding on your back as if you were swimming in a pool of water" should be possible. The author stresses that comfort in moving and sensing with the Double in the room is a "prerogative before you leave your room."

To exit, "simply will yourself through a wall and into another room or out into the street." The world then becomes "a great new mystery to be explored because there are literally no limits to where you can go and what you can see in this new form."

Challenges and the Role of Memory Exiting the training room for the first time can be challenging, as initial perceptions through the Double's eyes are often "made up of memories." This can feel like "vivid visualization and delusion." "THIS IS NOT a type of cheating but in reality it is the only way that your consciousness can at first deal with what it is trying to do at an energetic level." The mind provides "mental reference points" to help the Double "stay on target and refine its ability to focus."

Legitimate Sensory Data: Identifying "Ultra-Sensory" Perceptions You can identify when you've picked up "legitimate sensory data" beyond memory by noticing things that "don't quite seem to fit the regular pattern," especially "in the periphery of the event." These "odd breaks in expected pattern" are a "great sign that you are picking up true 'ultra-sensory' perceptions which means that your Double's abilities to perceive on its own are maturing."

The Double Body's Enhanced Perceptions "The Double body is pure energy and is therefore vibrating at a much higher frequency than the physical body that you have left behind. This higher vibratory rate means that it has access to a far greater range of the electromagnetic spectrum." This allows it to pick up:

• Probable realities
• Past and future events
• Telepathic communications
• Thought forms and non-organic entities
• Alien entities that sometimes blunder in from other dimensional

worlds

The physical world might seem "alien" through these new senses. While confirming perceptions against physical reality has some benefit (e.g., for "extra-sensory abilities" used by "early man" for hunting), Kreiter advises against spending "too much time to try to prove" the reality of Double body perceptions using physical standards. The complexities of OBE perceptions make direct comparison "very difficult." He recommends developing a "wider interpretational framework" similar to "dream events" for symbolic data.

Exercise: Traveling as your Double

This exercise outlines the practical methods for using the Double Body for extended travel and data gathering.

Goal: Explore possibility of data gathering using your Double.

1 Initial Travel & Verification:

• Begin by traveling out of the room with your Double body.
• Go to "places nearby so that afterward you can go verify your

inner visions to see if there is any correlation between what you saw and what was actually there."

• It's best to go to a physically familiar place initially, as

"Your memories act like a homing device that allows your Double body to vibrationally find the location that you seek."

2 Two Methods to Reach Destination:

• Method 1 (Fly-through): "exit your body as you usually do

by imagining yourself in your Double, hovering above the ground near where your physical body is resting." From there, "literally fly through the air, going through walls or any other physical objects... Until you get to the place that you wish to visit."

• Method 2 (Instant Materialization - Author's Preference):

"instead of projecting your Double body beside your physical body... Instead focus your attention on the one particular place you want to visit." With this method, you "instantly materializ[e] in the new place of your choosing." The key is to "first see the area I wish to visit clearly and then look[ing] at my hands" and maintaining focus until "everything begins to solidify."

3 Experiencing the New Place: Once in the new location (by either

method):

• Solidify Double: "first look down at your hands in order to

help solidify your Double in this new place."

• Engage Senses: Once you "feel really there in your Double

body," "look around and try to experience this new place with all of your senses; take note, in other words, of everything that you see, hear, feel, and perhaps even smell." Take ample time.

4 Returning: "When you are done, either fly back or quite simply

force yourself to open your physical eyes so that your consciousness is transported back into your physical body instantly."

5 Recording & Verification:

• Upon returning, "write down all of the things that you

experienced during the Out of Body excursion."

• A voice recorder during the OBE is recommended, as it helps

"maintain your focus and conscious attention on the Double body and the place that you want to visit."

• "As soon as you can, go visit the area where you traveled\...

Using your notes, try and confirm the things that you saw... Pay special attention to those things that are usually in the periphery of your attention."

Phantom Images and Events

This section defines a peculiar yet important aspect of OBEs.

Definition: "Phantom Images" are "peculiar images and events that sometimes pop in and out when you are in the Out of Body state." Examples include "a flying pterodactyl perhaps or a random chair that seems to pop in from nowhere." Environmental elements might also "morph into different shapes or disappear altogether."

Significance: It's "good to keep track of these Phantom Images because they can greatly affect your Out of Body Experience and can provide you with information that goes beyond the reasonable linear modes of information gathering that we are all used to."

Reality of Phantoms: Despite the name, "there is nothing 'unreal' about them. They are always quite legitimate sensory perceptions that are as valid as any physical object that you might encounter in the physical world." They are called "Phantoms" due to "their amazing ability to appear and disappear, and to be able to morph from one thing to another in the blink of an eye."

Returning to Your Physical Body

This section details the experience of returning to the physical body and addresses potential challenges like sleep paralysis.

The "Open Eyes" Method: "One final note... Is to just opening your eyes in order to find yourself back in your physical body. This is a very good method to get back into your physical body instantly."

The Challenge: Body Paralysis However, if you've been out for a "long time," instantly opening your eyes "can sometimes get a bit problematic." This relates to "sleep paralysis," a common fear in paranormal circles. "What is happening here most often is that the physical body has not adjusted to the return of the conscious self." The body, paralyzed as a "natural condition" for REM sleep and OBEs, struggles to adjust if consciousness returns "too quickly."

The Terrifying Aspect: Being paralyzed is traumatizing. It becomes more so because, in this state, the "physical self can become aware of things that it usually blocks out when the conscious self is fully connected to the physical senses." This includes becoming aware of

"non-organic beings and Phantom Images, things that they could never perceive during the normal waking state."

Advice During Paralysis: "So, if you use the method of just trying to open your physical eyes in order to get back into your physical body, you might find that it is somewhat difficult at first to take control of your physical form... Do not panic." It will take "a little bit of time for your physical body to adjust to the return of your conscious self. Just stay where you are, don't panic, and wait for your entire being to become cohesive again."

A Sign of Accomplishment: "If this does happen to you, I would actually take it as a sign of accomplishment. It shows that you have actually made a big change in your conscious state." It indicates you've traveled "quite far from your Home Station," leading the physical body to "shut down in order to give the traveling consciousness greater freedom." The final advice is to "stay calm and wait for your body to adjust to your return."

The chapter the concept of using the developed Double Body not just for physical world exploration, but for venturing into other dimensions.

The Double Body's Immense Potential The Double Body is hailed as a "powerful mental creation" capable of exploring "the entirety of the physical plane," from "deepest oceans" to "farthest stars." The author suggests one could spend "the rest of your life exploring this physical plane and you would never tire of the wonder and beauty that is accessible to you."

Two Basic Methods for Exploration

To explore the physical world (and by extension, the interdimensional), two methods are used:

1 "Fly-Through" Method: "I project into my double which is

usually a few feet from my physical body, and then fly to the destination of my choosing."

2 "Instant Project/Manifestation" Method (Author's Preference for

Distance): "I close my eyes and project my consciousness instantly to the place a wish to visit. I then manifest my double body there instantly as well." This is done by "first seeing the area I wish to visit clearly and then looking at my hands," maintaining focus until "everything begins to solidify."

Benefits of Each Method

• Method 1 (Fly-through): Best for being "more adventurous" or

when "not exactly sure of the location."

• Method 2 (Instant): Best for "very distant place, like another

planet, or when I know where I want to go but I don't really know how to get there."

Phantom Images Revisited: Clues to Other Realities Engaging in these explorations often leads to "curious things that will make you question the nature of reality." The first hint is the re-appearance of Phantom Images. These images lead to questions: "What do they mean? And how do they affect this physical world?"

Another baffling aspect for experienced OBE travelers is the "great lack of life out there" in the physical cosmos, despite encountering "diverse forms of alien life" scattered and few. This scarcity, combined with interdimensional Phantom Images, makes the OBE traveler question "the nature of existence, especially as it relates to highly advanced sentient life."

Mars Example: Beyond Physical Perception The author provides an example of traveling to Mars with the Double Body. Physically, Mars is barren, with "natural land formations" or abandoned, worn-down structures. However, upon spending time there, Phantom Images might appear, such as "large futuristic cities." These might initially be dismissed as "fanciful dreams." Yet, a nagging question arises: "might this vision actually be real somehow; you might begin to ponder the audacious possibility that the life that you seek might actually exist in different dimensional fields."

Interdimensional Travel: A Natural Progression After repeated experiences with such "odd visions," the OBE traveler develops a "great desire to travel not just within the physical world but interdimensionally as well." This is a "very natural step because it is quite easy to change vibrational frequencies while you are in the double body." The Phantom Images themselves are "proof" of the Double Body's "ability to perceive interdimensional data" and offer "clues as to what might be there, unseen, in those other planes of existence."

Shifting Frequencies for New Realities

Returning to the Mars example: if one were to "shift your levels of awareness," i.e., "change your doubles vibrational frequency in a certain direction," one might be "incredibly surprised to discover that in this new plane (or dimension) the planet Mars is a thriving world with incredibly interesting and diverse life."

This applies to the entire physical plane: by shifting the Double's frequencies, one can "experience this same physical area from a different dimensional perspective." This allows experiencing the "infinite variety of probable dimensions that exist there; indeed, each point in space/time holds infinity within it."

The "Awareness Dial" Applied to Interdimensional Travel The techniques from Chapter 4 (changing the receiver's dial) are recalled. Just as one picked up slightly different sensory information from planes subtly different from the Home Station, the same technique applies here. One can see Mars as it exists in the "Home Station" frequency, and then "shift your double body's frequency a bit and experience a slightly altered view."

This reveals that "Mars is barren and desert like only in some dimensions, in others it thrives with life." Recognizing this leads to a "great craving for exploring not just the physical but also the interdimensional."

Mastering the Key Component: Frequency Change While in Double Body To explore the interdimensional universe, Kreiter recommends starting by exploring the inner realms without physical movement, using the refined Double Body. Once proficient, one can then explore other physical places interdimensionally.

The "key component to the technique... Is that you use your double body to not travel somewhere in physical space, but that you instead change your double body's frequency and instantly transport yourself into another dimension." This means phasing "out of the physical plane and arrive at another plane (or dimension if you prefer) instantly."

This is achieved by "changing the frequency of your double body; I refer to this as changing the dial away from your Home Station, at other times I refer to this as changing levels of awareness. Whatever you want to call it, what it is really is the ability to deeply change the focus of your conscious attention while you are in your double body."

Exercise: Changing the Frequency of Your Double Body

This exercise provides the practical steps for consciously shifting dimensions while in your Double Body.

1 Preparation: "Begin by finding a comfortable sitting position

on your couch as usual."

2 Home Station Focus: Find your 'Here and Now' point and focus

attention on it for "at least a minute."

3 Enter Double Body: "Close your eyes and visualize yourself in

your double body as you did before. See yourself floating in the middle of your room as usual."

4 Deep Connection: Spend "at least five minutes floating like

this in your room." "Try to experience the physical room with all your double body's senses." This step is "highly important" for "establishing a deep connection with your double body," which over time will "alter your state of awareness." The author reminds us there's no need for complex meditative routines to change mental states; "All you have to do is to just visualize being in your double body and experiencing the world around you through your double's senses for a little while." This is a "playful, interesting, and natural way" to shift conscious state. Take as much time as "YOU FEEL" needed; "Time is irrelevant," and "intensity of focus is what matters." When you feel "completely focused and solid inside your double body, you are there."

5 Altering Vibrational State (Loosening Grip): "After this focus

of attention on the double body has been achieved, it is time to begin altering your vibrational state. You do this by patiently and slowly loosening your tight grip on the physical plane."

• To keep the Double focused on the physical plane, you initially

focus its attention on physical things (couch, walls, physical body). This focus is like the "Here and Now" feeling, "maintaining yourself locked into it."

• Now, you "slowly and patiently let go of that focus; let go of

that feeling/sense of being in your most present 'Here and Now' moment while in your double body."

6 Navigating Change & Maintaining Control: As you loosen focus,

"the world around you will start to change shape." This is where you need to be "most careful and truly calibrate this change." Failure to do so can lead to an "overwhelming" flood of images and loss of control, potentially causing unconsciousness or falling asleep.

• This shift happens because "your physical body is trying to

adjust itself" to your consciousness moving away, entering a "catatonic state."

• The deeper you go, the "easier it becomes to lose conscious

control and fall into unconsciousness." The key is to "let the mind relax and change frequency ranges without losing conscious control."

• Control Mechanism: As the world changes shape, "tense up on

the focus that you exert through your double body's senses." Do this by "focusing your attention on one of the random images, or sense experiences," that appear. This image acts "like an anchor holding you within that particular dimensional/vibrational range."

• Example: If walls disappear and a "gorgeous waterfall"

appears, focus attention on it and "'will' your double body's senses to fully engage with this waterfall so that you are experiencing it as fully as possible." This transforms a "seemingly phantom image" into an "objective event existing within a different plane of reality." By focusing, you are "solidify[ing] your position in a new dimensional reality."

7 Dealing with Loss of Focus: It's normal to be "knocked off"

and carried away by new images initially. This means your "ability to fine tune the change in your vibrational state is not very precise yet." The solution is to "practice focusing your attention on these random sensory experiences that keep coming up." This trains the "focus required to be able to find cohesion in a new vibrational/dimensional plane."

8 Achieving Cohesion and Travel: Continue this practice until you

can "maintain complete cohesion in a new dimensional plane for extended periods of time." "Conscious cohesion in a new dimensional plane is of key importance because without this ability you will not be able to navigate your way through the other dimensional planes of existence."

• If blasted away from a scene, don't worry, just try to attain

cohesion in the new place. This practice "will eventually allow you to control your vibrational state. In time you will find it quite easy to change from one place to another; which means that you will be traveling from one dimension to another."

The Rewards of Interdimensional Travel

This "interdimensioanlly" travel is an "amazing experience," revealing places and experiences "beyond words." An "entire lifetime can be spent doing this type of travel," and the lessons learned are "life altering." Eventually, through understanding patterns in vibrational fluctuations, one can "easily pinpoint where you want to go and what you want to see."

Once mastered, apply this to new physical locations, then move interdimensionally from there. This allows for deeper discovery, including traveling into the past or future of a place, or exploring "probable universes where things moved in a completely different causational line, creating totally different realities."

Alright, let's continue our profound exploration of "Out of Body Experiences: Quickly and Naturally" by John Kreiter. We've delved into the creation and use of the Double Body, and now we move into the crucial aspects of protection and deeper exploration.

Having learned to project and travel, the next vital step is understanding how to protect oneself in the non-physical realms. Kreiter emphasizes that while the Double Body offers inherent protection, there are still challenges to navigate.

Inherent Protection and Rare Obstacles The author begins by asserting that it is "imperative" to provide techniques for self-protection, but immediately reassures the reader: "I can't stress enough the fact that you are inherently protected while traveling in the Out of Body state." He adds that "most of the aggressive things that you will encounter out there will be of your own making." your Double Body is described as "an incredibly strong structure" and "nearly invulnerable to external damage as the term is understood from our physical perspective."

Despite this inherent safety, "it can face some obstacles that can cut your trip short or that can make these trips highly unpleasant." The chapter "basic procedures" to "overcome most of these obstacles."

The Core of Self-Defense: Energetic Control Out of Body self-defense, according to Kreiter, boils down to one major thing: ENERGETIC CONTROL. He clarifies that "energetic control" is synonymous with "the ability to control all personal action." Our common understanding of "action" is often limited to physical action. However, Kreiter stresses that

"physical action is only the external consequence of internal action; that is all physical action begins internally in the form of thoughts, emotions, and intent."

The Pitfalls of Thought Control for the Explorer Conventionally, containing and directing internal energy (or "psychic force") is often advised through "thought control." The idea is that thoughts direct the mind, which directs the brain, which then projects energy outward as emotions, thought force, and physical action. Thus, controlling thoughts should control everything else. For example, "Think better thoughts and you will have a less negative reality."

However, Kreiter argues that for the Out of Body traveler -- an "explorer, a seeker of truth" interested in "discover[ing] new realities" -- this type of thought control is "not ideal" and indeed "the worst thing possible" because "thought control destroys true perception."

He illustrates this with a compelling personal example: He once encountered what he believed was a "black hole" in the far reaches of the physical universe while traveling in his Double Body. Though feeling safe due to distance, the sheer "power of what I witnessed was so overwhelming that I felt that I was dying, that I was being ripped apart." He describes it as an "endless nothing that is so big, so deep, and so beyond scale that it pulls on the very essence of you," likening it to an extreme version of the stomach drop felt in a descending elevator, "magnified a million times." This was "probably the greatest fear I have ever felt," almost causing him to become unconscious.

He then presents two scenarios if he had applied conventional thought control:

1 Successful Thought Control: He might have successfully

distracted himself by "thinking about something else, like pink bunnies," soothing his "breaking mind." But this would have meant "skew[ing] my perceptions" and likely "zipped out of where I was and would probably have ended up in some crazy cartoon farm somewhere in another dimensional plane." He emphasizes: "Had I changed my thoughts, had I thought anything at all at that moment, I would not have seen what I saw; I would have only seen what I thought I should see." The true explorer values raw experience over comforting delusion.

2 Failed Thought Control: He would have "failed miserably,

wasting my energy trying to overcome that maddening juggernaut with my little thoughts." This would have led to losing focus, losing connection to the phenomenon, or losing memory of it -- "What a terrible waste."

For those exploring "personal desire" in OBEs, thought control is useful for shaping experiences. But for the "seeker of truth," "emotional control" (energy control) is paramount, not thought control. The seeker needs to experience "it ALL completely, with less thought if possible, not more." This means allowing "logical deductions," instincts, and perceptions (even "dark or evil") to happen freely, as this is "the only way to SEE clearly."

Therefore, "self-defense demands energetic containment which means that the OB traveler needs to control his/her emotions directly without altering his/her thoughts."

The Question: "But how is external action the consequence of internal action? And how do we stop emotion without controlling our thoughts?"

Emotion as Energetic Thrust

In our physical bodies, emotions and energetic projections are experienced differently than in the Double Body. We often forget that "all our motions and emotions are really energetic thrusts." Kreiter defines it clearly: "Emotion is energetic motion that is not expressed as physical action."

When experiencing strong emotion, he invites introspection: notice what your physical body does. Emotions tend to "tense up parts of your body in a similar way that your body might tense up when it is doing physical activity." This points to emotion being "a type of internal motion."

This process is similar to physical action: the brain sends "energetic impulses" (nerve impulses) to muscles, causing contractions and movement. "Every physical movement is energy moving energy."

Emotional energy travels through the body like nerve impulses, but often encounters "kinks" (blockages), causing it to "accumulate" and "ooze out... Like a kind of mist," felt as tension. Whether kinks exist or not, "all such emotional energy release from the body has the effect of turning you into a big giant glowing ball of energy."

In the etheric/Double Body, this emotional discharge happens similarly but "in a much cleaner fashion" because there's "no physical tissue to slow down the energetic impulses." Emotions are felt as a "knowing, as a type of angst," but still lead to "a projection of energy away from the body." This then creates a "biofeedback loop" where the symbolically experienced event generates more emotion, amplifying manifestations.

The Consequences of Emotional Projection in the Double Body

"Your emotions are your reality when you are in your double body." "Whenever you project emotion, you manifest instantly." Because the Double Body operates in a "higher vibratory field," "manifestation is instantaneous."

• Sadness can manifest a "rainy day or a gloomy grey room."
• Love can manifest a "lovely sunny day or a cute kitty."

This instantaneous manifestation can be "highly problematic" due to the "self-sustaining loop." Feeling an emotion creates a manifestation, which in turn intensifies the emotion, leading to larger, more powerful manifestations. This can quickly devolve into a "self-created pit of emotional angst," requiring either "complete control over yourself or end the Out of Body session."

Beyond self-inflicted chaos, an "emotional outburst" makes you "shine like a glow bug." This emotional energy, while appearing as objects or events to you, is perceived by other entities as "a glowing beacon that spells F-O-O-D, or at least a beacon that attracts some curious thing to investigate." He compares it to turning on a "big giant spotlight" in the deepest ocean, attracting all sorts of creatures.

While we are always "aware energy" and will attract some attention, "we can control how much energy we are projecting so that instead of radiating light like a lighthouse on a dark night, we can subdue this light so that we attract the least attention possible. This can be done through emotional control."

The Two Biggest Problems from Lack of Emotional Control

1 Self-Created Obstacles: "You create all sorts of obstacles for

yourself because as you experience negative and positive emotions. These energetic outbursts then create instantaneous manifestation within the astral (for a lack of better words) environment." These manifestations can be "distracting and sometimes even painful."

• Example: Intense rage can "literally create a monster" (e.g.,

"a large hairy dark shadow beast") that can impede travel, attack, and cause "great pain." This monster is "not some creature that existed independently... It is a thing of your own creation, that is fueled by you, and that can be just as real and debilitating as encountering the real thing."

2 Beacon for Entities: "You act like a beacon, attracting thought

forms that have been created by others, non-organic energy predators, and even alien life that is either curious or predatory in nature." This is because "emotions are a type of energetic radiation" in the inner plane, perceived as "multicolored light" and "food" by many entities.

The Solution: Energetic Containment Kreiter's personal preference for inner/astral travel is to "move unseen and unfelt" by "keeping my energy contained within myself, in other words by controlling my emotions and impulsive reactions." This doesn't mean suppressing all emotion, but rather using logical discernment to know when it's safe to express freely and when "self-defense demands energetic containment."

He believes the best way to learn this is in the "more stable" physical body, observing how physical emotions, impulses, and intense thoughts create "energetic bursts." The goal is to "practice controlling these bursts in a measured way." Once mastered in the physical, the same "feeling/intent" can be used in the Double Body.

The Mechanics of Emotional Control: Pulling Energy Inward Traditional advice like body relaxation helps emotional energy exit the body quickly (like releasing a kink in a hose), but it "does not stop emotional energy output." "However, in order to truly halt emotional energy output, what you need to do is actually pull all of that energy into yourself instead of letting it project out. This is the only way to truly stop most energy output."

He dismisses psychic shields as ineffective because they are:

• Hard to maintain.
• Require more energy to create, attracting more unwanted

attention.

• Usually break under strong emotional outbursts.
• Mentally costly due to high attention demands.
• Create a barrier, making you "less sensitive, and therefore less

aware."

Instead, he recommends pulling emotional energy inward. While his other book ("Vampire's Way to Psychic Self Defense") details breathing techniques, for the Double Body, it's done through

"feeling/intent."

Exercise: Emotional Control in the Physical Body

This exercise teaches the fundamental 'pulling in' technique for emotional energy.

1 Understand the "Sucking Feeling/Intent":

• Place "a cup or something small in front of you, on a table."
• "Try to make that cup come towards you using just your mind;

pull on it with your mind."

• The cup likely won't move, but the purpose is to "get to know

that feeling/intent of trying to suck that cup towards you." This is the sensation to use to pull emotional energy into yourself, preventing it from projecting out.

2 Practice During Daily Emotions:

• "Pay attention to yourself and your body reaction as you go

through a typical day."

• When a strong emotion (hate, love) arises, "catch yourself,

then pay attention to what you are feeling and what your body is doing."

• The author describes feeling emotional energy "running through

my body like an electrical current," "pooling in certain areas," "tensing my muscles."

• The Action: "The next time you feel a strong emotion,

instead of trying to just relax your body or trying to somehow halt this powerful energy... Try instead to pull this energy back into yourself." Use the "sucking feeling/intent" learned from the cup exercise, "pretend that you are reabsorbing that energy into yourself." You should feel "instantly better and far less emotional."

3 Practice with Impulses and Thoughts:

• Apply this to "impulsive reaction\[s\] or feeling\[s\]."

"Catch yourself in the act of it and use that sucking feeling/intent to pull that energy back." Try to contain it "before it has a chance to escape your body."

• If "suddenly frightened, contain yourself by pulling all that

fright back into yourself and hold onto it until the fright goes away."

• Even "powerful thought\[s\]" can be drained of their power so

they "no longer blocks the world around you."

Benefits of Daily Practice

Consistent practice leads to being "completely centered and grounded," experiencing an "incredible sense of freedom" from "emotional tempest[s]." The author describes feeling "like being a stationary pillar in the midst of a storm," becoming "far more sensitive to the surges of energy all around you as the people around you go about their life projecting energy left and right." This energy "accumulates and pools into tides that roll past you like wave after wave of energy."

Emotional Control in the Double Body

This section applies the 'pulling in' technique directly to the Out of Body state, revealing its profound effects on perception and reality manifestation.

Applying the Technique in OBEs

The first step is to "Get to know that feeling of being grounded and centered, that feeling of being a pillar in the tide of human emotion." In the Double Body, when any emotion arises, "pull that emotion back into yourself using the sucking feeling/intent."

When in the Double Body, "bring that feeling of being grounded back to yourself, and use the sucking feeling/intent when you need to." The author states that "The most amazing things will begin to happen when you do this."

The Immediate Effect: Collapse of Manifestations "The most obvious change will be that certain parts of the world that you are in, while in your double body, will collapse." This happens because "you have withdrawn the energy that was needed to create them; when you remove your energy, they quite simply disappear."

Two Outcomes After Emotional Energy Removal

1 Revealing True Reality: "If while in your double body, you are

moving through this physical plane, or another alien world, then sucking all this energy back into yourself will reveal the real world before you, minus all of the prejudiced baggage that you were creating."

• Kreiter reminds us that "manifestations while in the double are

almost always instantaneous so whatever we expect, we create and in that way we cloud our perceptions; so that we end up seeing what we think we should see instead of what is actually there."

• "By pulling your energy you will be assured that you are

seeing whatever world you are in as clearly as possible." This is crucial for true exploration.

2 Identifying the Grey Zone: "It can also be the case that when

you pull your energy and all your personal manifestations disappear, that you might be very surprised to note that the world around you is actually a Grey Zone or a Black Sea; a seemingly endless dark expanse."

• This means that you weren't in a separate alien world or the

physical world, but in "a personally created event; one that you had completely created with your mind."

• "So by pulling your energy back you can find out if you are

truly in an actual world that exists on its own, or if you are in a personally created event." This discernment is a powerful tool for the OBE traveler.

Traveling and Manifesting in the Grey Zone

One can travel through this "dark Grey Zone like in the same way that you might travel through an endless sea," moving away from the physical world towards other alien worlds "also contained within this place." Alternatively, one might choose "just use parts of it to manifest your wildest fantasies." In this Grey Zone, "you can create your greatest joys and your most horrendous nightmares depending on the intent and emotions that you project; energy projection creates instant manifestations easily in this place."

Encounters in the Grey Zone

The Grey Zone is also populated by "other travelers from other planes of existence." These include:

• Conscious or unconscious OBE travelers (often remembering

experiences as "odd but ordinary dreams").

• "People who have died in our physical world" -- some parts of

the Dark Sea are "full of departed people that are experiencing aspects of life beyond the flesh."

• "Alien denizens from far away worlds."

Recap of Energetic Containment

1 Practice Energetic Containment in Physical Body: Use the

"sucking feeling/intent" to pull energy inward. "Practice makes perfect."

2 Use in Double Body: Apply this same feeling/intent in the Double

Body to "stop most emotional release without clouding the Out of Body world." If an "emotional energy leak" occurs, "pull that energy back into your double body."

3 Instant Feedback: You'll "know instantly that you have been

successful because you will feel very calm and stable." If you reabsorb energy, you'll feel it "coming back into your double body." A significant portion of your "external world will disappear," possibly leaving you "facing a dark seemingly endless space" (the Grey Zone).

Addressing Encounters and Self-Defense

Consider encountering a "monstrous thing" while traveling through the physical world in your Double Body. This raises three problems:

• "How can I encounter a monster like this in the physical plane?"
• "How can I feel such intense emotion in by etheric body?"
• "How do I overcome this thing that seems to want to hurt me?"

Kreiter explains that our physical world is not rigidly "object-filled." Our physical senses are trained to ignore much "sensory data," aligning with a collective belief system. In our more powerful Double Bodies, our "new senses" pick up "all sorts of extra-sensory perceptions that are usually invisible to us." These "Phantom Images" are often:

• Thought forms (created by you or others).
• Lower non-organic life (preying on human energy).
• Higher order non-organic sentience (predatory or benevolent).

These entities can be a "big nuisance," getting in the way to "feed off your energy" or "investigate." "Fear and wrath" created thought forms can even attack.

The Solution: The good news is that if you encounter these "phantom creatures" that don't want to leave, you can "circumvent all such entities by controlling your personal energy. If you master the ability to control all emotional output, you become invisible to them." Even "wrathful entities move away because they only attack individuals who reflect energy back at them." "If you do not project or reflect emotion, you become invisible to lower order entities, and unappealing to the higher order ones. In this way, energetic containment becomes an Out of Body traveler's best friend."

This chapter elaborates on the nature and potential of the Grey Zone, positioning it as a fundamental realm for exploration, personal growth, and interaction with different realities.

The Nature of the Grey Zone The Grey Zone is described as a "very interesting place," like "the void that exists in between worlds," or "the nothing that holds everything," or "the dark sea, that contains all the worlds available for exploration."

"This Grey Zone is free from any of the constraints that bind us in any world." The distinction between worlds lies in their applicable "laws." Our physical world, for instance, has "certain energetic laws" that create "cohesiveness" and a "containment bubble," separating it from the Grey Zone and other worlds. However, this doesn't preclude "worlds within worlds or bleed through from the Grey Zone into certain sections of a particular world."

As an Out of Body traveler, you can explore:

• Our physical world
• The Grey Zone
• Other complete worlds besides our own (alien dimensions)

Travel Through the Grey Zone: Vibrational Movement Chapter 7 focused on physical world exploration with the Double Body, emphasizing the 'Home Station' feeling to stay rooted. Chapter 4 covered inner dimensional travel into the Grey Zone without a Double Body. Chapter 8 integrated these by showing how to travel interdimensionally with the Double Body. This "interdimensional travel is really just a vibrational movement through and across the Grey Zone to get from one dimension to another." Chapter 8 demonstrated how to "travel into the Grey Zone with your double body."

Distinguishing the Grey Zone

A common question arises: "How do I tell the difference between the Grey Zone and other alien worlds or dimensions?" The unfortunate truth is it's "sometimes very difficult," because

"whatever you project you instantly manifest in the Grey Zone." This makes it hard to know if you're in a new alien realm or merely projecting desires.

Kreiter offers three major ways he uses to differentiate:

1 Attempt to Manipulate Reality: "I try to make an object change

shape or disappear." If you see a tree and try to change its shape or make it disappear by projecting energy, and it doesn't, then it's "most likely a real separate thing that exists in its own world," an "alien plane," or "an alien entity" within the Grey Zone. If it does change or disappear, it's a self-created manifestation.

2 Trust Your Intuition: "Your intuition is a very powerful ally

in the Out of Body condition, trust your instincts."

3 Energetic Containment (Best Method): "The best and most

useful method that I employ is Energetic Containment." As outlined in Chapter 9, "I use the pulling in energy feeling/intent to suck energy back into my double." "If certain objects or aspects of the world that I am in disappear, I am fairly certain that these were personal creations and not individual things or worlds existing on their own." This is the most reliable way to discern between self-created illusions and independent realities.

Advantages of Using the Double Body in the Grey Zone

Using the Double Body for Grey Zone travel is "advantageous" because it allows for "certain perspectives which can only be possible when you have a strong sense of self-identity." The Double Body allows you to "experience many things from a perspective that will feel very much like having a physical body." This "familiar" frame of reference is important "at first" for understanding. It also helps "establish a more coherent understanding of how space and time work in this Zone," allowing for "new territory" and "internal maps." This "self-coherence provides a more logical constancy which can be invaluable in the darkness out there."

Reasons to Explore the Grey Zone

There are two primary reasons to explore the Grey Zone:

1 Connecting Link: "It is the connecting link between all

worlds. As such travel through this Zone is a requirement of any kind of interdimensional exploration."

2 Inner Work and Growth: "It is in this Zone that we do a great

deal of our inner work and spiritual growth."

Kreiter notes that we often explore the Grey Zone unconsciously in our dreams, but lack control or conscious memory, making directed growth difficult. By using the Double Body for conscious and directed Grey Zone exploration, one can "learn a great deal in a very short amount of time."

Probable Events

One of the Grey Zone's powerful aspects is the ability of the conscious self to interact with the "whole psyche." Kreiter defines "psyche" as the "complete being," avoiding the religiously loaded term "soul." "The conscious self, the you that you are now, is but a strand in the totality of your entire psyche." Within the Grey Zone, you can "interact with the greater part of your being and explore probable worlds where you engage in a multitude of possible alternate realities." This is done by interacting with "symbolic and sometimes quite literal images and events."

Experiencing Alternate Realities

You might experience events or react to objects not present in waking reality, such as owning a different car, or even "being a completely different person; perhaps even being a different gender." These "alternate probable events" are similar to dreaming, explaining why remembered dreams often seem "convoluted."

Conscious Exploration: To explore these probable realities consciously, "what you need to do is to follow certain objects or events and attain cohesion within them by focusing all your attention on them." Using Chapter 8's techniques, you can "engage in what might seem like complete alternate realities." These feel like "little weird dramas" you're thrust into. Because you are in your Double Body, you can "fully participate," either watching like a play or becoming a character. The best part is "you will remember these adventures completely."

Time in the Inner Zone: "The things that can be learned from such journeys are amazing." Time in this inner Zone is "measured in intensity, not in sequential movement through space." Thus, you can gain "a lifetime of experience in an hour of physical time." Imagine experiencing life as a musician, parent, thief, or saint, despite your physical reality.

Discovering Lessons from Probable Realities

By exploring feelings, images, and events projected by yourself and the psyche, you can "discover what certain probable realities might entail, and what lessons they can teach." This is like being in an "ultra-powerful virtual environment where you can freely contemplate probable futures and realities," with the psyche acting as a "super computer that talks to you through virtual events and symbols."

"Then realize that all of these probable realities DO exist somewhere; you are not imagining all this, you are traveling through space and time!"

Overcoming Phobias

The Grey Zone offers a powerful means to confront and overcome fears. Just as positive probable events can be explored, so can feared ones. People often encounter "very dark things" in the inner realms and tend to "move away quickly" or disengage. However, Kreiter suggests "it is a better idea to engage these difficult realities because overcoming them can be a powerful growth experience."

Confronting Fears in the Double Body

"Confronting phobias in this place can be one of the most difficult things that you will do in your life, but in this place, in your powerful double body, you are not powerless, and winning here can completely change your life."

Example: Illness and Spiders

• Illness: You might feel "weak all of a sudden" and experience

being "sick with some disease that you know will kill you." Exploring this in the "virtual environment" allows you to "discover why these thoughts and ideas are in here with you, why you might even want it to happen in some way, and most how you can nullify this event if you want to." This might involve experiencing the debility to find inner will for health, or realizing the illness stems from a limiting belief that can then be changed for a better outcome.

• Simple Phobia: For a phobia like a "big hairy spider," "Quite

literally fighting this spider and killing it with your double body might be how you deal with this phobia." Such a "seemingly one-dimensional battle can be incredibly empowering, especially if that spider was a symbolic representation of a bigger issue."

Manifestational Control: The Control of Energy Projection

This section highlights the direct link between consciousness, energy, and the instant creation of reality within the Grey Zone.

The ability to take your "complete double body into the Grey Zone" is a "great asset" for "controlled energy projection." In this inner plane, "all energy projection has consequence."

Negative Consequences of Energy Projection (Recap)

• "It can be both a beacon to other entities."
• "It can cloud your awareness."

Positive Consequence: Instant Creation

These negative aspects are balanced by a "very positive one; in this place you can instantly create whatever you want!" This means "you can literally do anything that you could possibly imagine in here." Similar to lucid dreaming, but with "far more aware of where you are and what is going on." You can "travel to different areas within the dark sea and can then begin to manifest entire realities from the ground up."

The Reality of Manifestations

If you've been Out of Body for a long time, the created reality "will be as real as the most real physical thing that you have ever done." This is because as you "focus your attention for longer and longer on your double body," and as your physical body "relaxes NATURALLY more and more... (even becoming completely paralyzed like it does when you are dreaming)," your journeys "into this manifestational wonderland will become as vivid and real as any waking life event has ever been."

Training Your Double

In this state, you should "explore all your energetic and manifestational capabilities" by "exploring all your desires and creating entire worlds in which to have fun in." You can also practice "controlling your energy output like I showed you in Chapter 9" to see the power of "complete energetic containment" and how it helps "overcome the obstacles." All of this "will allow you to train your double in energy projection."

Movement with Your Double Body

This section summarizes how conscious movement within the Double Body is achieved and refined.

All the previous practices (energetic containment, manifestation control) train you to become an "expert at moving and doing things with your double body." This movement requires effort because it's "markedly different" from physical movement. "This movement involves the use of your personal intent which is accessed through your highly developed focus of attention; you focus all your attention on your desire to move there, without any contradictory thought whatsoever, and you move." Once you have "mastered moving your double body, all things get a lot easier."

How to Overcome Life Obstacles

This final section of Chapter 10 highlights the profound, practical benefits of conscious Grey Zone exploration for personal growth and problem-solving in waking life.

Conscious Dream Work and Energy Re-balancing

A "great deal of the dream work that we all do when we are sleeping involves a re-balance of personal energy as we face difficult life obstacles and contemplate probable future events." This work is usually unconscious because we rarely remember dreams clearly.

"By being able to enter into the Grey Zone while fully conscious in your double body, you can now do much of this work consciously and deliberately." The benefits are "awesome" and "truly priceless." Unconscious learning often manifests as intuition or strong feelings, which can be lost if we don't trust them. Now, with conscious entry into this realm where "most dreams happen," experiences "will not be easily forgotten."

Overcoming Obstacles Through Symbolic and Literal Engagement

"You overcome life obstacles by allowing your greater psyche to project seemingly random events and ideas that you then have to overcome or face directly in one way or another." These are not random but "actually symbolic and sometimes quite literal problems and possibilities that can affect your future." You can also "consciously create probable events that can help you discover the feasibility of a future plan and can help you decide if this is something that you really want to be a part of."

Healing and Growth

"As you do this, you will be addressing issues and re-balancing your energy, while at the same time becoming much wiser because your life experience and creativity will grow at a fantastic rate."

Examples: Contemplating getting a new car or facing the possibility of divorce. Since these events "can feel VERY real when you are deeply focused, you will for all intents and purposes be actually living through these powerful life events."

Energetic Release and Freedom from Anxiety

Overcoming these obstacles in the inner realm allows you to "discover whether such probable events need or should be a part of your physical reality and what the consequences of such actions will be." Your Double Body experiences significant "energy projection" dealing with these events, sometimes so powerfully that they are "experienced intensely by the physical body as well." "This energetic movement... Can free the ego self from emotional blocks and even regulate the physical body's chemistry so that these inner experiences happen in lieu of the 'real' thing." In other words, experiencing difficult inner realities (like a terrible separation) allows your "conscious self and the physical body [to be] freed from having to experience these events in the physical world in order to release pent up anxiety."

Clear Intention and Wisdom

"It is very important when facing inner events that you make your personal intentions very clear so that you fight to overcome that obstacle whatever it may be." This allows you to "discover ways to overcome these difficulties, let go of toxic emotions, and grow wiser from each such event."

Let's continue our in-depth journey through John Kreiter's "Out of Body Experiences: Quickly and Naturally." We've now established the foundational concepts of the Double Body and its initial uses. Now, we explore the profound conclusion of the book and the crucial theoretical underpinnings found in Appendix A.

The concluding chapter shifts focus from practical techniques to the profound personal and existential implications of Out of Body experiences. It addresses one of the most "intriguing aspects" of OBE travel: its natural tendency to lead a person towards "the development of a greater awareness beyond the confines of the ego-centric self."

The Ego Under Pressure: A Shattering but Expansive Realization Kreiter points out a critical, yet "seldom talked about," issue for the OBE traveler: the impact on the ego. "From the moment you exit your physical body, your ego is put under greater and greater pressure as it begins to realize how small its ideas of self are." This "assault on the ego" begins subtly when you first see your "inert physical form" lying "helplessly across the room," and intensifies as you "explore the limits of your perceptual possibilities."

Exploring "probable realities," where you might experience entirely different life situations or even different identities ("a person or entity that you did not think you were"), begins to "erode all sense of personal ego identity." These "interdimensional jaunts" make it clear that "the you that you think you are is but one small pearl in a very large necklace."

Fear of Dissolution: The Ego's Defense Mechanism While ideally, this ego expansion happens slowly, allowing for adjustment to "ego shattering realizations," a major problem often arises as journeys become more intricate: FEAR. This fear, typically experienced as anxiety, is traced back to "the self's fear of dissolution." This anxiety can be so intense that it "can stop any further Out of Body journeys, terminating any possible chance for an expanded reality."

Growth, Not Destruction, of the Ego The "only fix for this problem is time, and the traveler's unbending desire to find out what is over that next hill." Kreiter advises taking time to "rebuild the structure of who you think you are" after "ego shattering journeys." However, he emphasizes that with each restructuring, "your ego-self will become stronger and bigger, expanding as it journeys on and on."

A crucial distinction is made: the goal is not to destroy the ego. "WE NEED THE EGO, without it we would go insane." The ego is the part of the mind that interacts with the physical realm, our intellect. To become "more powerful," the ego must become "stronger and far more complex." Believing that overcoming or destroying the ego is necessary for power and awareness is a "costly mistake" that "waste[s] a lot of time and energy" trying to subjugate something that "can never be cast out completely." Instead, it "take[s] away that extra power and ability." The true goal is to make the self "more disciplined, more complicated, so that it can shatter the boundaries and prejudices that limited its potential in the past."

Cultivating Wanderlust: The Drive for Infinite Exploration Therefore, it is "very important... To cultivate wanderlust for inner exploration; the deep desire to want to jump into an eternity just to see what happens." This ensures "you will never run out of the need to go farther, explore more, and grow bigger."

Overcoming fear through time and the desire for adventure leads to a point "very hard to describe." These journeys push "beyond our conceptions of what is possible for the self; to the very limits of what a human being can become." Such ultimate experiences "are beyond words and can only be experienced."

Becoming an Alien Being: Beyond Humanity's Limits Eventually, as a "very seasoned traveler" who has explored "the infinite mystery out there and the infinite mystery that you yourself are," you will "voluntarily let go of the rigid ideas of who you are." "When this happens, you will begin to explore realities beyond human possibility, even beyond the double body that you have so meticulously created." At this point, experiences transcend "rational semantics," and you "will essentially begin to become an alien being in your own right and might perhaps decide to live an entire life in a wholly different realm as a being that is beyond the humanity that you left behind."

This includes experiencing life as "an amorphous cloud," or "a multidimensional gestalt of selves, each separate and distinct," where "the limits of the single ego-self are broken." This allows for a "multitude of different identities existing within one body," uniting and empowering the entire gestalt.

The Transformative Return

Upon returning to the physical body, a period of adjustment is needed for the "intellectual consequences." This time of "restructuring" might even lead to questioning "the purpose of your physical existence." However, these journeys and the subsequent questioning will ultimately help you "become even more cohesive as an individual and they will greatly expand your intellect and creativity."

The Psychonaut's Freedoms

The book's techniques enable participation in dimensions usually lost in the subconscious. Even lucid dreamers seldom grasp the "grand vastness" or the possibilities if they had "greater control over the double body." As an OBE traveler, you are a "psychonaut; an explorer of interdimensional reality, an aware creature that is learning to separate itself from the physical dimension that traps most humans." Mastering these techniques grants you the freedom to:

• "Discover the extent of this physical reality in a way that is

not possible using the physical body alone."

• "Travel beyond this dimension and explore the very limits of time

and space."

• "Discover the limits of the Grey Zone, the immensity of the Dark

Sea that unites all dimensions."

• "Explore whole other worlds teaming with a variety of alien life

that is beyond the imaginings of the greatest science fiction writers."

The author expresses a "selfish desire" for more people to become "explorers of the Great Outer Worlds," to return with tales "so grandiose, that it is literally beyond words," and to share "that haunting look of utter wonderment." This shared experience fosters a sense of not being "completely alone in our journeys into the Dark Sea."

The conclusion ends with powerful quotes from Albert Einstein, Aldous Huxley, and H.P. Lovecraft, reinforcing the themes of transforming reality through thinking, doors of perception, and the wonder of the unexplored.

This appendix explores the fundamental principles governing the inner subjective realm, providing a crucial theoretical framework for understanding and navigating OBEs.

Overcoming Mistrust: The Need for Understanding Kreiter reiterates a key point from Chapter 3: "the greatest obstacle to changing states of consciousness is the mistrust, sometimes even great fear, of the inner subjective realm." People fear repressed images or dismiss subjective explorations as a "waste of time" filled with irrelevant "convoluted images and thoughts." To counter this, it's "best to first understand the laws and complexity of this inner world." Understanding this "inner plane" is

"very important to the Out of Body traveler because:"

• "It is through this inner plane that most OBE travel takes

place."

• "It can help you to understand how to navigate your way through

it once you finally get there yourself."

• "Understanding, and then eventually exploring, this environment

yourself can greatly increase your intellect and personal knowledge."

• "It allows you to imaginatively contemplate how you will move and

how you will manipulate in other realities, which can be of great help in changing negative beliefs about the possibility of Out of Body travel so that you can finally have these experiences yourself."

The author presents these "inner laws" as "objective units" for "ease of understanding," similar to how we think of physical laws. However, he warns that these "objectifications are for ease of understanding only." "All laws, or aspects, of the inner subjective world interrelate and interweave, so that no one aspect can exist alone from the rest." Everything is interconnected and affects everything else.

Defining the Inner Realm: Not "In Your Head" This "inner subjective verse" is "the world inside yourself, the world that you see when you close your external eyes and instead look within." It is "your subjective reality, your mind, and the bridge into the deepest realms of the human psyche." It's also known as the

"Dark Sea" or "Dreamscape." It can also be called a "Grey Zone," an "infinitely vast place" like a "dark ocean that separates one all-inclusive world (or dimension/plane) from the next." Our physical world is just one of many "pearls" floating in this sea, explorable once you learn to navigate.

A critical clarification is repeated: "Please note that even though I make reference to an INNER verse, this place is actually beyond Space and Time as we usually understand the term. This is an actual other place, ITS NOT IN YOUR HEAD, it's just that the only way to get there is to close your physical eyes and instead look within." The author acknowledges the difficulty of describing this complex topic with linear language, offering these guidelines as a starting point for exploring a world "beyond words or rationalistic logic."

Time and Space Are Not Linear; Nor Do They Exist as One United Entity

This section lays out a fundamental difference between our physical reality and the inner subjective realms regarding the nature of time and space.

Physical World vs. Inner Realm

In our physical world, "time is a linear function," with a past, present, and future. Movement through space requires a change in time, and vice versa. "In the inner realm, this is not the case." In the Grey Zone, it's better to think in terms of "frequencies or psychological states as opposed to coordinates." Physical movement, as we understand it, "does not happen here," but rather "there is only change in frequency or intensity."

Moving Without Moving: Frequency Modulation When we desire to travel somewhere physically, we think of cars or airplanes. For distant planets, we imagine spaceships. We rarely consider traveling "without moving physically, of going into ourselves in order to move without." Yet, that is precisely what happens when traveling "inward" into the Grey Zone. "We are essentially changing the focus and therefore the frequency range and intensity of our consciousness, which allows us to move without moving."

Time and Space Defined in the Inner Realm

"Time in the inner realm is best understood as intensity, and Space as vibrational frequency modulation." By "fine tun[ing] these through the focus of our attention," we "tune into a certain space/time coordinate." This change is like a "fine instrument correcting its pitch," or in human terms, "a change in psychological states."

Nonlocality and Superposition

"Space and Time, and therefore the totality of this inner world, have no fixed coordinates like they can have in our world." They exist in a state of "nonlocality," meaning "each point in Space and Time is interconnected. In other words, everything within this world is omnipresent; there is not separation between one thing and another." all things in this realm exist in a state of "superposition," meaning "each and every 'Here' point manifests all the possible probable states that it will ever have; all things exist at once, manifesting all possibilities, in an infinite, spacious 'Now'."

This implies that "space does not take up room like it does in the physical world; a giant universe can quite literally be contained in a grain of sand." Similarly, "Time like Space is unbound, and all time is simultaneous; the past, present, and future exist now, all at once. If space is like a musical note then time is like an intensity of focus; the more intensity, the longer the time." This also means it's possible to "travel through time without having to travel through space, or vice versa." The section concludes with Albert Einstein's famous quote on relativity and the perception of time, lending a scientific touch to the abstract concept.

Thoughts and Emotions Manifest Instantly

This section highlights a critical law of the inner realms: the immediate and direct power of your thoughts and emotions to shape your reality.

Instantaneous Manifestation

"Whatever you think or feel is instantly translated into experienced reality within the inner plane so you have to be really careful about what you think and express emotionally here." The physical world (our Home Station) is "quite thick," vibrating "at a pretty slow rate," which is why it takes "a great deal of time and effort to manifest an event or an object." In contrast, the inner plane vibrates "at a much faster rate," allowing for "instantaneous" manifestation.

Challenges of Instant Manifestation

This instant manifestation "can make traveling through some of this plane difficult" because "anything that you think about or react to can completely changes the scene that you were experiencing just a few seconds before." It also makes it "nearly impossible, until you learn to control your attention, to describe without prejudice what you have just witnessed in your travels."

Dispelling Notions of Separate Planes

The author explicitly states why he doesn't describe "the many planes that other writers sometimes speak of like: The Astral plane, The Mental plane, The Buddhic plane, etc." He refrains from this because he has "never come across these places in my travels and I suspect that much of this material on different planes is the result of the traveler's expectations." "If you expect to see demons or angels, if you expect to only be able to do this or to feel that then you will because that is what you believe, expect, and therefore create; your manifestations are instant!"

The Grey Zone as the Container

He finds it "best to think of the Grey Zone as a vast ocean that contains all other possible all-inclusive and separate worlds or planes of reality." These worlds "float within this sea like pearls in the ocean," their size "irrelevant," and sometimes "one world exists within another, without ever interfering with the other world at all."

Laws in the Grey Zone vs. Other Worlds

Within these "all-inclusive other worlds," there are "always laws that limit the range and possibility of energy, and therefore consciousness." However, "Outside these worlds, in the Grey Zone, all such laws do not apply and manifestation of any kind is always instantaneous." This is why it's "always best to leave all your baggage at home when you travel in here," meaning to release preconceived notions and expectations.

Multiple Probabilities

This section introduces the fascinating concept of probable realities existing simultaneously within and around our physical dimension, and how OBE travelers can interact with them.

Probable Realities: Events and Worlds

The "outer edge of our physical realm is full of what can be referred to as probable realities; some of these are probable events and others are all-inclusive worlds in their own right." To understand this, realize that "every single physical action/decision that you make has a number of probable alternate actions/decisions as well." For example, choosing one door means probable events exist where you chose another door or a window. Each of these probable actions exists "somewhere in its own separate space and time coordinate."

Why Probable Realities Exist

Two key reasons are given for this:

1 Consciousness Expression: "Consciousness must always express

itself completely; consciousness cannot be restricted; if it doesn't express itself in one dimension then it will find a way to express itself in another."

2 Energy Conservation: "Expression is a form of energy

projection," and "these energetic projections follow energetic law which means that this energy cannot be destroyed, it can only be changed over time." Therefore, "each of these probable actions will be expressed FULLY in a probable dimension somewhere."

Destruction as Creation: The Porcelain Figurine Analogy

The author uses the analogy of a smashed porcelain figurine. Is it "lost forever"? To understand, one must realize "there is no such thing as destruction." We operate in a "dualistic world" (black/white, good/bad, creative/destructive), but "the reality though is that nothing is ever destroyed and there are no absolutes because there is no end to reality." This is difficult to grasp on the material level due to our "very limited awareness of time."

"The greater truth is that nothing is ever destroyed, and destruction is just another form of creation."

The "God and the Rock" Paradox

Kreiter reinterprets the classic theological paradox: "If God is all-powerful, what happens if he makes a rock so heavy that he cannot lift it?" His answer, if one believes in an almighty being, is that "God did the one thing that many did not expect... He/she/it created a universe where this rock could not be lifted, and experienced that event fully with all its ramifications. He also created a universe where he could lift this rock and experienced that with all its ramifications."

"Within these two polarities there are infinite variations." Applying this to the figurine, it "still exists because there are probable worlds out there where it is still intact." There are also probabilities where it "never existed at all." "All variances exist and they exist like a blanketing cloud all around the physical world that we call home." When traveling into the inner plane via the Grey Zone, "we sometimes run into these probable realities."

Four Core Dimensions of Existence for an OBE Traveler

From these dimensions, "a truly infinite number of other dimensions (or planes)" spring forth for exploration:

1 Our Physical Universe: "this beautiful blue planet and the

seemingly infinite space all around us full of billions of other planets and galaxies."

2 Probability Matrix: "Within and around our physical universe

there is also an incredibly intricate mesh, or web; a probability matrix." Here, "all possible or probable actions are followed to their conclusion." These "probable universes often develop their own quite separate and unique planes of existence... Just like this world is doing." They also create other probable universes, continuing forever. This means our "smallest actions or thoughts help to create or augment new worlds of existence."

3 Completely Alien Worlds: "Completely alien worlds that are as

real and concrete as the physical one that we humans reside in." Some are so alien they "defy our ability to perceive them in any sane way."

4 Self-Created Events (Thought Forms): "Complete events created

by the conscious self or the greater psyche." These events, objects, and individuals are "thought form creations that are manifested instantly in the Grey Zone." They "can feel just like the physical world," but "are completely mental creations in that all things within them are willfully created thought forms."

Navigating Probable Universes

When traveling Out of Body, you might encounter something that makes you "question the validity of your experience." For example, visiting your mom's house and finding "another completely weird house there" or a "prehistoric looking forest." This might lead you to conclude your OBE is a "complete failure." However, "What could be going on here though, is that you have actually crossed over into a probable universe." A universe where your mom bought a different house, never existed, or humanity never existed. These are "events or worlds in and of themselves." Exploring these probable worlds is "incredibly rewarding" because there is "much to be experienced and learned from what could have been."

Let's complete our journey through John Kreiter's "Out of Body Experiences: Quickly and Naturally," diving into the profound insights of Appendix A and the practical alternative of Appendix B.

This appendix acts as a vital theoretical foundation, providing the metaphysical framework for understanding the nature of reality and the consciousness beyond the physical body. Kreiter emphasizes that grasping these concepts is crucial for truly navigating the inner subjective realms.

The author begins by reiterating that the greatest obstacle to changing states of consciousness is the mistrust and fear of the inner subjective realm. People often believe this inner dimension is full of "terrible repressed images" or is simply a "waste of time" filled with "convoluted images and thoughts" irrelevant to the 'real' world. To overcome this, it's essential to "first understand the laws and complexity of this inner world." This understanding is paramount for the Out of Body traveler because:

• "It is through this inner plane that most OBE travel takes

place."

• "It can help you to understand how to navigate your way through

it once you finally get there yourself."

• "Understanding, and then eventually exploring, this environment

yourself can greatly increase your intellect and personal knowledge."

• "It allows you to imaginatively contemplate how you will move and

how you will manipulate in other realities, which can be of great help in changing negative beliefs about the possibility of Out of Body travel so that you can finally have these experiences yourself."

Kreiter notes that while he presents these "inner laws" as objective units for clarity, they are in fact deeply interrelated and interweave, meaning "no one aspect can exist alone from the rest." Everything within this system affects and supports everything else.

He defines this "inner subjective verse" as the world seen when "you close your external eyes and instead look within" -- "your subjective reality, your mind, and the bridge into the deepest realms of the human psyche." This is the 'Dark Sea' or 'Dreamscape', and also the 'Grey Zone': "an infinitely vast place... Like a dark ocean that separates one all-inclusive world (or dimension/plane) from the next." Our physical world is just one "pearl" among many, all explorable within this vast sea. A crucial point is reiterated: though called an 'inner verse,' this place is "actually beyond Space and Time as we usually understand the term. This is an actual other place, ITS NOT IN YOUR HEAD, it's just that the only way to get there is to close your physical eyes and instead look within." The author acknowledges the difficulty of describing this with linear language and offers these guidelines as a starting point for exploration beyond conventional words or logic.

Time and Space Are Not Linear; Nor Do They Exist as One United Entity

This section fundamentally redefines our understanding of time and space in the context of OBEs.

In our physical world, time is linear (past, present, future), and movement through space is inextricably linked to changes in time. "In the inner realm, this is not the case." Here, the Grey Zone operates in terms of "frequencies or psychological states as opposed to coordinates." Physical movement as we know it is absent; instead, there is only "change in frequency or intensity."

When we desire to travel physically, we imagine physical locomotion. But in the inner realm, this shifts. "We are essentially changing the focus and therefore the frequency range and intensity of our consciousness, which allows us to move without moving."

Time in the inner realm is understood as intensity, and Space as vibrational frequency modulation. We "fine tune these through the focus of our attention," like tuning a musical instrument. This translates to "a change in psychological states."

The totality of this inner world, Space and Time, have "no fixed coordinates." They exist in a state of "nonlocality," meaning "each point in Space and Time is interconnected... Everything within this world is omnipresent; there is not separation between one thing and another." all things exist in a state of "superposition": "each and every 'Here' point manifests all the possible probable states that it will ever have; all things exist at once, manifesting all possibilities, in an infinite, spacious 'Now'."

This means space "does not take up room like it does in the physical world; a giant universe can quite literally be contained in a grain of sand." Time is "unbound, and all time is simultaneous." The past, present, and future exist "now, all at once." Just as space is like a musical note, time is an "intensity of focus; the more intensity, the longer the time." This allows for the possibility of traveling through time without traveling through space, or vice versa. The section is beautifully capped with Einstein's quote on relativity, "When you are courting a nice girl an hour seems like a second. When you sit on a red-hot cinder a second seems like an hour. That's relativity," offering a relatable bridge to the abstract concept.

Thoughts and Emotions Manifest Instantly

This principle is perhaps the most crucial for an OBE traveler to grasp, as it defines the direct causal link between inner states and outer reality in the non-physical.

"Whatever you think or feel is instantly translated into experienced reality within the inner plane so you have to be really careful about what you think and express emotionally here." The physical world is "thick" and vibrates slowly, requiring time and effort for manifestation. But in the faster-vibrating inner plane, manifestation is

"instantaneous."

This instantaneous nature makes travel difficult, as any thought or reaction "can completely change the scene" you are experiencing. It becomes "nearly impossible, until you learn to control your attention, to describe without prejudice what you have just witnessed."

Kreiter avoids using terms like "Astral plane," "Mental plane," or "Buddhic plane," because he suspects they are "the result of the traveler's expectations." "If you expect to see demons or angels, if you expect to only be able to do this or to feel that then you will because that is what you believe, expect, and therefore create; your manifestations are instant!"

He re-emphasizes the Grey Zone as a "vast ocean that contains all other possible all-inclusive and separate worlds or planes of reality," floating like pearls. These separate worlds have their own laws, limiting energy and consciousness. However, "Outside these worlds, in the Grey Zone, all such laws do not apply and manifestation of any kind is always instantaneous." This is why it's crucial to "leave all your baggage at home" -- all preconceived notions and expectations -- when traveling here.

Multiple Probabilities

This section unveils the concept of a multi-layered reality where every choice and event branches into infinite possibilities.

The "outer edge of our physical realm" is teeming with "probable realities," which can be "probable events" or "all-inclusive worlds." Every physical action or decision has "a number of probable alternate actions/decisions." Each probable action exists "somewhere in its own separate space and time coordinate."

This is due to two reasons:

1 Consciousness cannot be restricted; it must express itself

completely. If not in one dimension, it will find expression in another.

2 Energy projection (expression) follows energetic law, meaning

energy cannot be destroyed, only changed. Thus, "each of these probable actions will be expressed FULLY in a probable dimension somewhere."

Kreiter uses the analogy of a smashed porcelain figurine: it's not destroyed because "nothing is ever destroyed, and destruction is just another form of creation." This is hard to grasp in our linear, dualistic physical reality. The famous paradox of God and the heavy rock is reinterpreted: God creates universes where the rock can and cannot be lifted, experiencing both fully, with "infinite variations." Similarly, the porcelain figurine still exists in "probable worlds where it is still intact." "All variances exist and they exist like a blanketing cloud all around the physical world that we call home." When we travel in the Grey Zone, we can encounter these probable realities.

Four Core Dimensions of Existence for an OBE Traveler

1 Our physical universe: The planet Earth and the vast cosmos.

2 Probability matrix: An "intricate mesh" around our universe

where "all possible or probable actions are followed to their conclusion." These probable universes develop into "separate and unique planes of existence," continually creating new ones. Our smallest actions or thoughts contribute to this.

3 Completely alien worlds: Real and concrete, some so alien they

defy sane perception.

4 Self-created events (Thought Forms): Manifested instantly in the

Grey Zone by the conscious self or greater psyche. These "phantom events" feel real but are "willfully created thought forms" and "completely mental creations."

When traveling OBE, you might encounter something that makes you question validity, like your mom's house appearing as a "weird house" or a "prehistoric forest." This is often a sign you've "crossed over into a probable universe" where events unfolded differently. Exploring these probable worlds is "incredibly rewarding" for learning "what could have been."

Other Planes (All-Inclusive Alien Worlds) Have Their Own Laws

This section distinguishes between the fluid Grey Zone and distinct, structured alien worlds, emphasizing that each operates under its own unique rules.

While the Grey Zone is characterized by instantaneous manifestation and lack of fixed laws, there are other "complete planes that are quite separate, and yet connected to, the Grey Zone and the physical world." When entering these, even in the powerful Out of Body state, one must be "very careful and take note that you might be affected by the new laws that affect this new alien plane."

Kreiter explains that sometimes in dreams, we find ourselves in realities with different rules (e.g., vivid colors corresponding to mood, altered gravity). These "odd dreams" are actually "your consciousness traveling to distant alien worlds where different energetic laws apply." In the Out of Body state, we are "essentially dreaming awake," meaning we can consciously travel to these alien worlds and will be "subject to these world's laws."

The only way to deal with these new worlds is through "control and discipline," knowing "that you are safe in your double body, that your physical body is safe in our home world." Such deep excursions usually require skill and confidence. The author recounts an experience of being in a place that made him feel "so heavy that I could barely move my eyes," like being "crushed." This experience was frightening but short-lived, as his fright instantly "shot me right out of there," proving the Double is powerful and protective.

We Are Not Alone

This section directly addresses the sensitive topic of encountering other beings during OBEs, a concept that can be deeply unsettling to some.

Kreiter calls this "perhaps the hardest thing to put your head around," suggesting it could lead one to an "insane asylum if you are not careful about who you share your experiences with." He states that in the Out of Body state, even in our physical plane, we will "sometimes run into life forms (or a better description would be; other aware beings) that can seem quite alien to us." Chapter 9, on energetic containment, provides the techniques to "circumnavigate these beings if the need arises."

The general list of what you might encounter includes:

• Other Human Out of Body Travelers Just Like You: These meetings

are "often quite rare," and like people anywhere, "some are great to meet and it is better to just stay away from others."

• Dead People: Encounters with "people in your travels that are

no longer alive in the flesh and blood sense." Again, some are "interesting and rewarding," others "more pain than they are worth." These meetings are also "quite rare" and often involve "people you knew."

• Moths: Described as "multicolored jellyfish like creatures"

attracted to "the light of consciousness" (human emotion). They congregate in emotionally charged areas (disaster zones, riots, concerts) or electromagnetically active ones (seismic zones). They are "mostly benign" but can be "scary as hell until you get used to them."

• Non-Organic Predatory Life Forms: These are categorized into

lower and higher orders.

• Lower Order: Similar to Moths but actively "seek you out

and try to hook onto you so that they can feed off your energy."

• Higher Order: "Incredibly intelligent life forms" that can

control their "energetic output" and "manipulate perfectly in any dimension," appearing as anything they wish. They often try to "scare you silly so that they can then lap up this emotional energy like a cat lapping up milk." They are the "most annoying and the most dangerous." The best way to deal with them is through Energetic Control (Chapter 9). When you control your emotional energy, you become "very unappealing to them" and they "will leave you alone," as they cannot manipulate or feed off your energy. Kreiter mentions his other book, "Vampire's Way to Psychic Self-Defense," for advanced techniques on "feeding off of these creatures."

• Personal Thought Forms: For a long time, the "vast majority"

of what you see in OBEs will be "your personal thought forms." Thoughts are not "wispy ethereal things" but "actually concrete things that have form." In the inner planes, they are "tangible," and you can "smash into a thought-form wall." Unlike stable physical objects, inner world thought forms are "much more malleable and can change their arrangement in an instant." They can form complex "collectives or gestalts" that become entire events (like a forest). These can be stable for a while, then suddenly morph. Energetic Control helps deal with this instability.

• Other People's Thought Forms: You will also encounter thought

forms created by others. Most are weak and easily absorbed by your intent, but some are "true thought forms" with "much more cohesive power and therefore cannot be ignored." If you encounter something out of place like a "large blue bear," it's likely a thought construct. Weak ones or your own will disappear quickly. Powerful ones by others might "try to interact with you." Again, Energetic Control is the best way to become "invisible" and continue your journey undisturbed.

• True Aliens: Kreiter has limited experience but categorizes them

into three basic kinds:

1 Visitors to Other Worlds: When you travel to their worlds,

you are the alien. They vary greatly in appearance and behavior, some resembling known life, others like sci-fi creatures, and some indistinguishable from humans. Encounters are usually rare until you're very good at deep OBE travel.

2 Interdimensional "Accidental" Encounters: Sentient,

intelligent beings that appear "like out of nowhere, morphing into odd and beautiful things, and then flashing just as unexpectedly out of your line of sight again." They are "so powerful that it completely overshadows the scene." These can sometimes "stumble into your dreams." Your attention is "completely drawn" to them, and they might make an ordinary object (like a tree) become "incredibly intricate and beautiful," change shape, or morph and fly off.

3 Advanced Entities/Gods: These travelers have "great control

over their movements" and can "manipulate perfectly in any dimension." They are "very advanced entities that have either mastered a very advanced form of locomotive technology or entities that no longer require any technology at all." They "can essentially be like gods to us" and usually have agendas "far beyond any human conceptions of good and evil." Kreiter advises giving them "a wide birth" and letting them be. The best way to deal with them is through Energetic Control. When they see you have energetic control, they perceive you as having "self-direction or will" and "tend to just leave you alone instead of using you like a farmer using a carrot."

Appendix A concludes by acknowledging its length and complexity. The data is "inextricably complex and interrelated," making linear explanation difficult. "Everything is interlinked though, all is one." The purpose is to provide "general directions" while "labeling as little as possible" so that the reader does not impose the author's "personal prejudices" onto their own journeys. The hope is that this material helps the reader navigate the OBE state while maintaining personal freedom of experience.

This appendix presents an alternative, often easier, method for achieving Out of Body Experiences, particularly beneficial for beginners or those struggling with the Double Body method.

Introduction to Mental Projection

Kreiter notes that for some, "it is much more enjoyable and it is much easier to attain Out of Body Experiences by forgetting about the astral/double body altogether and first trying what I referred to as Mental Projection." This technique is very similar to Remote Viewing.

Definition: "What you are actually doing in Mental Projection is projecting your mind to another place without the help of an astral or double body." This can be done from a "very wakeful state" anytime, day or night, for 15 minutes to half an hour. Mental Projection is "much easier for the ego handle because this method makes the ego feel like it is in complete control at all times." This makes it "one of the best ways to become successful at Out of Body projection."

Once mastered, one can move on to developing the Double Body (Chapters 5 & 6) or stick solely to Mental Projection. Kreiter finds Mental Projection excellent for "fast reconnaissance" of a place or exploring "a complex idea within the Grey Zone." The Double Body, however, is the "quintessential construct needed when you want to leave the physical realm completely."

How to Do Mental Projection (Exercise)

1 Preparation: Find "a nice quiet place" where you can be alone

for 15 to 30 minutes. Ensure you are "not mentally or physically exhausted," as the trick is to "stay awake and consciously control the direction of your mind." Take a comfortable sitting position, preferably on a chair.

2 Breathing and Home Station Focus: Take "a few deep breaths" to

cleanse your mind and relax. Then, with eyes open, "focus on your Home Station (see Chapter 4) for at least one full minute."

3 Visualize Destination (Place): "Now, close your eyes and

visualize a place where you would like to go." It can be anywhere, but for beginners, it's important to choose a place "you know... You have been there before." As you improve, you can project to new, unknown places globally or even across the universe.

4 Engage All Senses: "Imagine this place as vividly as possible.

Try to visualize with every one of your senses; that is don't just try to see the place but also try to hear the sounds from that place, feel the environment around you, smell the environment, and perhaps even taste the environment."

5 Visualize Concept (Alternative): If you're interested in

exploring a concept rather than a physical place, close your eyes after Home Station focus and allow your senses to relax, naturally carrying you into the Grey Zone. Instead of focusing on random visions, "try to focus on the concept or idea that you wish to contemplate." Use "the strength of your focus and attention to bring the idea that you want to study into your mind." In the Grey Zone's fluidity, your mind can "move ideas around easily, test probable scenarios, project into future possibilities, approach ideas from different angles," using your "full power of your intellect on any problem."

6 Sustain Visualization (15 minutes): For 15 minutes, "try to

visualize that place or the concept that you wish to explore in the most detailed way possible." This can be difficult as the mind "has a natural desire to wander." It's your task to "stay focused" and continually "bring your mind back" if it drifts. If you start feeling mentally tired, daydreaming, or dozing off, "catch yourself and bring yourself back to a conscious state." The goal is to "consciously will your mind to a certain place or within the bounds of a certain concept," avoiding "free-flow or wandering."

7 Awareness and Recording: When you have mentally projected, "try

to become as aware as possible of all the things around you." Have a "pen and paper ready" to write down the details and perceptions when you come out of your 'trance.'

8 Making Sense: After returning and reviewing your notes, "see if

there's any way that you can make sense of the new information." This process "can really help your ego awareness to understand that it has the possibility of being far more flexible in its perceptions."

This completes our thorough elucidation of John Kreiter's "Out of Body Experiences: Quickly and Naturally." We've covered the philosophical underpinnings, the practical exercises for shifting awareness and creating the Double Body, navigating various non-physical realms, and understanding the core principles that govern these extraordinary experiences.

To grasp the Alchemical perspective, the author suggests starting with the "normal human Cognitive Stance"---the prevalent, rational "mundane world view." This perspective, shared by the majority, sees reality as a "very intricate society made of things," where humans are "objects surrounded by other objects." Rationality, considered "sanity and correct thinking," is built on a "narrow logic" derived from a "mechanical interpretation of reality." Within this framework, humans are "meat machines," surrounded by "hard non-sentient objects," and reason is the sole means of effective functioning. Humans are seen as the "apex creature," the only truly sentient beings on the planet.

Kreiter then highlights the limitations of this "limited Cognitive Structure." While physics reveals an "interconnectedness," biology challenges "modern evolutionary causality models," and chemistry hits "insurmountable walls," humanity remains "deeply stuck in a rational stance," akin to a "schizophrenic madman." This suggests a willful ignorance of deeper truths. Despite its benefits (like allowing a shared reality for cooperation), this rational stance portrays life as "cold, predictable, and full of limits."

The author defines "Cognitive Position" as "The organizational blueprint that defines how an aware being structures thoughts, experience and sensual data." This position is influenced by biology, beliefs, energetic level, and external factors. "There are an infinite number of cognitive positions, and each one provides a different world view." Therefore, "Changing Cognitive Positions can allow a person to see/experience and act upon the world in different ways."

A "small shift in Cognitive Positions" is achievable by changing beliefs. Each "belief gestalt" inherently carries its own "logical structure" and "causality matrix," meaning it dictates its own understanding of cause and effect. The rationalist claim of only one valid logic is dismissed, with the author promising to explore "many types of logic" in Chapter 2. A belief structure is likened to a "large sieve" that filters what data is perceived and what is blocked.

To illustrate this, Kreiter uses the example of a boulder in a barren field.

• A rationalistic atheist sees "granite or granitoid," an

object, the "end result of cold and highly efficient geological process."

• A fervent religionist sees "a miracle," "the will of God," a

"big rock created by God in the beginning of time," embodying "Interconnection" and "hope."

• The "Same place, same boulder, different mental

structures." This powerfully conveys how subjective interpretation shapes objective reality. The author adds that "A very large variance in Cognitive Positions... Can reveal wholly different worlds; no more boulder, totally different place!"

From an Alchemical perspective, "Cognitive Positions create reality, not the other way around." Using the dominant Western "rationality" as the lens, the book interprets the modern world. Increased population and technology have led to a "chaotic and downright crazy" environment where constant information flow means you "can't even cough without somebody catching it on video and sharing it with the rest of humanity." This "interconnectedness" leads to billions of minds, not always interested in "friendly interaction," but often in "pushing their agendas and opinions on others."

"Political Correctness" is identified as the "newest religious buzz phrase," a dictatorial system enforcing a "certain life strategy." Deviating from it leads to punishment by peers or the state. The widespread adoption of this "all-inclusive herd" mentality, amplified by technology, makes it "one of the biggest memes on this planet." Despite claims of individual freedom, humanity is increasingly influenced by "belief structures" that make people "give up their individuality and share one mind and one social ideal."

The author then introduces Memetics, a more recent concept related to evolution, to explain this phenomenon. While memes are commonly thought of as fads, their "incredible power in all human affairs" is highlighted. A meme is "that which is imitated from person to person." The author draws a direct "amazing correlation between genes and memes." Just as biological evolution is the copying of genetic material with variation and selection, a meme is a "different type of copying process that serves the same purpose as genetic material!" The profound aspect is that this mechanism is "completely information based; there is absolutely nothing physical about it, it is a completely subjective event that later produces objective results in the host, without the need for genetic transference at all."

Memetics offers a rational model to understand history and humanity's future, viewing belief structures like religions or political ideologies as "large and complex memes." These memes "seem to exist like living organisms that have the need to propagate themselves, going from one human mind to the next."

A truly alarming concept is then introduced: a meme "can dedicate some or all of the resources of the host body to try and replicate itself in more and more minds." This leads to the meme growing in "size and power," becoming "stronger, and live longer," chillingly reminiscent of a "zombie apocalypse" or "pod people" scenario. The author stresses that this is not a metaphor, but a "good cause and effect model" studied by scientists.

The phrase "dedicates some or all of the resources of the host body to try and replicate itself" is highlighted as particularly "scary." A meme, "just like a biological invader, actually uses the host body to try and replicate itself. It quite literally forces the body to go out and infect as many people as it can." This parallels a genetic trait's success with the host's ability to replicate it. The "Politically Correct meme" is an example: converts become "propaganda campaign[ers]" using their resources to convert others.

Memetics, while "amazing science" for understanding the world, has a major flaw from the rational perspective: "Scientist can't measure the true complexity of human thought and the subjective realm in which these thoughts exist." Since it deals with the unmeasurable, it's "not taken very seriously." This rational "Cognitive Stance" demands objective measurements, concluding that "all that can't be measured, that can't be defined as an object, is not real."

The author acknowledges the difficulty of a purely rational explanation, as memetics falls short in explaining the origin of memes or why some thrive while others fade. This will be addressed by the "Alchemical Cognitive Stance" in the next chapter.

The illusion of a simple "antidote" to harmful memes, like unplugging from social media, is dispelled. Such detachment is "most often a near impossibility" in modern interconnected life. Even those who can detach are not safe, as the world is "full of an ever-growing population that is itself infected by the many memes of the times." These "belief structures" literally "turn those infected into robots/zombies that serve this powerful new belief structure."

The crucial point: "These robots serve this new meme... They provide these new memes with energy."

The "adherents of this new meme" (the "robots/zombies") give up their energy, even their "life force," for these beliefs, often believing it's the "correct thing to do." They fail to realize that "human thought and attention are very powerful commodities that are being used to feed structures that do not have humanity's best interest in any way." This energetic sacrifice, driven by the desire to "save the world" and propagate beliefs, is seen as a "symptom of viral infection" from the very memes they spread.

The author uses the "gravity" analogy to show the futility of arguing against deeply ingrained belief structures: like trying to convince a rationalist they can walk on clouds. Such attempts only lead to conflict and energy loss.

A person who "unplugs" from this "gigantic battle of opposing memes" cannot escape for long. As the "battle rages and grows," they will feel its effects "physically and mentally." The mass projection of attention into belief structures manifests them in the physical world, affecting everything from jobs to the cost of living. The "lone person" will eventually be "forced to convert, act like a convert, or flee."

The modern world's "mass migration" and resource scarcity are presented as "rational" consequences, but the author questions if this "misery" is inevitable. He states that "modern memes create change that is touted as being 'inevitable' by those very memetic forces (rationality being one of the biggest right now) that are causing all the change in the first place."

This understanding, introduced through Memetics from a rational perspective, is the beginning of "great 'illumination'," the "first and most precious jewel in the great Alchemical work," and the "first step in the process of attainment of ILLUMINATUS."

However, to fully grasp this illumination and the "ultimate cause of things," a "different Cognitive Position" is necessary. The rational mind, despite believing it holds all answers, is "very narrow" and its beliefs "block out sensory data that is crucial in understanding what is really going on in this world." Therefore, the author must present the modern world from a different "Cognitive Position."

This concludes the detailed breakdown of the Introduction and Chapter 1. The stage is set for a close look at the Alchemical perspective, emphasizing energy, unseen forces, and the power of conscious manipulation to reclaim agency. The key concepts introduced are the "Dark Sea," "Archons," "memes," and the pivotal role of "Cognitive Position" in shaping reality, and the core idea that everything stems from "Internal Action."

Let's go deeper into the profound teachings of "Overcoming the Archon Through Alchemy," meticulously examining each chapter to bring its wisdom to life.

The author immediately sets the Alchemist's perception apart from the "normal human Cognitive Stance" discussed in the Introduction. For an Alchemist, the world is not merely seen in one way; rather, there are "many different ways to view the world," but only one is considered most accurate: the Energetic Cognitive Position.

From this perspective, the world ceases to be a collection of solid objects. Instead, "life and reality can be perceived as energy." This means that what we experience as reality is fundamentally shaped by "fluctuations and alterations of energy." these energetic movements are not constrained by the linear cause-and-effect models that dominate the rational mind. This liberation from linear thought allows Alchemists to "experience time in ways that are very difficult for the average person to even conceptualize." The author admits his own "fondness for linear sequences" which aids his writing, showing the challenge of describing such non-linear realities in conventional language.

The world, from an Alchemist's energetic perspective, is an "infinitely magical place" that lacks the "solidity that the average person takes for granted." It is seen as a "churning sea of energy," a "Great Dark Sea"---deep, turbulent, and unknown, simultaneously enticing and frightening. Within this vast energetic ocean, human beings are perceived as "only small bubbles of aware energy, caught within the tides of a Great Dark Unknown."

These "aware life" bubbles, from single-celled organisms to the largest creatures, are "natural bi-products created by the Great Dark Sea as it churns and twist in endless movement." Our individual existence, like that of any bubble, is "brief; here one moment and gone the next." This continuous creation and collapse through "endless pressure" is what defines an "existence or a Life Cycle." Yet, even within this brief existence, there is hope for "evolutionary change and growth."

For the Alchemist, the world is not a rigid, mechanical place

Change isn't achieved through physically intensive manipulations of objects. Instead, "everything is fluctuating energy," and altering one thing into another involves manipulating these energetic oscillations. This doesn't require physical "tools or mechanics per se"; rather, it demands "the focus and manipulation of energy."

The core Alchemical tenet is that "'all' is energy." The only distinction between different "things" lies in their "oscillations of this energy," which can be modified through the Alchemist's awareness. This manipulation of awareness is possible through the conscious "acquisition and the correct deployment of energy through personal attention."

Therefore, for an Alchemist, "energy is everything; it is how they get things done and it is how they see the world."

From this viewpoint, the accelerated changes and perceived war on human freedoms are purely "energetic affair[s]." When observing the "modern war upon human freedoms and individuality," Alchemists don't see mere "memes or belief structures"; they perceive "fluctuating energy created as a result of:"

• "the unending movements of the Great Dark Sea"
• "as a result of human attention and Intent"
• "and as result of external 'Alien' Intent"

The most shocking revelation from this Alchemical perspective is introduced here: "From a rational Cognitive Perspective, to contemplate the possibility that there are external forces, and even more incredibly Alien life, that are manipulating humanity in order to consume humanity in the same way that we humans consume cattle, seems totally insane." However, "But from an Alchemist's point of view, from an energetic point of view, that is exactly what is going on!"

The author points out that while the average person focuses on dogmas, political ideologies, and physical conflicts, they struggle to comprehend how "ethereal things like thoughts, ideas, and belief structures could possibly bring about great change." Even if acknowledged as important, for most, the fundamental catalyst remains "physical action." This inability to perceive subtle internal energetic actions and the "Alien intent" behind them is due to an

"imposed limitation on human awareness."

An Alchemist, with their refined perception, "is able to clearly perceive these Internal Actions and Alien intent that shape human reality." To them, these "seemingly ethereal things are not invisible suppositions, they are in fact quite real things that they can clearly identify and manipulate." This heightened perception allows an Alchemist to see how thoughts, ideas, and intent "churn within the space around us," and how many of them are "being projected from a distant mind that desires sustenance."

The core question then arises: Why does the Alchemist's energetic view matter to you? The answer is pragmatic: it "shows Alchemists a way to fight against the negative external forces that now rule this planet." The existence of oppressive forces has been known for millennia, and while many researchers share this information, they often lack a solution for "how to cancel out these negative external forces; a way to truly fight and overcome this dark control!"

The author states his purpose for writing the book: to provide a clearer picture and, most to offer "information that I find lacking through other sources" on how to confront and overcome these forces. The common advice to "realize what is going on, and fight against it by not taking part in the corruption" is deemed insufficient. Ignoring or physically resisting these "Archonic forces" is "impossible" because "a meme that has become big enough" cannot be avoided.

"The only possible way to fight and win this war is through the correct and constant use of INTERNAL MANIPULATION / ACTION."

This book's central focus is "how to truly fight this malevolent... Force, before the coming 'technological singularity' makes any large resistance impossible." To achieve this, the author will reveal Alchemical methods "hitherto been hidden behind jargon, metaphor and garble," providing a "logical framework for what is going on," and "how to succeed where so many others are now failing: And that is to provide a structured and systemic methodology that can beat the Archonic forces that are currently consuming the human race."

The ultimate hope is for the reader to achieve a "happier, fuller life," "expand your freedom," and collectively "begin to turn the tide against the Great Archon and bring forth a new era in human development." The author stresses that these techniques offer a "coherent and structured outline" for effective action.

The author emphasizes that Alchemy is not flawed chemistry, but a deeply "misunderstood body of knowledge" due to the "reasoning mind that now rules human perception." He boldly declares: "Alchemy is the beginning and the end (the Alpha and Omega) of all occult knowledge, and it represents in my opinion, the best (and perhaps only) way to both attain power and escape the predatory forces that now stand above humanity." It offers a path to "recover the power that is being sucked out of you every second of every day, and how to use that power to better your world and escape imprisonment."

The book's methodology starts with a rational view, then introduces the Alchemical "Energetic Cognitive Position," showing that there are "many different types of logic," not just the mechanistic cause-and-effect logic familiar to the rational mind. Modern physics and computing, particularly Quantum Logic or Quantum Mechanics, serve as examples of "accepted yet wholly divergent logic."

Newtonian Logic operates on a "polarity framework" of dualities (yes/no, up/down, 0/1). This logic, hardwired into the human brain, simplifies complexity and allows for technological advancements like computers.

However, this linear logic fails to explain or calculate "the infinitely small or the infinitely large," which are increasingly relevant. This leads to the need for Quantum Logic, a "very powerful and complex cause and effect model that can be used to explain things that seem almost magical to the human mind." The author links this to his previous work on Out of Body Experiences, which defies conventional space and time.

Unlike binary logic, the quantum model "relies on a distributive law that covers multiple universe probabilities." This "sounds crazy" but is at the heart of quantum computers, which "literally tap into multiple universes to get answers."

The famous Schrödinger's Cat thought experiment is used to illustrate this. A cat in a sealed box, exposed to a radioactive decay possibility, is considered "both alive and dead at the same time" by mathematics. The act of "opening the box and looking... Collapses one world view," forcing the cat into a definite state (alive or dead). This act of "witnessing it, of paying attention to it, creates a probable world and collapses others!" Similarly, quantum computer calculations cannot be witnessed during execution, as observation "collapses the probable world," making the computer act like a "magical oracle that is literally tapping into other dimensions of existence for answers!"

The author assures the reader that full comprehension of Quantum Logic isn't necessary for the book's application. Its purpose is simply to "expose you to a whole new logic and a whole new world view that is being used right now by established scientists," demonstrating the legitimacy and covering nature of different logical views. A "new logical view can completely alter the way a person perceives reality, and as a result, provides a totally different set of possibilities (or tools) that can be used to change the shape of reality."

The "energetic view" is also a different logic, offering different laws for cause and effect. Unlike quantum logic, it requires no complex tools; "the Logic of the Energetic View can be used by a lone human being without any physical contraptions." The only requirement is "the training and modulation of awareness." This opens the explanation of the Alchemical Trinity and its inherent power.